Unit 1: Friendship .
Date of teaching:
Period : 03
Unit 1: FRIENDSHIP
Part: Reading
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content : + To introduce Ss to the passage about friendship
+ To provide Ss with some new words relating to the topic
• Language function: + Reading the passage for gist and for specific information
+ Expressing their ideas about friendship
• Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
- to develop their reading comprehension
- aware of the importance of friends in their life
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary: unselfishness, loyalty, constancy…
b) Grammar : no structure
2. Skills: Reading
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/ activities: question- answer, multiple choice, gap-fill, discussion
5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, pictures
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
a. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
+ Has a short chat with the Ss
b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson: (no checking)
• Presentation of the new material: (40ms)
Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher:
Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Unit 1: Friendship .
Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher:
Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
4ms
8ms
20ms
I. Lead-in
-sets a situation:” When you
have happiness or sadness,
who do you often share with?”
-makes some questions:
1. Do you have many
friends?
2. What do you think about
a true friend?
3.What qualities/ conditions
to have a true friendship?
-gives feedback
-tells the aim of the lesson:
Friendship
II. Before you read
-asks Ss to tell the qualities of
true friendship, then teaches
new words
Teach word by word following
the principle and steps of
teaching words
New words:
+ selfish (a): # unselfish (a)
-> selfishness (n) #
unselfishness (n)
+ constant (a) –constancy (n)
+ loyal (a) – loyalty (n)
+ trust (n)
+ sympathy (n)
-checks understanding of the
new words
III. While you read
-asks Ss to read the passage
and do the tasks below
• Task 2
-asks Ss to read the reading
and do task 2
-lets Ss do the task in 2 ms
-asks Ss to give their answer-
gives feedback
The keys:
B. (Conditions of true
friendship)
• Task 1
-gives instructions
-explains the words in the box
-asks Ss to do the task
-lets Ss do the task in 3 ms
-asks Ss to give their answers
-look at the pictures ( in the
textbook)
-listen and answer the teacher’s
questions
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
-listen to the teacher and answer
-listen and guess the meaning of
the new words
-copy down the new words in
their note-books
-listen and answer
- read the passage and do the
tasks
-reread the reading and do the
task
-do the task in the allotted time
-give their answer
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions and take notes
-do the task in the allotted time
-give their answers
-listen and answer
-copy down the answers in their
note-books
Unit 1:
FRIENDSHIP
Part: Reading
Content
New words:
+ selfish (a): # unselfish (a)
-> selfishness (n) # unselfishness
(n)
+ constant (a) –constancy (n)
+ loyal (a) – loyalty (n)
+ trust (n)
+ sympathy (n)
• Task 2
The keys:
B. (Conditions of true friendship)
• Task 1
The keys:
1. mutual
2. incapable of
3. unselfish
4. acquaintance/ friend
5. give – take
6. loyal to
7. suspicious
Unit 1: Friendship .
• Homework: (4ms)
Asks Ss to write in their notebooks:
+ learn the lesson well.
+ talk about your best friend
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare part: “Speaking”
• Self –evaluation:
________________________________________________________________________________________
Date of teaching:
Period : 04
Unit 1: FRIENDSHIP
Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher:
Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Unit 1: Friendship .
Part: Speaking
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content : + To practice describing people’ physical characteristics and
personalities
+ To provide Ss with some Adjs and expressions used to describe
people’ physical characteristics and personalities
• Language function: + Asking and answering about a famous friend
• Educational aim : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ describe people’ physical characteristics and personalities, using
appropriate adjectives
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary: Adjs and expressions used to describe physical characteristics and
personalities
b) Grammar :
2. Skills: Speaking
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/activities: pair work, role-play
5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, pictures
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
a. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson: (5ms)
+ Asks Ss to write the new words about qualities
+ Asks Ss some questions about friendship
+ Gives feedback and marks
• Presentation of the new material: (35ms)
Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
4ms
6ms
25ms
I. Lead-in
-shows out the picture and ask Ss
to describe the girl
-gives feedback
-tells the aim of the lesson:
Describing people
II. Pre-practice
-hangs the chart in which there
are some words used to describe
people’s physical characteristics
-has Ss to take notes
III. Controlled-practice
• Task 1
-asks Ss to look at the pictures in
their book
-asks Ss to work in pairs and
describe them
-lets Ss do the task in 5 ms
-look at the picture and describe
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
-look at the chart on the b/b
-take notes in their note books
-look at the pictures in their
book
-work in pairs and describe the
people in the pictures
-do the task in the allotted time
-stand up and perform
Unit 1:
FRIENDSHIP
Part: Speaking
Content
Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher:
Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Unit 1: Friendship .
-calls on some Ss to stand up and
perform
-gives feedback
• Task 2
-asks Ss to look at the list of Adjs
in task 2
-helps Ss understand the some
new words
-asks Ss “Which of these
personalities is the most
important in friendship? Why?”
-gives feedback
-asks Ss to work in groups and do
task 2
-lets Ss do in 5 minutes
-goes around to offer help
-calls on one/two leader to stand
up and report their discussion
-gives feedback
• Task 3
-sets the situation (in the
textbook) and gives instructions
-helps Ss master the questions
with the suggestions
-provides Ss with some words/
word phrases in “Useful
language”
-asks Ss to work in pairs and
play the roles
-lets Ss to discuss in 8 minutes
-asks some pairs to perform their
interview
-gives feedback
-listen and answer
-look at the list of Adjs in task 2
-listen and guess the meaning of
the new words and take notes
-listen and answer the teacher’s
question
-work in groups and do the task
-do the task in the allotted time
-stand up and report
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-listen and take notes in their
note books
-work in pairs and take the roles
-do the task in the allotted time
-stand up ask and perform
-listen and answer
• Task 1
• Task 2
• Task 3
• Homework: (4ms)
Asks Ss to write in their notebooks:
+ learn the lesson well.
+ tell your classmates about one of your friend that you admire him /her.
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare part: “Listening”
• Self –evaluation:
The chart:
________________________________________________________________________________________
Describing people’s appearance
Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher:
Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Unit 1: Friendship .
Height Tall, medium, short
Build
Slim, plump(buï baãm, ñaày ñaën), overweight, thin,
well-built(löïc löôõng), normal build
Hair + Length: long, short, shoulder- length
+ Style: straight, wavy, curly, crew- cut
+ Colour: black, grey, red, brown
Others: a fringe(maùi), a bun( buùi toùc), plait( ñuoâi
sam)(to wear one’s hair in a bun/ a plait/ plaits)
Face
Oval, round, large, square, skinny(gầy trô xöông), chubby
(phuùng phính), long, with high cheekbones
Eyes Small, big, black, brown, blue
Nose
Straight, crooked, big, small, flat(teït)
Chin Pointed chin, double chin
Lips Thin, full, narrow, heart- shaped
Forehead Broad, high
Skin White, pale, suntanned, dark, brown, black
A smooth complexion/ pale complexion/ dark complexion/
clear skin/ greasy skin(da nhôøn)
General appearance Beautiful(women/ girl), handsome(men), pretty( women/
girl), good- looking( men and women), plain
Age She was in her late teens(18,19 years old), he was in his
early twenties( 21- 23), she was about thirty years old, …
Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher:
Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Unit 1: Friendship .
________________________________________________________________________________________________
Date of teaching:
Period : 05
Unit 1: FRIENDSHIP
Part: Listening
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content: + To encourage Ss to listen to a talk about one’s best friends
+ To help Ss practice listening
• Language function: Talking about a best friend
• Educational aim: At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ Listen to a monologue for specific information
+ have chances to talk about their best friends
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary: apartment building, sense of humour , …
b) Grammar : no structures
2. Skills: Listening- Speaking
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/activities: group work, question-answer, T- F statement, discussion
5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, tape
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
a. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson: (5ms)
-Calls two Ss to stand up and talk about his/ her best friend
-Gives feedback and marks
• Presentation of the new material: (35ms)
Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher:
Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Unit 1: Friendship .
Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher:
Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
6ms
8ms
15ms
I. Lead-in
-asks Ss to close their books
-divides Ss into two groups
-gives instructions” Ss go to the b/b
and write down words describing
people’s physical characteristics
and personalities as much as
possible in 3 ms. Which groups has
the most correct words will be the
winner.”
-conducts the game
-makes some questions
1. .Have you got a best friend?
2. What qualities do you admire
him/ her?
-gives feedback
-tells the aim of the lesson: Talking
about a best friend
II. Before you listen
-asks Ss to work in pairs , ask and
answer the questions
-calls on some pairs to stand up and
perform
-gives feedback
-lets Ss repeat the words
-introduces some new words
+ apartment building
+ sense of humour
-sets the situation: “You will listen
to Lan and Long talk about their
best friends“
III. While you listen
• Task 1
-asks Ss to read the information in
task 1 in 2ms
-asks Ss to guess the answers
-gives feedback
-plays the tape the first time
-asks Ss to give their answers
-plays the tape again
-gives feedback
The key:
Lan’s talk
1. F 2. F 3. T 4. F
5. T 6. F
Long’s talk
1. F 2. F 3. T 4.T 5. T
• Task 2
-asks Ss to reread the information in
task 1 again
-close their books
-sit in groups
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-play the game
-listen and answer the
teacher’s questions
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
-work in pairs , ask and answer
the questions
-stand up and perform
-listen and answer
-repeat the words
listen and guess the meaning of
the new words and take notes
-listen to the teacher
-the information in task 1 in
2ms
-guess the answers
-listen and answer
-listen to the tape and do the
task
-give their answers
-listen and answer
-reread the information in task
1 again
-guess the answers
-listen to the tape and do the
task
Unit 1:
FRIENDSHIP
Part: Listening
Content
New words:
+ apartment building
+ sense of humour
• Task 1
The keys:
LAN’s talk
1. F
2. F
3. T
4. F
5. T
6. F
Long’s talk
1. F
2. F
3. T
4.T
5. T
Unit 1: Friendship .
• Homework: (4ms)
Asks Ss to write in their notebooks:
+ learn the lesson well.
+ write a short paragraph (100 words) about your best friend
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare part: “Writing”
• Self –evaluation:
________________________________________________________________________________________
Date of teaching:
Period : 06
Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher:
Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Unit 1: Friendship .
Unit 1: FRIENDSHIP
Part: Writing
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content: To help Ss write about a friend, real or imaginary
• Language function: Practicing writing about a friend, real or imaginary
• Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
write about a friend, real or imaginary using the words and
expressions that they’ve learned in previous lesson
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary: ( review) the words and expressions about physical characteristics
and personalities
b) Grammar : ( review) the past simple and the simple present tense
2. Skills: Writing
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/activities: brainstorming, discussion
5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, pare board
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
a. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson:(5ms)
Asks Ss to talk about how Ha and Minh have been Lan’s and Long’s best friends
Gives feedback and marks
• Presentation of the new material: (36ms)
Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
5ms I. Warm up
-asks Ss to play game” Guessing
game”
-gives instructions” One student
goes to the b/b and T gives her/ him
a piece of paper with the name of
one student in the class. Others
have to ask Yes/ No questions to
find out who he is- (Ss should ask
about the appearance, personalities
or clothes…)”
Eg: Is the person the boy/ girl?
Is he/ she tall/ short?
…
(The game continues until the time
is up)
-conducts the game
-tells the aim of the lesson: Writing
-listen to the teacher
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-play the game
- listen to the teacher
Unit 1:
FRIENDSHIP
Part: Writing
Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher:
Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Unit 1: Friendship .
10ms
15ms
6ms
about a friend, real or imaginary
II. Pre-Writing
• Task 1
-asks Ss to tell what they want to
know about when they write about a
friend
-gives feedback
( Name, age, home address, when
and where first met, his/ her
personalities, physical
characteristics, what you like about
him /her)
-divides Ss into 3 groups
-gives some pieces of papers having
the table below
Where/
when
first
met
Physical
characteristics
Persona
lities
-lets Ss discuss in 3 ms
-hangs the chart on the b/b
-gives feedback( adds some more if
necessary)
-provides Ss with some structures
and an outline
+ We first met at / when …
+ We have a lot in common …
+ What I like most about him/ her
is / that …
-calls on one good student to stand
up and asks him/ her about his/ her
friend basing on the outline to get
the answers as a model
III. While-writing
-ask Ss to work individually and
write about their friend/ real or
imaginary basing on the outline
-lets Ss do the task in 15 ms
-goes around to observe and offer
help
IV. Post writing
-asks Ss to change their
paperboards & check each other
-selects some to hang on the b/b
-has Ss correct their friends’
-listen and answer
-listen and answer
-sit in groups
-get the papers
-do the task in the allotted
time
-look at the b/b
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher and take
notes
- stand up and answer
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-do the task in the allotted
time
-change their papers to check
each other
-look at their friends’ work
Content
Writing about a friend, real
or imaginary
+ Name(sex)
+ Age
+ home address
+ when and where first met
his/ her personalities
+ physical characteristics
+ what you like about him
/her
Suggestions:
+ We first met at / when …
+ We have a lot in common
…
+ What I like most about him/
her is / that …
Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher:
Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Unit 1: Friendship .
mistakes on the b/b
-gives feedback correct their friends’ mistakes
-listen and answer
• Homework: (3ms)
Asks Ss to correct the mistakes and write in their note books
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare par: “Language Focus”
• Self –evaluation:
______________________________________________________________________
Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher:
Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Unit 1: Friendship .
Date of teaching:
Period : 07
Unit 1: FRIENDSHIP
Part: Language Focus
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ distinguish the sounds /d / and /t / and pronounce them exactly
+ use some structures containing Inf with and without To appropriately
1. Vocabulary: + the words the sounds /d / and /t / in: jam, changeable …
+ Inf with To/ Inf without To
2. Structure: no structures
3. Procedures:
Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher:
Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Unit 1: Friendship .
Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher:
Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
I. Warm- up (5ms)
-greets Ss
-has a short chat with Ss
II. Checking up Previous knowledge ( no checking because the lesson is long)
III. Content of the lesson (35ms)
• Pronunciation (10ms)
-asks Ss how to pronoun these words:
enjoy, bridge , cheap, which
-gives feedback
-tells the aim of the lesson : practice the sounds /d / and /t / in a single word and practise them in
sentences
-introduces some more in the text book
-has Ss listen and repeat the words
-calls some Ss to stand up and repeat
-helps Ss practice the dialogue containing the target sounds
-calls some pairs to stand up and practice
-gives feedback
• Grammar (25ms)
Presentation and Exercises
I. A. Presentation 1 : To Inf
-asks Ss to give some Verbs followed by To inf
-gives feedback
-tells the aim of the exercise 1: To Inf
-presents the language: To infinitives are used:
1. After “ have, decide, want, hope, promise …”
2. Expressing purpose
Why are you learning E.l”
-> To get a good job
3. After “ Something, nothing, anything, nowhere, anybody…”
4. Too Adj + To Inf
Adj enough + To-inf
-gives other examples in the text book
B. Exercise 1:
-gives instructions
-lets Ss do exercise 1 in 3 ms
-asks Ss to give their answers
-gives feedback
The keys:
1. Who wants to eat something?
2. I have some letters to write
3. …
II. A. Presentation 2 : Bare Inf
-asks Ss to tell some verbs followed by Bare Inf
-gives feedback
-tell the aim of ex 2: Inf without To
-presents the language
+ After “ let, make”
+ After perception Verbs” see, hear, watch, feel…”
-gives examples in the textbook
B. Exercise 2:
-gives instructions
-asks Ss to do the same with Ex2 in 4 ms
Unit 1: Friendship .
• Self –evaluation:
Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher:
Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Unit 1: Friendship .
Date of teaching:
Period : 08
Unit 2: PERSONAL EXPERIENCES
Part: Reading
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content : + To introduce Ss to the passage about personal experiences
+ To provide Ss with some new words relating to the topic
• Language function: + Reading the passage for gist and for specific information
• Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
- to develop their reading comprehension
- draw out their own experiences in their own life
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary: idol, glance, sneaky, …
b) Grammar : no structure
2. Skills: Reading
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/ activities: question- answer, gap-fill, discussion
5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, pictures
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
b. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
+ Has a short chat with the Ss
b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson: (no checking)
• Presentation of the new material: (40ms)
Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher:
Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Unit 1: Friendship .
Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher:
Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Tim
e
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
4ms
8ms
20ms
I. Lead-in
-asks Ss to play game”
Hangman”
-gives instructions
-conducts the game
The key: Embarrassing
-makes a question” Have you
ever been in an embarrassing
situation?”
-gives feedback
-tells the aim of the lesson: An
embarrassing situation
II. Before you read
-asks Ss to look at the pictures
in their book and guess what is
happening in each of them
-gives feedback
-tells the aim of the reading:
the story about the most
embarrassing experience of the
girl
-introduces some new words:
New words:
+ idol (n) (Example)
+ glance (v) + at (Mime)
+ sneaky (a) (Translation)
-> sneaky look
+ make a fuss ( Translation)
-checks understanding of the
new words(by asking Ss to do
task 1)
III. While you read
• Task 2
-asks Ss to work in pairs, read
the passage and put the
pictures in the order of the
story
-lets Ss do the task in 5 ms
-asks Ss to give their answers
-gives feedback
The keys:
1.d 2. b 3. f 4. e
5. a 6. c
• Task 1
-gives instructions
-lets Ss do the task in 3 ms
-asks Ss to give their answers
-gives feedback
The keys:
1. glanced 2. making a fuss
3. embarrassing
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-play the game
-listen and answer the teacher’s
questions
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
-look at the pictures in their book
and guess what is happening in
each of the picture
-listen to the teacher
-listen and guess the meaning of
the new words
-copy down the new words in
their note-books
-listen and answer
-work in pairs, read the passage
and put the pictures in the order
of the story
-do the task in the allotted time
-give their answers
-listen and answer
-copy down the answers in their
note-books
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-do the task in the allotted time
-give their answers
-listen and answer
-copy down the answers in their
notebooks
Unit 2:
PERSONAL
EXPERIENCES
Part: Reading
Content
New words:
+ idol (n)
+ glance (v) + at
+ sneaky (a)
-> sneaky look
+ make a fuss
• Task 2
The keys:
1.d
2. b
3. f
4. e
5. a
6. c
Unit 1: Friendship .
• Homework: (4ms)
Asks Ss to write in their notebooks:
+ learn the lesson well.
+ write a short paragraph about one of the most experiences in your daily life
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare part: “Speaking”
• Self –evaluation:
_________________________________________________________
Date of teaching:
Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher:
Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Unit 1: Friendship .
Period : 09
Unit 2: PERSONAL EXPERIENCES
Part: Speaking
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content : + To introduce Ss to some useful structures used to talk about the past
experiences
+ To enable Ss to use the past tenses to talk about the past experiences
• Language function: + Talking about the past experiences
• Educational aim : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ use the structures to talk about a past experiences and how it affect their life
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary: old Vocabulary
b) Grammar : Revise: + The present perfect
+ The past simple
+ Make + O + Adj / V bare inf
2. Skills: Speaking
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/activities: pair work, role-play, matching
5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, pictures
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
c. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
d. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson: (5ms)
+ calls on one student to come to b/b
 write these words in E.L: + laøm oàn ( make a fuss)
+ boái roái, lung tuùng (embarrasing)
+ nhìn leùn (sneaky look)
 Asks Ss some questions about the story
+ Gives feedback and marks
• Presentation of the new material: (35ms)
Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
4ms
4ms
I. Lead-in
-makes questions:
1.. Do you like listening to
music? Why?
2. Do you like playing football?
Why?
-gives feedback
-transforms the answers
1. Listening to music makes me
-listen and answer the
teacher’s questions
-listen and answer
-look a the b/b and write down
Unit 2:
PERSONAL
EXPERIENCES
Part: Speaking
Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher:
Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Unit 1: Friendship .
27ms
relax
2. Playing football makes me
healthier
II. Pre-practice
-sets situations: “These are the
thing that you might have done or
experienced and how they might
have affected you”
-introduces:
Make + O + Adj / V bare inf
III. Controlled-practice
• Task 1
-gives instructions
-asks Ss to work in pairs and do
task 1: Matching
-lets Ss do the task in 3 ms
-calls on some Ss to stand up and
perform
-gives feedback
The keys:
1.d 2. c 3. a 4. b 5. e
• Task 2
-sets the situation( in the
textbook)
-asks Ss to work in pairs and do
the task
-lets Ss do in 5 minutes
-goes around to offer help
-asks Ss to give their answers
-gives feedback
The key:
1.b 2.d 3.h 4.a 5.e 6.g 7.c 8.f
-calls on some pairs to stand up
and play the roles
-gives feedback
• Task 3
-asks Ss to underline the
structures used to talk about past
experience in the dialogue 2
-reminds Ss of using the past
simple and the present perfect
-gives feedback
-provides Ss with some useful
structures in “Useful structures”
(T may ask some questions to get
the answers that the Ss can follow)
-asks Ss to work in pairs and
make similar dialogues
-lets Ss to discuss in 8 minutes
-listen to the teacher
-listen and take notes in their
notebook
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-work in pairs
-do the task in the allotted
time
-stand up and perform
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
-work in pairs and do the task
-do the task in the allotted
time
-give their answers
-listen and answer
-stand up and practice the
conversation
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-listen and take notes
-listen and answer
-listen and take notes in their
note books
-work in pairs and do the task
-do the task in the allotted
time
-stand up ask and perform
-listen and answer
Content
• Task 1
The keys:
1.d
2. c
3. a
4. b
5. e
• Task 2
The key:
1.b
2.d
3.h
4.a
5.e
6.g
7.c
8.f
• Task 3
1. Have you ever …?
2. How did it happen?
3. When did it happen?
4. How did the experience
affect you?
Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher:
Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Unit 1: Friendship .
-asks some pairs to perform
-gives feedback
• Homework: (4ms)
Asks Ss to write in their notebooks:
+ learn the lesson well.
+ write a short paragraph about a past experience that has had an influence on you.
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare part: “Listening”
• Self –evaluation:
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Date of teaching:
Period : 10
Unit 2: PERSONAL EXPERIENCES
Part: Listening
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content: + To encourage Ss to listen to a talk about an unforgettable experience
+ To help Ss practice listening
• Language function: Talking about an unforgettable experience – a fire
• Educational aim: At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ Listen to a monologue for specific information
+ have chances to express their agreement or disagreement
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary: memorable, embrace, terrified, …
b) Grammar : no structures
2. Skills: Listening- Speaking
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/activities: group work, question-answer, T- F statement, discussion
5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, tape
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
b. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson: (5ms)
-Calls two Ss to stand up and play the roles, talk about their past experience
-Gives feedback and marks
• Presentation of the new material: (35ms)
Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher:
Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Unit 1: Friendship .
Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher:
Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Tim
e
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
4ms
8ms
15ms
I. Lead-in
- makes some questions
1.Have you ever seen a fire?
2. How would you feel if you
were in a fire?
-gives feedback
-tells the aim of the lesson:
Talking about a fire
II. Before you listen
-asks Ss to look at the picture in
the textbook and answer the
questions
1. What can you see in the
picture?
2. Do you think what caused
the fire?
3. Do you think what the girl
learned from the fire?
-gives feedback
-lets Ss repeat the words
-introduces some new words
+ memorable (a)
+ terrify (v)
-> terrified(a)
+ embrace(v)
-sets the situation: “You are
going to listen to Christina
telling about her most
unforgettable experience on an
interview“
III. While you listen
• Task 1
-asks Ss to read the statements in
task 1 and underline the key
words
-gives feedback
-plays the tape the first time
-asks Ss to give their answers
(correct the false sentences)
-gives feedback
The key:
1. T 2. F 3. F 4. F 5. T
• Task 2
-asks Ss to read the summary and
guess the missing words
-has Ss to listen to the tape and
do the task
-asks Ss to give their answers
-listen and answer the
teacher’s questions
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
-look at the picture in the
textbook , ask and answer the
questions
-listen and answer
-repeat the words
listen and guess the meaning
of the new words and take
notes
-listen to the teacher
-read the statements in task 1
and underline the key words
-listen and answer
-listen to the tape and do the
task
-give their answers
-listen and answer
-read the summary and guess
the missing words
-listen to the tape and do the
task
-give their answers
-listen to the tape again
-share their answers with their
partners
-give their answers
-listen and answer
Unit 2:
PERSONAL
EXPERIENCES
Part: Listening
Content
New words:
+ memorable (a)
+ terrify (v)
-> terrified(a)
+ embrace(v)
• Task 1
The keys:
1. T
2. F (13 years ago)
3. F ( in the kitchen)
4. F (was sleeping)
5. T
Unit 1: Friendship .
• Homework: (4ms)
Asks Ss to write in their notebooks:
+ learn the lesson well.
+ write a short paragraph (100 words) expressing your idea about Christina‘s idea
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare part: “Writing”
• Self –evaluation:
Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher:
Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Unit 1: Friendship .
_____________________________________________
Date of teaching:
Period : 11
Unit 2: PERSONAL EXPERIENCES
Part: Writing
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content: To provide Ss with practice writing a personal letter telling about a past
experience
• Language function: Practicing writing a personal letter telling about a past experience
• Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
write a personal letter telling about a past experience
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary: ( review)
b) Grammar : ( review) the past tenses
2. Skills: Writing
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/activities: brainstorming, discussion
5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, pare board
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
b. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson:(no checking to save time for Ss to write)
• Presentation of the new material: (40ms)
Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
4ms
14ms
I. Warm up
-shows out some pictures
+ A boy who is calling for help in the
river
+ A boy who is being late for school
-makes questions:
1. Have you ever in such
situations?
2. How the experience affected
you?
-tells the aim of the lesson: Writing
about a past experience
II. Pre-Writing
-look at the pictures and
answer the teacher’s
questions
- listen to the teacher
-listen and answer
-listen and answer
Unit 2:
PERSONAL
EXPERIENCES
Part: Writing
Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher:
Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Unit 1: Friendship .
15ms
7ms
-asks Ss to tell form of a letter
-gives feedback
+ The heading( Date)
+ The salutation ( Greeting)
+ The body
+ The closing ( your love, your
son, …)
+ The signature(Name of the
writer)
-hangs the chart on the b/b
-asks Ss to read the story and
answer the following questions
1. When it happened?
2. Where it happened?
3. How it happened?
4. Who was involved?
5. How it affected the writer?
-lets Ss do in 3 ms
-asks Ss to give their answers
-gives feedback
-calls on one good student to stand
up and tell the class about his/ her
past experience
III. While-writing
-ask Ss to work individually and
write a personal letter about their
past experience basing on the
suggestions
-lets Ss do the task in 15 ms
-goes around to observe and offer
help
IV. Post writing
-asks Ss to change their
paperboards & check each other
-selects some to hang on the b/b
-has Ss correct their friends’
mistakes on the b/b
-gives feedback
-look at the chart
- read the story and answer
the questions
-do the task in the allotted
time
-listen and answer
-stand up and tell the class
about his/ her past
experience
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-do the task in the allotted
time
-change their papers to check
each other
-look at their friends’ work
-correct their friends’
mistakes
-listen and answer
Content
Writing about a personal
letter about a past
experience
+ The heading( Date)
+ The salutation ( Greeting)
+ The body
+ The closing ( your love,
your son, …)
+ The signature(Name of the
writer)
Answer the following
questions:
1. When it happened?
2. Where it happened?
3. How it happened?
4. Who was involved?
5. How it affected you?
• Homework: (4ms)
Asks Ss to correct the mistakes and write in their note books
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare par: “Language Focus”
• Self –evaluation:
Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher:
Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Unit 1: Friendship .
_________________________________________________________________
Date of teaching:
Period : 12
Unit 2: PERSONAL EXPERIENCES
Part: Language Focus
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ distinguish the sounds /m / , / n/ and / / and pronounce them exactly
+ master the tenses and use them correctly
1. Vocabulary: the words the sounds /m / , / n/ and / / in: snow, wrong …
2. Structure: Revision: The present simple, the past simple, past progressive and past perfect
3. Procedures:
Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher:
Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Unit 1: Friendship .
Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher:
Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
I. Warm- up (5ms)
-greets Ss
-has a short chat with Ss
II. Checking up Previous knowledge ( no checking because the lesson is long)
III. Content of the lesson (35ms)
• Pronunciation (10ms)
-draws on the b/ a face with a nose, a mouth smiling
-writes down the words:
mouth, nose, smiling
-introduce the three sounds: / m , / n/ , / /
-tells the aim of the lesson : practice the sounds / m , / n/ , / / in a single word and practise them in
sentences
-introduces some more in the text book
-has Ss listen and repeat the words
-calls some Ss to stand up and repeat
-helps Ss practice the dialogue containing the target sounds
-calls some pairs to stand up and practice
-gives feedback
• Grammar (25ms)
Presentation and Exercises
I. A. Presentation 1 : The present simple indicating past time
-asks Ss to give the correct form of the Verbs
1. The earth( move)….. around the sun.
2. She never (get)…….up late
-gives feedback
-helps Ss revise the simple present tense
-tells the aim of the exercise 1: The present simple indicating past time
B. Exercise 1:
-gives instructions
-lets Ss do exercise 1 in 3 ms
-asks Ss to give their answers
- gives feedback
The keys:
1.invites 2. sets
3. gets 4. waves
5. promises 6. ….
II. A. Presentation 2 : The simple past or past progressive
-asks Ss to give the correct form of the Verbs
When I (go)…. to school yesterday, I ( meet)…. him
-gives feedback
“ was going / met”
-helps Ss revise the simple past
-tells the aim of the exercise 2: The simple past or past progressive
-gives examples in the textbook
B. Exercise 2:
-gives instructions
-lets Ss do exercise 1 in 3 ms
-asks Ss to give their answers
-gives feedback
Unit 1: Friendship .
• Self –evaluation:
Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher:
Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Unit 3: A Party .
Date of teaching:
Period : 13
Unit 3: A PARTY
Part: Reading
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content : + To introduce Ss to the passage about parties
+ To provide Ss with some new words relating to the topic
• Language function: + Reading the passage for gist and for specific information
• Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
- to develop their reading comprehension
- talk their own parties
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary: celebrate, anniversary, …
b) Grammar : no structure
2. Skills: Reading
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/ activities: question- answer, gap-fill, discussion
5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, pictures
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (3ms)
c. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
+ Has a short chat with the Ss
b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson: (no checking)
• Presentation of the new material: (40ms)
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi
Huu Hong
Unit 3: A Party .
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi
Huu Hong
Tim
e
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
4ms
8ms
20ms
I. Lead-in
-asks Ss to” What is it?”
+ It is a social occasion at
which people eat and drink,
dance, enjoy themselves
+ It has 5 letters
+ It is ended in letter “Y”
The key: PARTY
-asks Ss to tell some parties
they know
-gives feedback
-tells the aim of the lesson:
Parties
II. Before you read
-asks Ss to look at the pictures
in their book and answer the
two questions
-gives feedback
-sets situation :”the passage is
about Lisa’s birthday and an
anniversary of Rosa and Luis”
-introduces some new words:
New words:
+ celebrate (v) (Translation)
+ anniversary (n)
+ weeding anniversary:
silver anniversary and golden
anniversary
-checks understanding of the
new words
III. While you read
• Task 1
-gives instructions
-lets Ss do the task in 5 ms
-asks Ss to give their answers
-gives feedback
The keys:
B.
party
W. A. party
1  
2  
3  
4 
5 
6 
7 
• Task 2
-gives instructions
-lets Ss do the task in 4 ms
-asks Ss to give their answers
-gives feedback
The keys:
1. eight-> seven
2. makes-> eats
3. food-> presents
4. anniversaries-> ages
…
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-guess the answer
-listen and answer the teacher’s
questions
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
-look at the pictures in their
book and answer the two
questions
-listen to the teacher
-listen and guess the meaning of
the new words
-copy down the new words in
their note-books
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-do the task in the allotted time
-give their answers
-listen and answer
-copy down the answers in their
note-books
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-do the task in the allotted time
-give their answers
-listen and answer
-copy down the answers in their
notebooks
Unit 3:
A PARTY
Part: Reading
Content
New words:
+ celebrate (v)
+ anniversary (n)
+ weeding anniversary:
silver anniversary and golden
anniversary
• Task 1
The keys:
B.
party
W. A.
party
1  
2  
3  
4 
5 
6 
7 
• Task 2
The keys:
1. eight-> seven
2. makes-> eats
3. food-> presents
4. anniversaries-> ages
5. months-> years
Unit 3: A Party .
• Homework: (2ms)
Asks Ss to write in their notebooks:
+ learn the lesson well.
+ talk about their own parties
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare part: “Speaking”
• Self –evaluation:
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Date of teaching :
Period : 14
Unit 3: A PARTY
Part: Speaking
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content : + To enable Ss to use appropriate language to talk about parties
• Language function: + Talking about the past parties
• Educational aim : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ use appropriate language to talk about parties and know how to
organize a party
+ have a chance to take part in competition to organize a party
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary: old Vocabulary
b) Grammar : Revise: The future tense
2. Skills: Speaking
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/activities: pair work, role-play, discussion
5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, pictures
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1ms)
e. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
f. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson: (5ms)
+ Asks Ss to write some new words : + ñaùm cöôùi vaøng
+ leã kæ nieäm
+ Asks Ss some questions about Lisa’s birthday and the anniversary of Rosa and Luis
+ Gives feedback and marks
• Presentation of the new material: (37ms)
Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
4ms
I. Lead-in
-makes questions:
1. Do you like parties?
-listen and answer the
teacher’s questions Unit 3:
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi
Huu Hong
Unit 3: A Party .
33ms
2. Have you ever been to a
party?
3. Whose party was it?
4. On what occasion?
-gives feedback
-tells the aim of the lesson:
Talking about Parties
III. Practice
• Task 1
-introduces the task and goes over
the questions
-asks Ss to work individually and
do the task
-lets Ss do the task in 5 ms
-goes around to offer help
-calls on some Ss to stand up and
perform
-gives feedback
• Task 2
-puts Ss in pairs and asks them to
ask and answer about the parties
they have been to
-calls on some pairs to stand up
and perform
-gives feedback
• Task 3
-gives instructions
-asks Ss to work in groups and do
the task following the
suggestions (the chart – at the
end of the lesson)
-provides Ss with some useful
structures of invitation:
+ Would you like to come …?
+ Please do come ….
+ We would love to have you …
-lets Ss to discuss in 8 minutes
• Task 4
-calls on the representative in
front of the class to present
-asks the rest to give their
comments
-gives feedback
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
-listen to the teacher
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-do the task in the allotted
time
-stand up and perform
-listen and answer
-work in pairs and do the task
-stand up and practice the
conversation
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-listen and answer
-listen and take notes in their
note books
-do the task in the allotted
time
-present
-present in front of the class
- to give their comments
-listen and answer
A PARTY
Part: Speaking
Content
• Task 1
• Task 2
• Task 3
• Task 4
• Homework: (2ms)
Asks Ss to write in their notebooks:
+ learn the lesson well.
+ write a short paragraph about your party. Try to convince your friends to come.
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi
Huu Hong
Unit 3: A Party .
Asks Ss to prepare part: “Listening”
• Self –evaluation:
_______________________________________________________________________
The chart:
When? Where?
Entertainment?
(Date and time) (Home /restaurant?) (Dance / music / game?)
Dressing codes?
Budget?
(formal / Planning a party ( how much to spend /
informal?) contribute?)
Who to invite? Decoration? Foods and
drinks?
(family / friends / ( colour lights / (cook our own
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi
Huu Hong
Unit 3: A Party .
relatives/ teachers bulbs / flowers?) or order?)
classmates?)
__________________________________________________________________________________
Date of teaching :
Period : 15
Unit 3: A PARTY
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi
Huu Hong
Unit 3: A Party .
Part: Listening
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content: + To encourage Ss to listen to a talk about birthday parties
+ To help Ss practice listening
• Language function: Talking about birthday parties
• Educational aim: At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ Listen to a monologue for specific information
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary: memorable, embrace, terrified, …
b) Grammar : no structures
2. Skills: Listening- Speaking
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/activities: group work, question-answer, T- F statement
5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, tape
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1ms)
c. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson: (no checking)
• Presentation of the new material: (42ms)
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi
Huu Hong
Unit 3: A Party .
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi
Huu Hong
Tim
e
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
6ms
8ms
15ms
I. Lead-in
-show out a party
-ask Ss to guess what party it is
-gives feedback: A birthday
party
- makes some questions
1. What is the date today?
2. Who was born on this
date? / this month?
-gives feedback
-asks Ss to sing the song
” Happy Birthday” to those who
were born on that date.
-tells the aim of the lesson:
Talking about a birthday
party
II. Before you listen
-introduces some new words
+ gather (v) : come together
+ clap (v) (Mime)
+ slice( n) (Picture)
+ icing (n) (Picture)
+ pink (n) (picture)
-sets the situation: “.You are
going to listen to a girl talking
about a birthday party she had
been to“
III. While you listen
• Task 1
-asks Ss to read the statements in
task 1 and underline the key
words
-gives feedback
-plays the tape the first time
-asks Ss to give their answers
(correct the false sentences)
-gives feedback
The key:
1. F 2. F 3. F 4. T 5. F
• Task 2
-asks Ss to read the questions and
guess the answers
-has Ss to listen to the tape and
do the task
-asks Ss to give their answers
-plays the tape again
-asks Ss to compare their
answers with their partners
-asks Ss to give their answers
-gives feedback(T may play the
tape to check their answers)
The key:
1. !6 years old.
2. Because it is noisy and
expensive.
3. Soft drink and biscuits.
4. …
IV. After you listen
-look at the picture and answer
-listen and answer
-listen and answer the
teacher’s questions
-listen and answer
-sing the song
” Happy Birthday”
-listen to the teacher
-listen and guess the meaning
of the new words and take
notes
-listen to the teacher
-read the statements in task 1
and underline the key words
-listen and answer
-listen to the tape and do the
task
-give their answers
-listen and answer
- read the questions and guess
the answers
-listen to the tape and do the
task
-give their answers
-listen to the tape again
-share their answers with their
partners
-give their answers
-listen and answer
-take notes in their note-books
Unit 3:
A PARTY
Part: Listening
Content
New words:
+ gather (v)
+ clap (v)
+ slice( n)
+ icing (n)
+ pink (n)
• Task 1
The keys:
1. F (in the afternoon)
2. F (About 20 guests)
3. F ( in the middle of the
party)
4. T (From 3 to 6 p.m)
5. F (only the writer with her
family)
• Task 2
The keys:
1. !6 years old.
2. Because it is noisy and
expensive.
3. Soft drink and biscuits.
4. …
Unit 3: A Party .
• Homework: (2ms)
Asks Ss to write in their notebooks:
+ write a short paragraph (100 words) about Mai’s birthday party
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare part: “Writing “
• Self –evaluation:
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Date of teaching :
Period : 16
Unit 3: A PARTY
Part: Writing
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content: To provide Ss with practice writing a letter of invitation
• Language function: Practicing writing a letter of invitation
• Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
write a letter of invitation
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary: refreshments
b) Grammar : ( review) the future tense
2. Skills: Writing
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/activities: brainstorming, discussion, gap-filling
5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, pare board
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
c. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson:(3ms)
Makes some questions to get the answers about Mai’s birthday party
Gives feedback
• Presentation of the new material: (40ms)
Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
4ms
I. Warm up
-asks Ss to play game “Hangman”
-gives instructions
-look at the b/b and
listen to the teacher’s
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi
Huu Hong
Unit 3: A Party .
16ms
-conducts the game
The key: “LETTERS”
-asks Ss to tell some kind of letters
they know
-gives feedback
-tells the aim of the lesson:
Writing a letter of
invitation
II. Pre-Writing
-makes some questions:
1. On what occasions are
parties held?
2. What kind of clothes do you
often wear at the party?
3. What kind of presents do you
often bring to the party?
-gives feedback
-asks Ss to complete the letter in
task 2
-explains the word:
+ refreshments (n)
-lets Ss do in 3 ms
-asks Ss to give their answers
-gives feedback
-hangs the chart having the
complete letter on the b/b
-asks Ss to reread the letter and
complete the following table
What party?
Where?
When?
Who to invite?
What foods? /
Drinks?
What games? /
activities?
-lets Ss do in 1 ms
-asks Ss to give their answers
-gives feedback
-asks Ss to tell the structure of
invitation in the letter
-gives feedback
+ Would you like to come …?
-provides some more
+ Please do come…
+ How about going to …?
-asks Ss to retell form of a letter
-gives feedback
+ The heading( Date)
+ The salutation ( Greeting)
+ The body
+ The closing
instructions
-play the game
-tell some kind of letters
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
-listen and answer the
teacher’s questions
-listen and answer
-listen and guess the meaning
of the word
-do the task in the allotted
time
-listen and answer
-look at the chart
-reread the letter and
complete the table
-do the task in the allotted
time
-listen and answer
-answer
-listen and answer
-listen and take note
-retell form of a letter
-listen ad answer
Unit 3:
A PARTY
Part: Writing
Content
Writing about a letter of
invitation
Task 2
The keys:
1. at home
2. to come
3. refreshments
4. to cook
5. winners
6. by Monday
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi
Huu Hong
Unit 3: A Party .
15ms
5ms
+ The signature
-asks Ss to use the information
above to do task 3
III. While-writing
-ask Ss to work in groups and
write a letter of invitation basing
on the suggestions above
-lets Ss do the task in 15 ms
-goes around to observe and offer
help
IV. Post writing
-asks Ss to change their
paperboards & check each other
-selects some to hang on the b/b
-has Ss correct their friends’
mistakes on the b/b
-gives feedback
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-do the task in the allotted
time
-change their papers to check
each other
-look at their friends’ work
-correct their friends’
mistakes
-listen and answer
• Homework: (1ms)
Asks Ss to correct the mistakes and write the complete letter in their note books
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare par: “Language Focus”
• Self –evaluation:
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi
Huu Hong
Unit 3: A Party .
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Date of teaching:
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi
Huu Hong
Unit 3: A Party .
Period : 17
Unit 3: A PARTY
Part: Language Focus
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ distinguish the sounds /l / , / h / and / r / and pronounce them exactly
+ use Passive infinitive and gerund correctly
1. Vocabulary: + the words the sounds /l / , / h / and / r / in: lemonade, library, house …
2. Structure: Passive infinitive and gerund
3. Procedures:
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi
Huu Hong
Unit 3: A Party .
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi
Huu Hong
I. Warm- up (5ms)
-greets Ss
-has a short chat with Ss
II. Checking up Previous knowledge( no checking because the lesson is long)
III. Content of the lesson (35ms)
• Pronunciation (10ms)
-draws on the b/b
+ a pair of glasses
+ a ring
+ a house
-introduce the three sounds: /l / , / h / and / r /
-tells the aim of the lesson : practice the sounds /l / , / h / and / r / in a single word and practise them in
sentences
-introduces some more in the text book
-has Ss listen and repeat the words
-calls some Ss to stand up and repeat
-helps Ss practice the dialogue containing the target sounds
-calls some pairs to stand up and practice
-gives feedback
• Grammar (25ms)
Presentation and Exercises
I. A. Presentation 1 : “Inf and Gerund”
Exercise 1
-asks Ss to give the correct form of the Verbs
1. They hate ( stay).. at home all day.
2. She was asked (answer) … the question.
-gives feedback
The keys:
1. staying
2. to answer
-tells the aim of the exercise 1: “Inf and Gerund”
B. Exercise 1:
-gives instructions
-lets Ss do exercise 1 in 3 ms
-asks Ss to give their answers
-gives feedback
The keys:
1.having
2. getting
3. to tell
4. practicing
5. to see
II. A. Presentation 2 : Passive infinitive/ Gerund
-asks Ss to give the correct form of the Verbs
1. I hope (give)… a present by my mother.
2. The mouse avoided (catch)… by coming out when the house was empty and the cat was outside.
-gives feedback
-> to be given
-> being caught
Unit 3: A Party .
• Self –evalua
•
• Self –evaluation:
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi
Huu Hong
Date of teaching:
Period : 21
Unit 4: VOLUNTEER WORK
Part: Reading
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content : + To introduce Ss to the passage about volunteer work
+ To provide Ss with some new words relating to the topic
• Language function: + Reading the passage for gist and for specific information
• Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
- develop their reading comprehension
- take part in volunteer work frequently
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary: volunteer, orphanage, handicapped, participate, …
b) Grammar : no structure
2. Skills: Reading
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/ activities: multiple choice, gap-fill, questions – answer, discussion
5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, pictures
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
d. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
+ Has a short chat with the Ss
b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson: (no checking)
• Presentation of the new material: (40ms)
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Tim
e
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
4ms
8ms
I. Lead-in
-shows out some pictures of
“volunteer Ss doing some things
to help people in mountain areas”
-asks Ss :
1. Who are they?
2. What are they doing?
3. What do you call the work
that they are doing?
-gives feedback
The key: VOLUNTEER WORK
-asks Ss to tell some activities
that the volunteers often do to
help people
-gives feedback
-tells the aim of the lesson:
Volunteer Work
II. Before you read
-asks Ss to look at the pictures in
their book and tell some things
about them
-gives feedback
-asks Ss to work in pairs, read the
saying and discuss its meaning
-gives feedback
“If S.O gives you sth to eat, you
will not heel hungry but it won’t
last long. If S.O gives you an
opportunity t work or teaches you
how to work, you will earn your
own living for a long time”
-introduces some new words:
New words:
+ volunteer (v , n)
-> voluntary (a)
-> voluntarily (adv)
+ orphanage (n) (Definition)
+ mow the lawn (v) = cut the
grass
+ handicapped (a) = disabled
+ participate in (v) = take part in
+ remote = far away
-checks understanding of the new
words
III. While you read
• Task 1
-gives instructions
-lets Ss do the task in 5 ms
-asks Ss to give their answers
-gives feedback
The keys:
1. voluntary 2. voluntarily
3. volunteers 4. volunteered
• Task 2
-gives instructions
-lets Ss do the task in 5 ms
-asks Ss to give their answers
-look at the pictures and
answer
-listen and answer the
teacher’s questions
-listen and answer
-listen and answer the teacher
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
-look at the pictures in their
book and answer
-listen and answer
-work in pairs, read the saying
and discuss its meaning
-listen and answer
-listen and guess the meaning
of the new words
-copy down the new words in
their note-books
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-do the task in the allotted time
-give their answers
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-do the task in the allotted time
Unit 4:
VOLUNTEER WORK
Part: Reading
Content
New words:
+ volunteer (v , n)
-> voluntary (a)
-> voluntarily (adv)
+ orphanage (n)
+ mow the lawn (v) = cut the
grass
+ handicapped (a) = disabled
+ participate in (v) = take part
in
+ remote = far away
• Task 1
The keys:
1. voluntary
2. voluntarily
3. volunteers
4. volunteered
• Task 2
The keys:
• Homework: (4ms)
Asks Ss to write in their notebooks:
+ learn the lesson well.
+ talk about voluntary works that they often do in the summer to help the community
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare part: “Speaking”
• Self –evaluation:
Date of teaching :
Period : 22
Unit 4: VOLUNTEER WORK
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Part: Speaking
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content : + To enable Ss to use appropriate language to talk about different kinds
of activities related to volunteer work
• Language function: + Talking about volunteer work
• Educational aim : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ use appropriate language to talk about different kinds of activities
related to volunteer work
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary: old Vocabulary
b) Grammar :
2. Skills: Speaking
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/activities: pair work, role-play, discussion
5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, pictures
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
g. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
h. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson: (5ms)
+ Asks Ss to write some new words : + traïò treû moà coâi
+ tham gia
+ ngöôøi taøn taät
+ Asks Ss some questions about volunteer work
+ Gives feedback and marks
• Presentation of the new material: (37ms)
Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
4ms
33ms
I. Lead-in
-asks Ss to list out some activities
of volunteer work on the network
-gives feedback
-tells the aim of the lesson:
Talking about different
kinds of activities related
to volunteer work
II. Practice
• Task 1
-asks Ss to work in pairs and do the
task
-lets Ss do the task in 3 ms
-goes around to offer help
-calls on some Ss to stand up and
give their answer
-gives feedback
-list out some activities of
volunteer work
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
-work in pairs and do the
task in the allotted time
-stand up and perform
-listen and answer
Unit 4:
VOLUNTEER WORK
Part: Speaking
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
The keys:
+ Helping the poor in remote or
mountain areas.
+ Giving care and comfort to the
poor and the sick.
+ Providing education for
disadvantaged children
• Task 2
-makes some questions
1. What kind of volunteer work are
you participating in?
2. What exactly are you doing?
3. Do you enjoy the work?
-hangs the chart having the
conversation on the b/b
-calls on two Ss to stand up and
practise the conversation
-asks Ss to read the list of volunteer
activities in the box
-explain some new words
+ war invalid:
+ martyr:
+ intersections:
-asks Ss to match each activity on
the left with corresponding
activities on the right
-gives feedback
-puts Ss in pairs and practise the
conversation basing on the model
using the information in the box
-calls on some pairs to stand up and
perform
-gives feedback
• Task 3
-asks Ss to work in groups
-gives instructions” Each group
prepares a ‘wheel of fortune’ .
The member of each group will
take turns to pull the wheel. The
person who is luckily pointed to by
the stick on the wheel has a chance
to talk about his / her volunteer
work ( just one sentence each time)
Eg:
S1: I often take part in helping
people in remote area
S2: I sometime look after the sick
S3: …
S1 (again)
-lets Ss to work in groups and do
the task in 8 minutes following the
example
-listen and answer the
teacher’s questions
-look at the chart on the b/b
-stand up and practice the
conversation
-listen and take notes
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-listen and answer
-work in pairs and practise
the conversation
-stand up and perform
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-do the task in the allotted
time
-present in front of the class
Content
• Task 1
The keys:
+Helping the poor in remote
or mountain areas.
+ Giving care and comfort to
the poor and the sick.
+ Providing education for
disadvantaged children
• Task 2
New words
+ war invalid:
+ martyr:
+ intersections:
• Task 3
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
-calls on the representative in front
of the class to talk about activities
they take part in
-asks the rest to give their
comments
-gives feedback
-to give their comments
-listen and answer
• Homework: (2ms)
Asks Ss to write in their notebooks:
+ learn the lesson well.
+ write a short paragraph about your volunteer work they usually do during their
summer holiday.
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare part: “Listening”
• Self –evaluation:
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
_________________________________________________________
Date of teaching:
Period : 23
Unit 4: VOLUNTEER WORK
Part: Listening
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content: + To encourage Ss to listen to a talk about Spring School
+ To help Ss practice listening
• Language function: Talking about Spring School
• Educational aim: At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ Listen to a monologue for specific information
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary: co-operate, co- ordinate, fund- raising, …
b) Grammar : no structures
2. Skills: Listening- Speaking
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/activities: group work, question-answer, T- F statement
5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, tape
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
d. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson: (no checking)
• Presentation of the new material: (40ms)
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Tim
e
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
6ms
6ms
20ms
I. Lead-in
-asks Ss to play game “ Guessing
word”
-The cues:
1. This is the name of the
season
2. It falls on the early month of
the year
3. it’s ended in letter G
-gives feedback: SPRING
-tells the aim of the lesson: Talk
about Spring School, a special
school in HCM city
II. Before you listen
-asks Ss to work individually and
tick the best answer that suit
them
-gives feedback
-lets Ss repeat the words
-introduces some new words
+ fund- raising activity
+ co-ordinate ( v)
+ Co-operate (v) - work together
-sets the situation: “You are
going to listen to a talk about
Spring School, a special school
in HCM city”
III. While you listen
• Task 1
-asks Ss to read the statements in
task 1 and underline the key
words, decide what word may be
needed in each blank
-plays the tape the first time
-asks Ss to give their answers
-plays the tape the second time to
check their answers
-gives feedback
The key:
1. formal
2. 30 street children
3. 250 children
4. 1998
5. volunteers / June
• Task 2
-asks Ss to read the questions and
guess the answers
-has Ss to listen to the tape and
do the task
-asks Ss to give their answers
-plays the tape again
-asks Ss to compare their
answers with their partners
-asks Ss to give their answers
-gives feedback(T may play the
-look at the b/b and answer
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
- work individually and answer
-listen and answer
-repeat the words
listen and guess the meaning of
the new words and take notes
-listen to the teacher
-read the statements in task 1
and underline the key words
decide what word may be
needed in each blank
-listen to the tape and do the
task
-give their answers
-listen and answer
-read the questions and guess
the answers
-listen to the tape and do the
task
-give their answers
-listen to the tape again
-share their answers with their
partners
-give their answers
-listen and answer
-take notes in their note-books
Unit 4:
VOLUNTEER WORK
Part: Listening
Content
New words:
+ fund- raising activity
+ co-ordinate ( v)
+ Co-operate (v)
• Task 1
The keys:
1. formal
2. 30 street children
3. 250 children
4. 1998
5. volunteers / June
• Homework: (4ms)
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Asks Ss to write in their notebooks:
+ learn the lesson well.
+ write a short paragraph (100 words) about Spring School
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare part: “Writing”
• Self –evaluation:
Match the information in column A with one in column B
A B
The aim of Spring School About 250
The number of children who live and study at the school or
attend classes
Provide classes to disadvantaged children
The activities the children at the school take part in Volunteers to help organize their fund-raising
dinner held annually
The kinds of volunteers that Spring School requires Dance, sing, play music
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Date of teaching :
Period : 24
Unit 4: VOLUNTEER WORK
Part: Writing
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content: To provide Ss with practice writing a formal letter expressing gratitude
• Language function: Practicing writing a formal letter expressing gratitude
• Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
write a formal letter expressing gratitude
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary : gratitude, issue, receipt, acknowledge
b) Grammar :
2. Skills: Writing
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/activities: Brainstorming, discussion
5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk, pare board
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
b. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson:(3ms)
Makes some questions to get the answers about Spring School
Gives feedback
• Presentation of the new material: (38ms)
Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
4ms I. Warm up
-sets a situation” I received a
special gift from my uncle some
day ago. And now I want to write
a letter to him. Tell me what king
of letter I’m going to write?”
-gives feedback
-listen to the teacher’s
and answer
-listen and answer
Unit 4:
VOLUNTEER WORK
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
12ms
-tells the aim of the lesson:
Writing a formal letter
expressing gratitude
II. Pre-Writing
• Task 1
-asks Ss to play “ Competition
game”
-divides the model letter into 6
parts and write down each part on
a piece of paper
-asks Ss to close their books
-divides the Ss into 2 groups
-gives the papers to the Ss and
asks them to rearrange them to
make a complete letter
-lets Ss complete in 1 minute
-asks Ss to open their books , read
the letter and check their work
(which group finishing first with
the right letter will be the winner)
-asks Ss to read the model
-provides some new words
+ gratitude (n)
+ issues (v)
+ receipt(n)
+ assistance (n)
-asks Ss to read the model and
find out the sentences that express
the 6 points in the textbook
-asks Ss to retell form of a formal
letter
-gives feedback
+ The heading( Address, Date)
+ The salutation (Dear Sir,
Madam)
+ The body
+ The closing (Yours faithfully,
Yours sincerely,)
+ The signature
-provides Ss with some
expressions
+Thank you very much for …….
+ I would like to thank you for …
+ I would like to take this
opportunity to thank you for …
• Task 2
-asks Ss to read the requirement
carefully
-helps Ss analyze the requirement
basing on the suggestions in task1
III. While-writing
- listen to the teacher
-listen and answer the
teacher’s questions
-close their books
-sit in groups
-get the papers
-listen and answer
-do in the allotted time
- open their books , read the
letter and check
-read the model
-listen and guess the meaning
of the word
-read the model and answer
-retell form of a formal letter
-listen and answer
-listen and take note
-read the requirement
carefully and listen to the
teacher’s instructions
Part: Writing
Content
Writing about a formal
letter expressing gratitude
New words:
+ gratitude (n)
+ issues (v)
+ receipt(n)
+ assistance (n)
• Task 1
1. Dear Sir / Madam,
2. sentence 2
3. sentence 4
4. sentence 1
5. sentence 3
6. I look forward to hearing
from you. Yours faithfully,
form of a formal letter
+ The heading( Address, Date)
+ The salutation (Dear Sir,
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
15ms
7ms
-ask Ss to work in individually
and write a formal letter
expressing gratitude, basing on
the suggestions above
-lets Ss do the task in 15 ms
-goes around to observe and offer
help
IV. Post writing
-asks Ss to change their
paperboards & check each other
-selects some to hang on the b/b
-has Ss correct their friends’
mistakes on the b/b
-gives feedback
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-do the task in the allotted
time
-change their papers to check
each other
-look at their friends’ work
-correct their friends’ mistakes
-listen and answer
Madam)
+ The body
+ The closing (Yours
faithfully, Yours sincerely,)
+ The signature
Expressions
+ I would like to express our
thanks for…
+Thank you very much for
…….
+ I would like to thank you
for …
+ I would like to take this
opportunity to thank you for
…
• Homework: (3ms)
Asks Ss to correct the mistakes and write the complete letter in their note books
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare par: “Language Focus”
• Self –evaluation:
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
__________________________________________________________________________
Date of teaching:
Period : 25
Unit 4: VOLUNTEER WORK
Part: Language Focus
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ distinguish the sounds /w / and / j/ and pronounce them exactly
+ use gerund, present participle perfect gerund and perfect participle correctly
1. Vocabulary: + the words the sounds w / and / j/ / in: wheel, young, whale …
+ Perfect gerund and perfect participle
2. Structure:
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
3. Procedures:
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
I. Warm- up (5ms)
-greets Ss
-has a short chat with Ss
II. Checking up Previous knowledge( no checking because the lesson is long)
III. Content of the lesson (35ms)
• Pronunciation (10ms)
-asks Ss to write some words beginning with “W” and “Y”
-gives feedback
-tells the aim of the lesson : practice the sounds / w / and / j / in a single word and practise them in
sentences
-introduces some more in the text book
-has Ss listen and repeat the words
-calls some Ss to stand up and repeat
-helps Ss practice the dialogue containing the target sounds
-calls some pairs to stand up and practice
-gives feedback
• Grammar (25ms)
Presentation and Exercises
I. A. Presentation 1 : Gerund
-asks Ss to give the correct form of the Verbs
1. They enjoy ( read )... books.
2. She is interested in (play)… the piano.
-gives feedback
1. -> reading
2. -> playing
-tells the aim of the exercise 1: “Gerund - review”
-helps Ss revise the form and uses of Gerund
-asks Ss t give some mote examples
-gives feedback
B. Exercise 1:
-gives instructions
-lets Ss do exercise 1 in 3 ms
-asks Ss to give their answers
-gives feedback
The keys:
1. listening 2. bending
3. behaving 4. meeting
5. spending 6. waiting
7. starting
II. A. Presentation 2 : “Present participles”
-asks Ss to give the correct form of the Verbs
1. He spends 3 hours a day (learn) ……. E.L
2. My mother used to go (shop)… everyday.
-gives feedback
1. learning
2. shopping
-tells the aim of the exercise 2: “Present participles”
-helps Ss revise the form and uses of Present participles
-asks Ss t give some more examples
-gives feedback
• Self –evaluation:
_________________________________________________________________
Date of teaching:
Period : 26
Unit 5: ILLITERACY
Part: Reading
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content : + To introduce Ss to the passage about illiteracy
+ To provide Ss with some new words relating to the topic
• Language function: + Reading the passage for gist and for specific information
• Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
- develop their reading comprehension
- apply some useful dictionary skills to the interpretation of its meaning
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary: illiterate, illiteracy, ethnic minority, …
b) Grammar : no structure
2. Skills: Reading
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/ activities: Multiple choice, pare work, group work, questions – answer, discussion
5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk, pictures
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
e. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
+ Has a short chat with the Ss
b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson: (no checking)
• Presentation of the new material: (40ms)
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Tim
e
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
4ms
8ms
I. Lead-in
-asks Ss to play game “anagram
game”
-divides Ss into 2 groups
-draws a circle on the b/b and write
the letter of the topic world ,but all
are jumbled
For example: TYALELIRIC
C L I
E I
A R
T Y
L
-gives instructions” Ss write as
many words as they can with the
letters in the circle in two ms.
Which group having the most
meaningful and correct words will
be the winner”
-conducts the game
-gives feedback
-gets the words “ ILLITERACY”
-tells the aim of the lesson:
Illiteracy
II. Before you read
-asks Ss to look at the pictures in
their books
-makes questions:
1. Where do you think the class
is?
2. Who are attending the class?
3. What about the teacher? Who is
he?
4. Do all children have textbooks?
-gives feedback
-introduces some new words:
New words:
+ illiterate (a): not able to read and
write
-> illiteracy (n)
+ eradicate (v) (to clean up, wipe
up)
-> eradication (n)
+ ethnic minority ( Picture)
+ campaign (n) (Example)
Mua He Xanh campaign
+ rate (n)
-checks understanding of the new
words
III. While you read
• Task 1
-gives instructions
-lets Ss do the task in 3 ms
-asks Ss to give their answers
-gives feedback
The keys:
-listen to the teacher
-sit in groups
-look at the b/b
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-play the game
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
-look at the pictures in their
book and answer
-listen and answer the
teacher’s questions
-listen and answer
-listen and guess the meaning
of the new words
-copy down the new words in
their note-books
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-do the task in the allotted
time
-give their answers
-listen and answer
Unit 5:
ILLITERACY
Part: Reading
Content
New words:
+ illiterate (a): not able to read
and write
-> illiteracy (n)
+ eradicate (v) (to clean up,
wipe up)
-> eradication (n)
+ ethnic minority
+ campaign (n) :
Mua He Xanh campaign
+ rate (n)
• Task 1
The keys:
1. Phoå caäp GDTH
2. Hoäi KH Vieät Nam
3. Xoaù muø chöõ
4. Kæ thuaät canh taùc
5. Keá hoaïch hoaù GD
• Task 2
• Homework: (4ms)
Asks Ss to write in their notebooks:
+ learn the lesson well.
+ Discuss “ What are the advantages of enabling all people in a community to read and write
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare part: “Speaking”
• Self –evaluation:
__________________________________________________________
Date of teaching:
Period : 27
Unit 5: ILLITERACY
Part: Speaking
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content : + To enable Ss to use appropriate language to talk about illiteracy
problems and offer solutions
• Language function: + Talking about illiteracy problems
• Educational aim : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ use appropriate language to talk about schooling and illiteracy
related problems and offer solutions to these problems
+ use model “ SHOULD” to give advices
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary: old Vocabulary
b) Grammar : the model “ SHOULD” to give advices
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
2. Skills: Speaking
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/activities: Pair work, group works, matching, discussion, pictures
5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
i. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
j. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson: (15ms)
15 Minute Test
Listen and fill in the blanks.
Albert Einstein was born on (1)____ in Um, Germany. His interest in (2)___ began when he was only
(3)__ years old. But in school, he was not a very good(4)___. Albert dropped out of school at (5)___
because he hated strict discipline and rote-learning.
When his family moved to Milan. (6)____. Albert decided to (7)___ Physics. He failed the institute’s
entrance exam, but after a year’s study at a school near Zurich, he passed and entered(8)___ . He graduated
in(9)___. Then he became a private physics and mathematics tutor for (10)___ years
The answers:
1………… 2……………… 3……………. 4……………. 5………………..
6…………. 7……………… 8…………….. 9…………….. 10…………….
• Presentation of the new material: (27ms)
Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
3ms
3ms
21ms
I. Lead-in
-asks Ss to tell some problem
they often meet at school and
offer some solutions to solve
them
-gives feedback
-tells the aim of the lesson:
Problems and solutions
II. Pre- Practice
-introduces some school
problems
-teaches some new words
+ cheat ( v) ( Mime)
+ regulation (n) ( Real thing)
+ enforce (v) ( Translation)
+ income (v) (Explanation)
III. Practice
• Task 1
-asks Ss to work in pairs and do
the task: Matching
-lets Ss do the task in 3 ms
-calls on some Ss to stand up and
give their answer
-gives feedback
The keys:
-tell some problem and offer
some solutions
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
-listen to the teacher
-listen and guess the meaning
of the words
-copy down in their note-
books
- work in pairs and do the task
in the allotted time
-stand up and answer
-listen and answer
Unit 5:
ILLITERACY
Part: Speaking
Content
New words
+ cheat ( v)
+ regulation (n)
+ enforce (v)
+ income (v)
• Task 1
The keys:
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
1. b, g 2. a, e 3. d, f
4. c 5. h, I, j
• Task 2
-gives Ss a problem and asks
them for the solutions to set up a
model dialogue
Eg: “Many Ss can not buy the
required textbooks. What do you
think we should do to help
them?”
St1: I think we should ask the school
headmaster to provide free textbooks
for Ss from low-income families.
St2: We should collect used
textbooks for school library
-asks Ss to look at the model in
task 2
-asks Ss to give the model “
Should” to give advices
-calls on 3 Ss to practice
-asks Ss to work in groups and
make similar dialogues
- lets Ss prepare in 3 ms
-calls on some groups to stand up
and perform
-gives feedback
• Task 3
-asks Ss some questions to set
the task
1. Are there any problems in our
class?
2. What are they?( if Ss can not
answer, give them some cues as
in the textbook)
3. What should we do to solve
these problems?
-lets Ss to work in groups and do
the task in 3 minutes
-asks the rest to give their
answers
-gives feedback
IV. Post - speaking
(if enough time)
-sets a situation” many Ss have
difficulties in learning E.l ,please
tell me some solutions to improve
it”
-elicits prompts answers from Ss
-gives feedback
-tell a problem
-look at the chart the model in
task 2
-listen to the teacher
-stand up and practice it
-work in groups and make
similar dialogues
-do the task in the allotted
time
-stand up and practice the
conversation
-listen and answer
-listen and answer teacher’s
questions
-work in groups and do the
task in the allotted time
-give their answers
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
-to give their answers
-listen and answer
1. b, g
2. a, e
3. d, f
4. c
5. h, I, j
• Task 2
T : Many Ss can not buy the
required textbooks. What do
you think we should do to
help them?
St1: I think we should ask the
school headmaster to provide
free textbooks for Ss from low-
income families.
St2: We should collect used
textbooks for school library
• Task 3
• Homework: (2ms)
Asks Ss to write in their notebooks:
+ write a short paragraph about difficulties in learning E.l and suggest some solutions
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
to solve the problems.
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare part: “Listening”
• Self –evaluation:
__________________________________________________________________________
Date of teaching:
Period : 28
Unit 5: ILLITERACY
Part: Listening
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content: + To encourage Ss to listen to a talk about the result of a school survey
on what makes an effective school
+ To help Ss practice listening
• Language function: Listening for gist and specific information
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
• Educational aim: At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ develop extensive listening skills
+ use the information they have listened to for other communicative tasks
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary : survey, maturity, academic, self- respect, …
b) Grammar : no structures
2. Skills: Listening- Speaking
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/activities: Group work, question-answer, T- F statement
5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk, tape
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1ms)
e. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson: (5ms)(mistake correction of 15 minute test)
The keys: 1. March 14th
, 1879 2. science 3. five 4. student 5. fifteen
6. Italy 7. study 8. in 1896 9. 1900 10.two
• Presentation of the new material: (36ms)
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Tim
e
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
6ms
6ms
20ms
I. Lead-in
(prepares a small survey and
copies it on a paper (the table is
at the end of the lesson plan)
-hands out these papers to Ss
-gives instructions
-lets Ss complete the table
-collects the papers gives
feedback
-tells the topic of the lesson: A
survey
II. Before you listen
-makes some questions:
1. Have you ever done a
survey?
2. Do you know where Perth is?
-gives feedback
-lets Ss repeat the words
-introduces some new words
+ survey (n) ( Example)
+ effective (a) (Explanation)
+ mature (a) – maturity (n)
+ self- respect (n) (Translation)
+ academic ( a) (Translation)
-sets the situation: “You are
going to listen to a talk about
the results of a school survey
carried out in Perth, Western
Australia. The school asked its
students what makes an
effective school”
III. While you listen
• Task 1
-asks Ss to read the statements
in task 1 and think of the answers
-plays the tape the first time
-asks Ss to give their answers
-plays the tape the second time to
check their answers
-gives feedback
The key:
1. D 2. B 3. B 4. C
• Task 2
-asks Ss to read the questions
and guess the answers
-has Ss to listen to the tape and
do the task
-asks Ss to give their answers
-plays the tape again
-asks Ss to compare their
answers with their partners
-asks Ss to give their answers
-gives feedback(T may play the
tape to check their answers)
The key:
1. It took place in Perth.
2. 90 % of the Ss
-get the copied papers
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-hand in the papers, listen and
answer
-listen to the teacher
-listen and answer the
questions
-listen and answer
-repeat the words
listen and guess the meaning of
the new words and take notes
-listen to the teacher
-read the statements in task 1
and think of the answers
-listen to the tape and do the
task
-give their answers
-listen and answer
-read the questions and guess
the answers
-listen to the tape and do the
task
-give their answers
-listen to the tape again
-share their answers with their
partners
-give their answers
-listen and answer
-take notes in their note-books
Unit 5:
ILLITERACY
Part: Listening
Content
New words:
+ survey (n)
+ effective (a)
+ mature (a)
– maturity (n)
+ self- respect (n)
+ academic ( a)
• Task 1
The keys:
1. D
2. B
3. B
4. C
• Task 2
The keys:
• Homework: (3ms)
Asks Ss to write in their notebooks:
+ revise “describing a chart” of unit 16 in E.L 10.
+ write a short paragraph (100 words) about “What makes an effective school”
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare part: “Writing”
• Self –evaluation:
Do you agree with the following?
In an effective school
Yes No
The teacher encourages Ss to set realistic goads for their own learning
The teacher is motivating and interested in what Ss do
Ss are involved in making decisions which have a direct effect on
themselves
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
__________________________________________________________________________
Date of teaching:
Period : 29
Unit 5: ILLITERACY
Part: Writing
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content: To provide Ss with practice describing information in a table
• Language function: Practicing describing tables
• Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ interpret information presented in tables
+ identify language to be used for describing tables
+ write descriptions of tables
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary : trend, data, the nouns / verbs/ adjs / advs in the table
b) Grammar :
2. Skills: Writing
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/activities: Gap- fill, discussion
5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk, pare board
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
c. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson:(no checking)
• Presentation of the new material: (39ms)
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Tim
e
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
4ms
12ms
I. Warm up
-draws on the b/b a table like this
Country 1995 2000
China 45% 56%
Korea 29% 67%
-asks Ss to tell where they see it
-gives feedback(in geography)
-tells the aim of the lesson:
Describing tables
II. Pre-Writing
• Task 1
-asks Ss to open their books
-provides some new words
+ trend (n) (Translation)
+ data (n) (Translation)
+ decline (v)= decrease
+ dramatically ( adv)
-asks Ss to do the task in 4 minutes
-asks Ss to give their answers
-gives feedback
The keys:
1. varied 2. rise
3. declined 4. different
5. went up 6. dramatically
-elicits the languages used to
describe a table from the passage
-hangs the chart on the b/b
( The table about Ns / Vs / Adjs /
Advs in the textbook)
-asks Ss to tell:
1. Topic sentence of the passage
2. Supporting sentences
3. Concluding sentence
4. Verb tenses
5. expressions of changes
-gives feedback
-introduces the useful language
+ The table shows / describes ..
+ As can be seen from the data in
the table …
• Task 2
-asks Ss to read the table of literacy
rates in Sunshine country from
1998 - 2997
-helps Ss describe the table by
making questions:
1. What is the topic of the table?
2. Does it describe the past, present
or future?
3. What patterns are shown?
+ Which region had the highest rate
of literacy in 1998? / 2002?...
…
III. While-writing
-ask Ss to work in individually and
describe the table, basing on the
suggestions above
-look at the b/b
-listen and give the answer
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
-open their books
-listen and guess the
meaning of the word
-do the task in the allotted
time
-give their answers
-listen ad answer
-listen and take notes
-look at the chart on the b/b
-listen and answer
-take notes in their
notebooks
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-read the table
-listen and answer the
questions
-work in individually and
Unit 5:
ILLITERACY
Part: Writing
Content
Describing tables
New words:
+ trend (n)
+ data (n)
+ decline (v)
= decrease
+ dramatically ( adv)
• Task 1
The keys:
1.varied
2. rise
3. declined
4. different
5. went up
6. dramatically
1. Topic sentence of the
passage
2. Supporting sentences
3. Concluding sentence
4. Verb tenses
5. expressions of changes
• Homework: (5ms)
Asks Ss to correct the mistakes and write the complete letter in their note books
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare par: “Language Focus”
• Self –evaluation:
________________________________________________________________________________
Date of teaching:
Period : 30
Unit 5: ILLITERACY
Part: Language Focus
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ distinguish the clusters /pl / ,/ bl / / pr/ and / br/ and pronounce them exactly
+ use the structures with reported speech with To- Inf to solve communicative task
1. Vocabulary: + the words with the clusters /pl / ,/ bl / / pr/ and / br/ in: please, black, pride, brown …
2. Structure: Reported speech with To- Inf
3. Procedures:
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
I. Warm- up (5ms)
-greets Ss
-has a short chat with Ss
II. Checking up Previous knowledge( no checking because the lesson is long)
III. Content of the lesson (35ms)
• Pronunciation (10ms)
-asks Ss to read aloud the sentence
“ Mrs Brown is proud of her platinum blonde”
-gives feedback
-introduces the clusters /pl /, / bl / / pr/ and / br/
-tells the aim of the lesson : practice the clusters /pl /, / bl / / pr/ and / br/ in a single word and practise
them in sentences
-introduces some more in the text book
-has Ss listen and repeat the words
-calls some Ss to stand up and repeat
-helps Ss practice the sentences containing the target sounds
-calls some pairs to stand up and practice
-gives feedback
• Grammar (25ms)
Presentation and Exercises
A. Presentation : Reported Speech with infinitives
-asks Ss to reported this sentence
1. “Close your books” said the teacher
-> The teacher asked/ told……
2. “ You should give up smoking, Nam,” said the doctor.
-> The doctor advised Nam….
-gives feedback
1. The teacher asked/ told us to close our books.
2. The doctor advised Nam to give up smoking.
-tells the aim of the grammatical point: “Reported Speech with To- Inf”
-helps Ss revise the form, meaning and use
Form:
V + Object + (NOT) + To-inf
Meaning and use: it is used to report other’s orders, requests, advice, suggestions, …
-helps Ss revise the form and uses of Gerund
-asks Ss t give some mote examples
-gives feedback
B. Exercise 1:
-gives instructions
-lets Ss do exercise 1 in 5 ms
-asks Ss to give their answers
-gives feedback
The keys:
1. They promised to come back again.
2. The lifeguard advised us not to swim too far from the shore.
3. John asked Peter to close the window.
4. ……
C. Exercise 2:
-gives instructions
-lets Ss do exercise 2 in 5 ms
• Self –evaluation:
_________________________________________________________________
Date of teaching:
Period : 31
Unit 6: COMPETITIONS
Part: Reading
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content : + To introduce Ss to the passage about competitions
+ To provide Ss with some new words relating to the topic
• Language function: + Reading the passage for specific information and identifying
meaning in context
• Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
- develop their reading comprehension
- use the information they have read to discuss the related topic
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary: sponsor, recite, announce, …
b) Grammar : no structure
2. Skills: Reading
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/ activities: Pair work, group work, questions – answer, matching, completion
5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk, pictures
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
f. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
+ Has a short chat with the Ss
b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson: (no checking)
• Presentation of the new material: (40ms)
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Tim
e
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
4ms
8ms
23ms
I. Lead-in
-shows out some pictures in the
textbook
-asks Ss to look at the pictures and
tell the names
-gives feedback
-asks Ss to tell some more
-makes questions:
1. Have you ever participate in
competitions like these?
2. Which of these competitions
do you like most? Why?
-gives feedback
-tells the aim of the lesson:
Competitions
II. Before you read
-asks Ss work in pairs and answer
the questions in the textbook
-gives feedback
-introduces some new words:
New words:
+ announce ( v) ( Translation)
+ maximum ( a) ( Example)
+ sponsor (v, n) ( Explanation)
+ recite ( v) (Example)
-checks understanding of the new
words
III. While you read
• Task 1
-gives instructions
-explains some new words in
column b if necessary
-asks Ss to work in groups, read
the passage and identify the
meaning in context
-lets Ss do the task in 5 ms
-asks Ss to give their answers
-gives feedback
The keys:
1. d 2. f 3. e 4. c 5. b 6. a
• Task 2
-gives instructions
-asks Ss to work in pairs, read and
answer the questions
-lets Ss do the task in 5 ms
-asks Ss to give their answers
-gives feedback
The keys:
1. The representatives of three
class of the school…
2. Its aim was to stimulate the sprit
of learning E.L among Ss
3. The student’s parents Society
4. ……..
• Task 3
-asks Ss to read the third paragraph
-look at the pictures and
answer
-listen and answer
-tell some more
-listen and answer the
teacher’s questions
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
-work in pairs and answer
the questions
-listen and answer
-listen and guess the
meaning of the new words
-copy down the new words
in their note-books
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-work in groups and do the
task
-do the task in the allotted
time
-give their answers
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-work in pairs and do the
task in the allotted time
-give their answers
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher’s
Unit 6:
Competitions
Part: Reading
Content
New words:
+ announce ( v)
+ maximum ( a)
+ sponsor (v, n
+ recite ( v)
• Task 1
The keys:
1. d
2. f
3. e
4. c
5. b
6. a
• Task 2
Answer the questions:
The keys:
1. The representatives of three
class of the school…
2. Its aim was to stimulate the
sprit of learning E.L among Ss
3. The student’s parents Society
• Homework: (4ms)
Asks Ss to write in their notebooks:
+ learn the lesson well.
+ write a short paragraph about a competition they took part in
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare part: “Speaking”
• Self –evaluation:
_________________________________________________________________
Date of teaching:
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Period : 32
Unit 6: COMPETITIONS
Part: Speaking
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content : + To enable Ss to use appropriate language to talk about a competition
or contest
• Language function: + Asking for and giving information about types of competitions
• Educational aim : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ talk about a competition or contest
+ ask for and give information about types of competitions
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary: old Vocabulary
b) Grammar : structures of asking for and giving opinion
2. Skills: Speaking
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/activities: Pair work, group works, discussion, pictures
5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
k. Warm- up: Greets the Ss
l. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson: (5ms)
- Asks Ss to give the words in E.L with the following definitions
1. encourage or make sth more active (-> stimulate)
2. happening or done once every year (-> annual)
3. altogether or as a total (-> in all)
4. without problems or difficulties (-> smoothly)
Question: “ What was the aim of the competition according to the passage?”
(-> its aim was to stimulate the sprit of learning E.L among Ss)
- Give feedback and marks
• Presentation of the new material: (34ms)
Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
5ms
I. Lead-in
-shows out some pictures and gets
Ss to tell the names :
1. “Who wants to be the
millionaire”
2. “ Ring the golden bell”
3. “Miss world”
-gives feedback
-tells the aim of the lesson:
Talking about
competitions and
-look at the pictures and
answer
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
-tell some competitions and
contest
Unit 6:
COMPETITIONS
Part: Speaking
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
3ms
24ms
contests
II. Pre- Practice
-asks Ss to tell some competitions
and contests they know
-makes some questions:
2. Which one do you like? Why?
3. Have you ever taken part in
such competitions and contests
like that?
-gives feedback
III. Practice
• Task 1
-introduces the task
-explains the meaning of the new
word
+ sculpture (n)
-asks Ss to name some contests /
competitions under each category
Eg: General knowledge quiz
includes “ Hanh trinh van hoa”
“Ai la trieu phu” “ Duong len dinh
Olympia”..
Singing contests: “ Sao mai
diem hen”, “ Bai hat viet”…
-asks Ss to work individually and
do the task
-lets Ss do the task in 3 ms
-asks Ss to compare with their
partner’s
-calls on some Ss to stand up and
express their ideas
-gives feedback
• Task 2
-asks Ss to ask their partner how
they feel about each type of
competitions/ contests
-asks Ss to look at the model in
task 2 and read it aloud
-introduces the table of useful
language and explains new words
if necessary
-elicits the structures that are used
for asking for and giving opinion
+ Asking for opinion:
What do you think about…?
What’s your opinion about…?
How do you feel about….?
Do you like…..?
+ Giving opinion:
I think …….
-listen and answer the
teacher’s questions
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
-listen and guess the
meaning of the words
-name some contests /
competitions
-work individually and do
the task in the allotted time
-compare with their
partner’s
-stand up and express their
ideas
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-look at the chart the model
in task 2
-listen to the teacher
-listen and take notes
-work in pairs and make
similar dialogues
-do the task in the allotted
time
-stand up and practice the
conversation
Content
• Task 1
New word:
+ sculpture (n)
• Task 2
+ Asking for opinion:
What do you think
about…?
What’s your opinion
about…?
How do you feel about….?
Do you like…..?
+ Giving opinion:
I think …….
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
-asks Ss to work in pairs and make
similar dialogues
-lets Ss prepare in 3 ms
-calls on some pairs to stand up and
perform
-gives feedback
• Task 3
-puts Ss into groups of 3 / 4 and
choose the leader of the group
-asks Ss to choose a famous T.V
game/ talent show/ competition or
contest and work out details about
it following the suggestions in task
3( They should not let other
groups know what it is)
-lets Ss prepare the task in 5ms
-calls on each representative to
come to the front. The whole class
will ask questions about the game /
competition/ contest and guess
what it is
-gives feedback
-listen and answer
-sit in groups
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-prepare the task in the
allotted time
-give their answers
-listen and answer
• Task 3
If having enough time , asks Ss to play game “ Guessing game”
- divides Ss into 2 groups
-gives instructions” T will read the cues and Ss will name the programs as quickly as
possible. One correct answer with the first cue earns the group 3 marks, with the second cue 2 point,
and the third cue one point. Which group with more points will be the winner”
1. a. It’s a competition for young girl
b. The girls are accessed based on their physical appearance and general knowledge
c. This is done through fashion shows and answering the questions
2. a. It is an international game held every 4 years
b. 2 teams of 11 players play against each other each time
c. Brazil has won the champion 5 times
Expected answers:
1. Beauty contest
2. The world cup
• Homework: (5ms)
Asks Ss to write in their notebooks:
write a short paragraph about a game show / contest they like, using the suggestions:
+ What type of game show / contest is it?
+ When and where does it take place? + Who organize it?
+ Who participate in? + Why do you like it?
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare part: “Listening”
• Self –evaluation:
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Date of teaching:
Period : 33
Unit 6: COMPETITIONS
Part: Listening
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content: + To encourage Ss to listen to a monologue about a marathon race
+ To help Ss practice listening
• Language function: Listening for gist and specific information
• Educational aim: At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ develop extensive listening skills
+ use the information they have listened to for other communicative tasks
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary : athletic, clock, association, …
b) Grammar : no structures
2. Skills: Listening- Speaking
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/activities: Group work, question-answer, T- F statement
5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk, tape, pictures
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
f. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
Checking up previous lesson: (5ms)
Asks Ss to tell a game show/ contest he / she likes most and tells the reason
Give feedback
• Presentation of the new material: (35ms)
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Tim
e
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
6ms
6ms
I. Lead-in
-divides Ss into 4 groups and asks
them to play game” Jumble
words”
-gives out each groups one card
containing 10 word whose letters
are jumbled
-gives instructions” rearrange
the letters to make the meaning
words in 3 ms. Which group
finishing the task first with the
most correct words will be the
winner)
-lets Ss do the task in 3ms
-collects the cards and gives
feedback
-asks Ss to guess the topic for the
listening
-tells the topic of the lesson: A
marathon race
II. Before you listen
-asks Ss to look at the pictures in
the textbook
-makes some questions:
1. What do you see in the
picture?
2. What is vent is it?
3. Where do you think the
Boston Marathon might take
place?
4. Who can participate in it?
-gives feedback
(It is one of the oldest races in the
US and held every year in mid
April)
-lets Ss repeat the words
-introduces some new words
+ race (n) ( Example)
+ athletic (n) (picture)
+ association (n) (Translation)
+ clock (v) (Situation- Example)
-sets the situation: “You are
going to listen to monologue
about the Boston Marathon.
Listen and do some tasks below”
III. While you listen
• Task 1
-asks Ss to read the statements
carefully in task 1 and work out
what information they need to
concentrate on while listening
-plays the tape the first time
-asks Ss to give their answers
-plays the tape the second time to
-sit in groups
-get the cards
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-do the task in 3ms
-hand in the cards, listen and
answer
-guess the topic
-listen to the teacher
-look at the pictures
-listen and answer the
questions
-listen and answer
-repeat the words
-listen and guess the meaning
of the new words and take
notes
-listen to the teacher
-read the statements in task 1
and underline the key words
-listen to the tape and do the
task
-give their answers
-listen and answer
Unit 6:
COMPETITIONS
Part: Listening
Content
New words:
+ race (n)
+ athletic (n)
+ association (n)
+ clock (v)
• Task 1
The keys:
1. T
2. T
3. F (2 hours 50ms and 10
seconds)
4. F (1967)
5. T
6.F ( pass through 13 towns and
ends in centre of Boston)
• Homework: (4ms)
Asks Ss to write in their notebooks:
+ give some special information about these people” Nguyen Chi Dong, Nguyen Thi Tinh,
Nguyen Lan Anh, Pham Tran Khanh Doan, …”.
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare part: “Writing”
• Self –evaluation:
The card – “Jumble words”
1. tohamarn -> marathon
2. sifihn -> finish
3. renurn -> runner
4. chiatelt -> athletic
5. crae -> race
6. conpahim -> champion
7. nurning -> running
8. centadis -> distance
9. storp -> sport
10. cirang -> racing
Date of teaching:
Period : 34
Unit 6: COMPETITIONS
Part: Writing
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content: To provide Ss with practice writing a letter of reply
• Language function: Practicing writing a letter of reply
• Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ write a letter of reply to the request of information
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary : review
b) Grammar : structures: “Thank you for …….”, “It’s our pleasure to ……”
2. Skills: Writing
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/activities: Explanation, question- answer
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk, pare board
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
d. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson:(no checking)
• Presentation of the new material: (39ms)
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
4ms
12ms
I. Warm up
-asks Ss if they want to
participate in a competition/
contest, what information about
the competition/ contest they
would like to know and look for
(using network)
What you want to
know about the
competition/ contest
-make a question” If you want to
let the other know these
information, what kind of letter
will you write?”
-gives feedback
-tells the aim of the lesson:
Writing a letter of reply
II. Pre-Writing
• Task 1
-asks Ss to open their books and
read the letter
-provides some new words
+ entry (v) (Translation)
+ procedure (n) (Translation)
+ venue (n) a place to meet each
other
+ participant (n) the person who
participate in the competition
-asks Ss read the letter and
identify :
+ Who wrote the letter?
+ For what purpose?
+ What information requested?
-lets Ss do the task in 4 minutes
-asks Ss to give their answers
-gives feedback
Suggested answers:
+ Thu Trang
+ To participate in the E.L
speaking competition
+ Number of participants, entry
procedures, venue, date and time,
phone number and e-mail
• Task 2
-asks Ss to read the requirements
in task 2
-asks Ss to retell the form of a
letter
-reminds Ss of the format and the
language of a formal letter
(they’ve learnt in unit 4)
-look at the b/b and answer
-listen and give the answer
the teacher’s question
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
-open their books
-listen and guess the meaning
of the word
-do the task in the allotted
time
-give their answers
-listen ad answer
-read the requirements
-retell the form of a letter
-listen and answer
-work in individually and
write
Unit 6:
COMPETITION
S
Part: Writing
Content
Writing a letter of
reply
New words:
+ entry (v)
+ procedure (n)
+ venue (n) a place to meet
each other
+ participant (n)
• Task 1
+ Who wrote the letter?
+ For what purpose?
+ What information
requested?
Suggested answers:
+Thu Trang
+ To participate in E.L the
speaking competition
+ Number of participants, entry
procedures, venue, date and time,
phone number and e-mail
• Homework: (5ms)
- Asks Ss to correct the mistakes and write the complete letter in their note books
_______________________________________________________________________________________
- “You are working at the Organizing Committee for Vietnam Idol. A young singer name Lan wrote
you a letter to ask for information about the contest. Write her a reply, including in your letter the
following information”:
- The date and time
- The venue
- The entry procedure
- The contact person
- The contact phone number
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare par: “Language Focus”
• Self –evaluation:
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
__________________________________________________________________________
Date of teaching:
Period : 35
Unit 6: COMPETITIONS
Part: Language Focus
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ distinguish the clusters /tr/ ,/ dr/ and / tw / and pronounce them exactly
+ use the structures with reported speech with Gerund to solve communicative task
1. Vocabulary: The words with the clusters tr/ ,/ dr/ and / tw/ in: traffic, drive, twelve,…
2. Structure: V + (O) + Preposition + (NOT) + Ving
3. Procedures:
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
I. Warm- up (5ms)
-greets Ss
-has a short chat with Ss
II. Checking up Previous knowledge( no checking)
III. Content of the lesson (35ms)
• Pronunciation
-asks Ss to play game
-gives instructions” One student goes to the b/b , the teacher will shows him / her three pictures. The
student sees the pictures in 1 minute then he/ she has to act or mime that the others will guess what are the
pictures”
Picture1: a pair of trousers
Picture1: a dress
Picture1: number 12
-writes on the b/b : trousers , dress, twelve
-has Ss read aloud the words
-tells the aim of the task : the clusters /tr/ ,/ dr/ and / tw /
-introduces some more in the text book
-has Ss listen and repeat the words
-calls some Ss to stand up and repeat
-helps Ss practice the sentences
-calls some Ss to stand up and speak out
-gives feedback
• Grammar
Revision and Exercises
A. Revision : Reported Speech with gerund
Form:
V + (Object) + Preposition + (NOT) + V-ing
Thank (for) , congratulation (on), apologize (for) ……..
Meaning and use: it is used to report other’s thanking, apologies, accusation, …
Example: “ Thank for helping me,” Mary said
-> Mary thanked me for helping her.
“ I’m sorry I didn’t wait for you,” Tom said to me.
-> Tom apologized for not waiting for me.
B. Exercises:
( in the textbook)
Exercise 1
-gives instructions
-lets Ss do exercise 1 in 5 ms
-asks Ss to come to b/b and write down their sentences
- gives feedback
The keys:
1. John congratulated us on passing our exams.
2. Mary apologized for not phoning me earlier.
3. Peter insisted on driving Linda to the station.
4. The teacher accused the boy of not paying attention to what he had said.
5. ….
Exercise 2
-gives instructions
-lets Ss do exercise 2 in 5 ms
-asks Ss to come to b/b and write down their sentences
- gives feedback
The keys:
1. Tom insisted on paying for the meal.
• Self –evaluation:
Date of teaching:
Period : 39
Unit 7: WORLD POPULATION
Part: Reading
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content : + To introduce Ss to the passage about world population
+ To provide Ss with some new words relating to the topic
• Language function: + Reading the passage for specific information and guessing
meaning in context
• Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
- develop their reading comprehension
- use the information they have read to discuss the related topic
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary: birth- control method, double, figure, …
b) Grammar : no structure
2. Skills: Reading
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/ activities: Pair work, group work, questions – answer, matching, gap-filling
5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk, pictures
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
g. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
+ Has a short chat with the Ss
b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson: (no checking because they’ve just had a 45 minute test)
• Presentation of the new material: (40ms)
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Tim
e
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
4ms
8ms
15ms
I. Lead-in
-asks Ss to tell the world’s
problems
education
the world’s
problems
social evil
environment
-shows out the chart:
Year Population
10,000 B.C 10 million
1750 625 million
1985 5760 million
2000 6,6 billion
2015 over 7 billion
-asks Ss to give their comments on
the figures
-gives feedback
-tells the aim of the lesson:
World population
II. Before you read
-asks Ss to look at the pictures in
the textbook
-asks Ss work in pairs and discuss
the questions in the textbook on
page 81
-gives feedback
-introduces some new words:
New words:
+ figure ( n) (illustration)- 1,2,3..
+ birth- control method
(Explanation)
+ double ( v) (Example)
+ It’s time S.b did sth
-checks understanding of the new
words
III. While you read
• Task 1
-gives instructions” read through
the sentences and identify part of
speech of the words to fill in each
blank. Then choose the most
suitable word from the box to fill
in the blank, paying attention to
their right form”
-asks Ss to work individually to do
the task
-lets Ss do the task in 3 ms
-asks Ss to give their answers
-gives feedback
The keys:
1. although 2. method
3. increases 4. resources
5. figures 6. limit
7. international 8. control
-tell the world’s problems
-look at the chart
-give their comments on the
figures
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
-look at the pictures in the
textbook
-work in pairs and discuss the
questions
-listen and answer
-listen and guess the meaning
of the new words
-copy down the new words in
their note-books
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-work individually to do the
task in the allotted time
-give their answers
-listen and answer
Unit 7:
WORLD
POPULATION
Part: Reading
Content
New words:
+ figure ( n) - 1,2,3..
+ birth- control method
+ double ( v)
+ It’s time S.b did sth
Eg:
It’s time you went to bed
(Ñaõ ñeán luùc con phaûi ñi
nguû roài)
• Task 1
The keys:
1. although
2. method
3. increases
4. resources
5. figures
6. limit
7. international
8. control
• Homework: (4ms)
Asks Ss to write in their notebooks:
+ learn the lesson well.
+ write a short paragraph about the disadvantages of overpopulation and suggest some solution to
solve the problem
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare part: “Speaking”
• Self –evaluation:
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Date of teaching:
Period : 40
Unit 7: WORLD POPULATION
Part: Speaking
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content : + To enable Ss to use appropriate language to talk about problems
of overpopulation and offering solutions
• Language function: + Talking about the causes of population explosion, problems of
overpopulation and solutions to these problems
• Educational aim : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ talk about the causes of population explosion, problems of
overpopulation and solutions to these problems
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary: words in “useful language”: exercise, implement, carry out…
b) Grammar : no structures
2. Skills: Speaking
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/activities: Pair work, group works, discussion, pictures
5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
m. Warm- up: Greets the Ss
n. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson: (5ms)
- Asks Ss to give the words in E.L
1. gaáp ñoâi
2. caùc bieän phaùp haïn cheá sinh ñeû
3. con soá
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
- Asks a question: Why can’t women in the world limit the size of their families?”
(-> Because they know of no safe way to have fewer children )
- Give feedback
• Presentation of the new material: (34ms)
Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
5ms
9ms
I. Lead-in
-asks Ss to find out causes of
population explosion
-gives feedback
Possible causes:
High birth rates
Illiteracy
Desire to have male children
Having many children means
happiness
Unwillingness to practice
contraception and abortion
…
-makes a question:
“What should we do to solve
this problem?”
-gives feedback
-tells the aim of the lesson: Talking
about the causes of population
explosion, problems of
overpopulation and solutions to
these problems
II. Pre- Practice
• Task 1
-asks Ss to work in pairs and put
the causes in order of important
and explain why
Eg: “I think people are not
properly educated is the most
important because people are not
properly educated so they feel free
to have children….”
-calls on some Ss to present their
ideas
-gives feedback
III. Practice
• Task 2
-asks Ss discuss and list the
problems facing poor and
overpopulated countries
-introduces some more by asking
them to combine the words in
-find out causes of
population explosion and
answer
-listen and answer
-listen and answer the
question
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
-work in pairs and do the
task
-stand up and present their
ideas
-listen and answer
-discuss and list the
problems facing poor and
overpopulated countries
-listen to the teacher
-do the task
Unit 7:
WORLD
POPULATION
Part: Speaking
Content
• Task 1
Possible causes:
High birth rates
Illiteracy
Desire to have male children
Having many children
means happiness
Unwillingness to practice
contraception and abortion
…
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
20ms
useful language and explains new
words if necessary
-calls on some Ss to report their
results
-gives feedback
Suggested answers:
+poor living condition, low living
standard, not enough food, lack /
shortage of school / hospital /
teachers/ doctor, nurses…
+ unemployment , social evils,
illiteracy …
• Task 3
-puts Ss into groups of 6 / 7 and
choose the leader of the group
-lets Ss read “useful language”
and elicits some new words:
+ to exercise (v) -to implement
+ to carry out (v)
-asks Ss to find out other
solutions to the problems of
overpopulation
-lets Ss prepare the task in 3ms
-goes around to offer help
-calls on each representative to
represent
-gives feedback
• Task 4
-asks Ss to work in groups again
and work out the problems of
overpopulation and offer
solutions to these problems
-provides Ss with some transition
signals to make their presentation
coherent
+first / firstly, second, next ..
+ also, beside, moreover, in
addition, further more…
+ on the other hand, however, but
+ the first problem is that, the
next solution is that…
-lets Ss prepare in 3 minutes
-calls on each representative to
represent
-gives feedback
-stand up and report their
results
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-look at the chart the model
in task 2
-listen to the teacher
-sit in group
-choose the leader of the
group
-read “useful language”
-listen and guess the
meaning of the words
-copy down in their note-
books
-prepare the task in the
allotted time
-present their results
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-listen and take notes
-prepare the task in the
allotted time
-present in front of the class
-listen and answer
• Task 2
Suggested answers:
+poor living condition, low living
standard, not enough food, lack /
shortage of school / hospital /
teachers/ doctor, nurses…
+ unemployment , social evils,
illiteracy …
• Task 3
+ to exercise (v) -to implement
+ to carry out (v)
• Task 4
Transition signals
+first / firstly, second, next ..
+ also, beside, moreover, in
addition, further more…
+ on the other hand, however,
but
+ the first problem is that, the
next solution is that…
• Homework: (5ms)
Asks Ss to write in their notebooks:
write a short paragraph about the causes of overpopulation, the problems facing poor and
overpopulated countries and work out solutions to these problems
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Asks Ss to prepare part: “Listening”
• Self –evaluation:
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Date of teaching:
Period : 41
Unit 7: WORLD POPULATION
Part: Listening
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content: + To encourage Ss to listen to a monologue about a world population
expert talking about the world population
+ To help Ss practice listening
• Language function: Listening for general and for specific information
• Educational aim: At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ develop extensive listening skills
+ use the information they have listened to for other communicative tasks
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary : rank, generation , improvement, …
b) Grammar : no structures
2. Skills: Listening- Speaking
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/activities: Group work, question-answer, multiple choice, game, discussion
5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk, tape
6. Procedures:
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
• Stabilization: (1m)
g. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson: (5ms)
Asks Ss to tell some problems of overpopulation and offer some solutions to these problems
Give feedback
• Presentation of the new material: (35ms)
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Tim
e
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
6ms
6ms
I. Lead-in
-divides Ss into 4 groups and asks
them to play game” Hangman”
-gives instructions” T gives a
secret word and Ss will guess it by
telling what letters they think there
are in the word. If Ss choose a
letter that appears one or more
times in the secret word, the letters
and their positions will be
revealed and Ss keep on guessing
the next letter . On the other hand,
if Ss guess a letter that is not in the
secret word, then a piece of the
man being hanged will be added to
the gallows and they will lose their
turn. The game continue until all
the letters are revealed”
The word” overpopulation”
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
-conducts the game
-tells the topic of the lesson: World
population
II. Before you listen
-asks Ss some questions in the
textbook
1. Do you think that our world is
overpopulated?
2. What continent has the
largest population?
-gives feedback
Suggested answers:
1. Yes, because it has more
than 6 billion people.
2. Asia has the largest
population with china the most
populated country in the world
and India the second
-lets Ss repeat the words
-introduces some new words
+ Latin America (n) ( Example)
+ rank (n, v) ( Example)
+ generation (n) (Translation)
+ improve (v)
-> improvement (n)
-sets the situation: “You are going
to listen to Dr. Brown, a
population expert, talk about the
world population. Listen and do
some tasks below”
III. While you listen
• Task 1
-asks Ss to read the statements in
task 1 and guess the answers
-plays the tape the first time
-sit in groups
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-play the game
-listen to the teacher
-listen and answer the
questions
-listen and answer
-repeat the words
listen and guess the meaning
of the new words and take
notes
-listen to the teacher
-read the statements in task 1
and guess the answers
-listen to the tape and do the
task
Unit 7:
WORLD
POPULATION
Part: Listening
Content
New words:
+ Latin America (n)
+ rank (n, v)
+ generation (n)
+ improve (v)
-> improvement (n)
• Task 1
The keys:
1. A
2. D
3. C
4. D
5. A
6.C
• Task 2
The keys:
1. According to expert, by the
year 2015, the population of
the world will be over 7
billion
2. He said that the world
growth rates in some parts of
• Homework: (4ms)
Asks Ss to write in their notebooks:
+ write a summary of the listening passage
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare part: “Writing”
• Self –evaluation:
Date of teaching:
Period : 42
Unit 7: WORLD POPULATION
Part: Writing
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content: To provide Ss with practice interpreting statistics on population from
a chart
• Language function: Practicing writing descriptions of pie charts
• Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ write descriptions of pie charts, using appropriate language
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary : words in “ Useful language”
b) Grammar : structures with comparatives
2. Skills: Writing
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/activities: Explanation, question- answer
5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk, pare board
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
e. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
• Checking up previous lesson:(no checking because the teacher wants to save time
So that Ss can have more time to practise writing)
• Presentation of the new material: (39ms)
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
8ms
8ms
I. Warm up
-asks Ss to close their books and
play game “ Competition game-
Pie chart drawing”
-divides Ss into 6 groups
-gives instructions” Ss will get a
paper in which there is a table
and transfer the table into a pie
chart. The group with the
quickest and most correct
answer will be the winner”
The table
Countries Population
South Asia 32%
East Asia 26%
Europe 15%
Africa 11%
Latin America 8%
Northern
America
6%
Oceania 2%
-conduct the game
-asks Ss to open their books ,
look at the pie chart and give
their comments on the
distribution of world population
-gives feedback
-tells the aim of the lesson:
Writing description of pie charts
II. Pre-Writing
-asks Ss to analyze the chart
following the questions
+ What does the pie chart
show?
+ Is the population distributed
evenly?
+ Where does most of the
world population live?
+ Which region has the
largest population? Which
comes second?..
+ Which region has the
smallest population?
-lets Ss do the task in 4 minutes
-asks Ss to give their answers
-gives feedback
Suggested answers:
+ It shows the distribution of the
world population by region
+ No, it isn’t
+ most of the world population
-close their books
-sit in groups
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-play the game
-open their books , look at
the pie chart and give their
comments
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
-look at the chart and
analyze the chart
-do the task in the allotted
time
-give their answers
-listen ad answer
-listen and take notes
Unit 7:
WORLD
POPULATION
Part: Writing
Content
Writing description of
pie charts
Answer the questions
+ What does the pie chart
show?
+ Is the population distributed
evenly?
+ Where does most of the
world population live?
+ Which region has the
largest population? Which
comes second?..
+ Which region has the
smallest population?
• Task 1
+ Who wrote the letter?
+ For what purpose?
+ What information
requested?
Suggested answers:
+ It shows the distribution of
the world population by region
+ No, it isn’t
+ most of the world
population lives in South and
• Homework: (5ms)
- Asks Ss to correct the mistakes and write the complete letter in their note books
- “The chart shows the number of Ss in a class who achieved each grade”
Fail
8% Distinction
21%
Pass Merit
38% 33%
- Asks Ss to write a description of the pie chart
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare par: “Language Focus”
• Self –evaluation:
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Date of teaching:
Period : 43
Unit 7: WORLD POPULATION
Part: Language Focus
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ distinguish the clusters /kl/ ,/ gl/ , / kr/, / gr/ and / kw / and pronounce them exactly
+ use the conditional sentences – type 1, 2, 3 and conditional sentences in reported speech
appropriately.
1. Vocabulary: The words with the clusters /kl/ ,/ gl/ , / kr/, / gr/ and / kw / in: clean, glass, crow,
grow, quarrel,…
2. Structure: structures with If - clauses
3. Procedures:
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
I. Warm- up (5ms)
-greets Ss
-has a short chat with Ss
II. Checking up Previous knowledge( no checking)
III. Content of the lesson (35ms)
• Pronunciation
-asks Ss to give words with the clusters /kl/ ,/ gl/ , / kr/, / gr/ and / kw / as much as possible
-has Ss read aloud the words
-tells the aim of the task : the clusters /kl/ ,/ gl/ , / kr/, / gr/ and / kw /
-introduces some more in the text book
-has Ss listen and repeat the words
-calls some Ss to stand up and repeat
-helps Ss practice the dialogue
-calls some pairs to stand up and practice
-gives feedback
• Grammar
Revision and Exercises
1. Revision
A. Revision 1 : The conditional sentence- type 1
Form:
If Clause , Main Clause Use
Present tense future tense Real situation in the present
(will+ V bare inf) or future
If the bus doesn’t come soon, I’ll be late for school.
B. Revision 2 : The conditional sentence- type 2
Form:
If Clause , Main Clause Use
Subjunctive - Unreal situation in the present
(- Past tense) ( would/ could + V bare inf ) or future
(- “To be” - WERE )
- To give an advice
Eg:
If I won a lot of money, I would travel around the world.
If I were you, I wouldn’t argue with my employer.
NOTES:
“If”can be omitted when it is followed by “WERE”, we use “inversion”
Eg: If she were taller, she could become a model.
-> Were she taller, she could become a model.
c. Revision 3 : The conditional sentence- type 3
Form:
If Clause , Main Clause Use
Past perfect - Unreal
• Self –evaluation:
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
Date of teaching:
Period : 44
Unit 8: CELEBRATIONS
Part: Reading
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content : + To introduce Ss to the passage about Tet in Vietnam
+ To provide Ss with some new words relating to the topic- celebrations
• Language function: + Reading the passage for specific information and guessing meaning in
context
• Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
- develop their reading comprehension
- use the information they have read to discuss the related topic
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary: celebration, decorate, apricot blossom,…
b) Grammar : no structure
2. Skills: Reading
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/ activities: Pair work, group work, questions – answer, matching, gap-filling
5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk, pictures
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
h. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
+ Has a short chat with the Ss
b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson: (5ms)
Asks Ss to make conditional sentences:
1. You didn’t study hard, so you failed the exam.
2. I don’t visit you because I don’t have time.
Gives feedback:
1. If you had studied hard, you wouldn’t have failed the exam.
2. If I had time, I would visit you.
• Presentation of the new material: (35ms)
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Tim
e
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
4ms
8ms
15ms
I. Lead-in
-asks Ss to think of the
celebrations in a year
Suggested answers:
+ Mother’s Day
+ Christmas Day
+ Teacher’s Day
+ Vietnam National Day
+ Women’s Day
+ Valentine Day
+ Tet holiday
+ Mid fall festival
…
-makes some questions:
1. What celebrations do you
like best?
2. What do you often do on
these day?
-gives feedback
-shows the picture in the textbook
and asks Ss tell what celebration
it is
-asks Ss “Do you like Tet
holiday? Why?”
-tells the aim of the lesson:
Celebrations – Tet holiday
II. Before you read
-asks Ss work in pairs and tell
which of the activities in the
book they enjoy doing most at
Tet
-calls some Ss to stand up and
present
-gives feedback
-introduces some new words:
New words:
+ peach blossom (Picture)
+ apricot blossom (Picture)
+ kumquat tree (Picture)
+ positive comments
+ spread (v) : (Translation)
-checks understanding of the new
words
III. While you read
• Task 1
-gives instructions” read the
passage quickly and stop at the
lines that contain these words to
guess the meaning”
-asks Ss to work individually to
-think of the celebrations in a
year
-listen and answer the
teacher’s questions
-listen and answer
-look at the pictures in the
textbook
-listen and answer the
teacher’s questions
-listen to the teacher
-work in pairs and do the task
-stand up and present
-listen and answer
-listen and guess the meaning
of the new words
-copy down the new words in
their note-books
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-work individually to do the
task in the allotted time
-give their answers
-listen and answer
Unit 8:
CELEBRATIONS
Part: Reading
Content
New words:
+ peach blossom
+ apricot blossom
+ kumquat tree
+ positive comments
+ spread (v)
• Task 1
The keys:
1. hoaønh traùng
2. thuoäc veà ngheà noâng
3. baêng roân, khaåu hieäu
4. caàu nguyeän
5. taùo taåm ñöôøng
6. söï noâ nöùc, nhoän nhòp
• Task 2
• Homework: (4ms)
Asks Ss to write in their notebooks:
+ learn the lesson well.
+ talk about their last Tet holiday, following the main points in the textbook
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare part: “Speaking”
• Self –evaluation:
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Date of teaching:
Period : 45
Unit 8: CELEBRATIONS
Part: Speaking
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content : + To enable Ss to use appropriate language to talk about the
celebrations and popular holidays in Vietnam and in the world
• Language function: + Talking about the celebration of Tet and other festivals’ activities
• Educational aim : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ talk about the celebrations and popular holidays in Vietnam and in
the world
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary: Valentine, harvest, mask parade…
b) Grammar : It is the time when… / Wh- questions
2. Skills: Speaking
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/activities: Pair work, group works, discussion, pictures
5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
o. Warm- up: Greets the Ss
p. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson: (5ms)
- Asks Ss to give the words in E.L
1. troïng ñaïi, hoaønh traùng
2. thuoäc veà ngheà noâng
3. hoa ñaøo
4. Talk about the last Tet holiday
- Give feedback and marks
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
The keys:
1. grand 2. agrarian 3. peach blossom
4. ( It’s up to the SS)
• Presentation of the new material: (34ms)
Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
5ms
9ms
I. Lead-in
-asks Ss to play game “
Competition game”
-gives instructions” work in
groups and quickly find out the
names, dates and main activities
of some celebrations or popular
holidays in Vietnam or in the
world in 3 minutes. Which groups
having the most correct answers
will be the winner”
-conduct the game
-tells the aim of the lesson: Talking
about the celebrations or holidays
in Vietnam or in the world
II. Pre- Practice
• Task 1
-introduces the model dialogue
-asks Ss to work in pairs and
practice the dialogue in 2 ms
-calls on some pairs to practice it
-gives feedback
-asks Ss to draw the structures
-gives feedback
+ Do you know that …?
+WH- questions “What…? /
When..?”
+It’s the time when…
-makes questions with the
structures above
1. Do you know that Christmas
Day is coming soon?
2. What is Christmas Day?
3. When is it exactly?
4. What do you often do on
Christmas Day?
III. Practice
• Task 2
-asks Ss to look at the pictures in
the textbook and work out the
names of theses holidays
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-play the game
-listen to the teacher
-look at their books and listen
to the teacher
-work in pairs and practice
the dialogue in the allotted
time
-stand up and practice it
-listen and answer
-look at the dialogue and
answer
-take notes n their note
books
-listen and answer the
teacher’s questions
-look at the pictures in the
textbook and work out the
names of theses holidays
-listen and answer
Unit 8:
CELEBRATIONS
Part: Speaking
Content
• Task 1
+ Do you know that …?
+WH- questions:
“What…? / When..?”
+It’s the time when…
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
20ms
-gives feedback
Suggested answers:
Picture 1: Mid- Autumn Festival
Picture 2: Thanksgiving
Picture 3: Valentine’s Day
-asks Ss to list the activities people
usually do in these days
-gives feedback
-asks Ss to do the task on page 94
(matching)
-asks Ss to give their answers
-gives feedback
The keys:
1. c. C 2. a. A 3. b. B
• Task 3
-gives instructions” ask and
answer about the holidays in task
2,using the dialogue in task 1.
You can add any information
about the holiday you know to
make the dialogue more
interesting”
-does model with a good student
-asks Ss to work in pairs and
prepare the task in 3ms
-goes around to offer help
-calls on some pairs to act out the
conversation
-gives feedback
-list the activities people
usually do in these days
-listen and answer
-do the task on page 94
-give their answers
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-does the model with the
teacher
-work in pairs and prepare
the task in the allotted time
-stand up and act out the
conversation
-listen and answer
• Task 2
The keys:
1. c. C
2. a. A
3. b. B
• Task 3
• Homework: (5ms)
Asks Ss to write in their notebooks:
Talk about one of the celebrations/ holidays you like best, following:
+ name of the celebration or holiday
+ time of the celebration or holiday
+ purpose of the celebration or holiday
+ main activities of the celebration or holiday
+ your feeling about the celebration or holiday( why you like it best)
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare part: “Listening”
• Self –evaluation:
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Date of teaching:
Period : 46
Unit 8: CELEBRATIONS
Part: Listening
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content: + To encourage Ss to listen to a dialogue about activities the Japanese
often do on their New Year’s Day
+ To help Ss practice listening
• Language function: Listening for general and for specific information
• Educational aim: At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ develop extensive listening skills
+ use the information they have listened to for other communicative tasks
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary : kimono. shrine, longevity, constancy , …
b) Grammar : no structures
2. Skills: Listening- Speaking
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/activities: Group work, question-answer, game, discussion
5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk, tape
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
h. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson: (5ms)
Make a conversation about the celebration or festival with a student
Give feedback
• Presentation of the new material: (35ms)
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Tim
e
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
6ms
6ms
15ms
I. Lead-in
-has Ss listen to the song “Happy
New Year”
-asks Ss to tell activities
Vietnamese usually do at Tet
-asks Ss to think what activities
the Japanese usually do on their
New Year’s Days
-gives feedback
-tells the topic of the lesson:
Talking about the New Year in
Japan
II. Before you listen
-asks Ss to look at the textbook
and guess which of the following
activities the Japanese often do
on their New Year’s Day
-lets Ss repeat the words
-introduces some new words
+ similar (a) -> similarity (n)
( Antonym) # different (a) –
difference (n)
+ shrine (n) ( synonym) - temple
+ longevity (n) (Translation)
+ pine tree (Pictures)
+ constant (a) - constancy (n)
(Translation)
-sets the situation: “You are
going to listen to two people
talking about how the New Year
is celebrated in Japan”
III. While you listen
• Task 1
-gives instruction” read the
statements in task 1 to
understand and underline the key
words. Listen and tick the things
you hear”
-plays the tape the first time
-asks Ss to give their answers
-plays the tape the second time to
check their answers
-gives feedback
The key:
1.  2.  3.  4.  5. x 6. 
7. x 8.  9. x 10.  11. 
• Task 2
-gives instructions” read through
the questions, identify the
information you need to look for
in each question .Underlined
some key words/ questions words
and guess the answers”
-has Ss to listen to the tape and
do the task
-asks Ss to give their answers
-listen to the song
-listen to the teacher’s and
answer
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
-look at the textbook and
answer
-repeat the words
-listen and guess the meaning
of the new words and take
notes
-listen to the teacher
-read the statements in task 1
and listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-listen to the tape and do the
task
-give their answers
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions and guess the
answers
-listen to the tape and do the
task
-give their answers
Unit 8:
CELEBRATIONS
Part: Listening
Content
New words:
+ similar (a) - similarity (n)
# different (a)
– difference (n)
+ shrine (n) - temple
+ longevity (n)
+ pine tree
+ constant (a)
- constancy (n)
• Task 1
The keys:
1. 
2. 
3. 
4. 
5. x
6. 
7. x
8. 
9. x
10. 
11. 
• Homework: (4ms)
Asks Ss to write in their notebooks:
+ write a passage about the similarities and differences between Vietnam’s New Year and
Japan’s New Year
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare part: “Writing”
• Self –evaluation:
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Date of teaching:
Period : 47
Unit 8: CELEBRATIONS
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Part: Writing
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content: To provide Ss with practice writing a description of one of the popular
celebration in Vietnam
• Language function: Practicing writing descriptions a celebration’s activities
• Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ write a descriptions of a popular celebration
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary : review
b) Grammar : review( simple present)
2. Skills: Writing
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/activities: Explanation, brainstorming, group work, game
5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk, pare board
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
f. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson:(no checking because the teacher wants to save time
So that Ss can have more time to practise writing)
• Presentation of the new material: (39ms)
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
8ms
8ms
I. Warm up
-asks Ss to play game “
Competition game- Christmas
Cloze”
-divides Ss into small groups
-gives instructions” Ss will get a
paper in which there is a passage.
Ss have to fill in each blank with a
suitable word from the box. The
group with the quickest and most
correct answer will be the winner”
The passage
(at the end of the lesson plan)
-conduct the game
-tells the aim of the lesson:
Writing description of a
celebration
II. Pre-Writing
-asks Ss to look at the model
passage about Christmas again
-asks Ss to work out the answers
for these points:
+ name of the celebration
+ time of the celebration
+ purpose of the celebration
+ main activities of the celebration
+ feeling of the writer
-lets Ss do the task in 4 minutes
-asks Ss to give their answers
-gives feedback
Suggested answers:
+ Christmas Day
+ December 25
+ it is the time when people get
together with family and share
peaceful moments
+ people give presents or send
cards wishing each other a merry
Christmas, decorate Christmas
trees and put up lights around the
house…
+ the writer love it very much
-asks Ss to get an outline about
Mid- Autumn Festival in Vietnam
following the points above
-lets Ss prepare in 3 ms
-calls on some Ss to stand up and
answer
-gives feedback and suggests
some more
+ lantern (n)
+ candlelit lantern procession
II. While-writing
-ask Ss to work in individually
and write a description about Mid-
Autumn Festival , basing on the
suggestions above
-lets Ss do the task in 15 ms
-listen to the teacher
-sit in groups
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-play the game
-listen to the teacher
-look at the model
-work out the answers
-do the task in the allotted
time
-give their answers
-listen ad answer
-get an outline about Mid-
Autumn Festival
-do the task in the allotted
time
-stand up and answer
-listen and take notes
-work in individually and
write
-do the task in the allotted
Unit 8:
CELEBRATIONS
Part: Writing
Content
Writing description of
a celebration
+ name of the celebration
+ time of the celebration
+ purpose of the
celebration
+ main activities of the
celebration
+ feeling of the writer
Writing a description of
Mid- Autumn Festival in
Vietnam
+ lantern (n)
+ candlelit lantern procession
• Homework: (5ms)
Asks Ss to write another description of a popular celebration in Vietnam, basing on the model
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare par: “Language Focus”
• Self –evaluation:
_________________________________________________________________
The passage: Use the words in the box to fill in each blank
marks cards lights turkey merry holiday
family presents decorate sing
Christmas is an annual holiday that (1)……….the birth of Jesus of Nazareth. Christmas Day falls on
December 25. It is preceded by Christmas Ever on December 24. It is a (2)…….. when people get together
with(3)………… People give(4)………….to each other or send(5)…………..wishing each other a(6)
…………. Christmas . At Christmas, people(7) …………..carols to get into the Christmas spirit. As well,
people(8) ………… Christmas trees and put up(9) …………..around the house. A common Christmas
dinner is(10) ………… There are also lots of baked goodies for the kids. I love Christmas because it is the
time when we can share peaceful moments with our family..
The keys:
1. marks 2. holiday 3. family 4. presents 5. cards
6. merry 7. sing 8. decorate 9. lights 10. turkey
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
__________________________________________________________
Date of teaching:
Period : 48
Unit 8: CELEBRATIONS
Part: Language Focus
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ distinguish the clusters /fl/, / fr/ and / r/ and pronounce them exactly
+ use one(s), someone, no one, anyone and everyone appropriately
+ use vocabulary about holidays and celebrations appropriately
1. Vocabulary: + the words with the clusters //fl/, / fr/ and / r/ in: flower, fruit, threaten, ……
+ pronouns one(s), someone, no one, anyone and everyone
+ vocabulary about holidays and celebrations
2. Structure: no structures
3. Procedures:
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
I. Warm- up (5ms)
-greets Ss
-has a short chat with Ss
II. Checking up Previous knowledge( no checking because the lesson is long)
III. Content of the lesson (35ms)
• Pronunciation (10ms)
-asks Ss to give words with the clusters /fl/, / fr/ and / r/ as much as possible
-has Ss read aloud the words
-tells the aim of the task : the clusters /fl/, / fr/ and / r/
-introduces some more in the text book
-has Ss listen and repeat the words
-calls some Ss to stand up and repeat
-helps Ss practice the dialogue containing the target sounds
-calls some pairs to stand up and practice
-gives feedback
• Grammar (25ms)
Presentation and Exercises
I. A. Presentation 1 : someone, no one, anyone and everyone
Someone = somebody + Singular Verb -> in an affirmative statement or a question
Everyone = everybody + Singular Verb -> in an affirmative statement refer to every
person or people
Anyone = anybody + Singular Verb -> in a negative statement or a question
No one + Singular Verb -> use an affirmative verb
B. Exercise 1:
-gives instructions
-lets Ss do exercise 1 in 3 ms
-asks Ss to give their answers
-gives feedback
The keys:
7. anyone
8. someone
9. anyone
10. someone
11. no one
12. everyone
13. no one
II. A. Presentation 2 : One/ Ones
One/ Ones + Singular / plural Verb -> replace a previous mentioned noun
B. Exercise 2:
-gives instructions
-lets Ss do exercise 2 in 3 ms
-asks Ss to give their answers
- gives feedback
The keys:
1. Of the three bags I like the blue one
2. Mai is making a fruit cake, Huong is making one, too.
3. I like reading books, especially the ones about the natural world.
4. I don’t have a computer, and my father doesn’t want me to have one.
5. They let me choose a pencil, and I took the red one.
• Self –evaluation:
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Date of teaching:
Period : 53
Unit 9: THE POST OFFICE
Part: Reading
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content : + To introduce Ss to the passage about the post office
+ To provide Ss with some new words relating to the topic
• Language function: + Reading the passage for gist and for specific information
• Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
- develop their reading comprehension
- use the information they have read to discuss the related topic
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary: equip (with), notify, recipient, facsimile,…
b) Grammar : no structure
2. Skills: Reading
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/ activities: Pair work, group work, questions – answer, matching, gap-filling
5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk, pictures
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
i. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
+ Has a short chat with the Ss
b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson: (no checking because Ss have just finished the first semester
examination)
• Presentation of the new material: (39ms)
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Tim
e
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
6ms
10ms
I. Lead-in
-asks Ss to play game “ Guessing
game”- “What is it?”
-gives instructions” The teacher
gives the clues, Ss will guess what
it is. The student who gives the
correct answer will be the winner
and get the present”
CLUES: it consist of 2 words
+ It is the place that there are many
good services
+ You can come there to send/
receive money, make phone calls
or send letters…
+ Its beginning letter is “P”
-conducts the game
The key: The post office
-asks Ss questions in the textbook
-tells the aim of the lesson: The
post office
II. Before you read
-asks Ss to give some words/
phrases related to the post office in
some ways
Sending letters
post office
making calls
-gives feedback
-introduces some new words:
New words:
+ equip (with) (Example)
+ notify (v) (Synonym)- inform
+ recipient (n) (Explanation): The
person who receive sth
+ facsimile : Fax
+ subscribe (v) : (Translation)
+ distribute (v) (Situation)
-checks understanding of the new
words
III. While you read
• Task 1
-gives instructions
-asks Ss to work in pairs to do the
task
-lets Ss do the task in 5 ms
-asks Ss to give their answers
-gives feedback
The keys:
1. C 2. B 3. D 4. C
• Task 2
-gives instructions “ skim the
questions to understand them and
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-play the game
-listen and answer the
teacher’s questions
-listen and answer
-listen and answer
-listen and guess the
meaning of the new words
-copy down the new words
in their note-books
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-work in pairs to do the task
in the allotted time
-give their answers
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
Unit 9:
THE POST
OFFICE
Part: Reading
Content
New words:
+ equip (with)
+ notify (v) - inform
+ recipient (n) : The person
who receive sth
+ facsimile : Fax
+ subscribe (v)
+ distribute (v)
• Task 1
The keys:
1. C
2. B
3. D
4. C
• Homework: (5ms)
Asks Ss to write in their notebooks:
+ learn the lesson well.
+ talk about their local P.O and compare it and Thanh Ba P.O
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare part: “Speaking”
• Self –evaluation:
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Date of teaching:
Period : 54
Unit 9: THE POST OFFICE
Part: Speaking
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content : + To enable Ss to use appropriate language to talk about different postal and
telecommunication services
• Language function: + Talking about different postal and telecommunication services
• Educational aim : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ talk about different postal and telecommunication services
+ know how to make requests
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary:
b) Grammar : Questions for making requests
+ Could you help me…
+ I would like….
2. Skills: Speaking
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/activities: Pair work, group works, discussion, pictures
5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
a. Warm- up: Greets the Ss
b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson: (5ms)
- Asks Ss to give the words in E.L
1. th«ng b¸o
2. ®¨ng kÝ, thuª bao
3. ngêi nhËn
- Tell some service provided by Than Ba Post Office
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
The keys:
1. inform 2. subscribe 3. recipient
- Some service provided by Than Ba Post Office:
Mail and Parcel Service
Express Money Transfer
Phone Calls and Faxes
Press Distribution
• Presentation of the new material: (34ms)
Tim
e
Teacher’s activities Students’
activities
The content of the
lesson
5ms
9ms
20ms
I. Lead-in
-asks Ss to list some services
provided by their post office
-makes question” How can we do
if we want to use these
service?
-gives feedback: Make requests
-tells the aim of the lesson: Talking
about different postal and
telecommunication services
II. Pre- Practice
• Task 1
-introduces the model dialogue
-asks Ss to work in pairs and
practice the dialogue in 2 ms
-calls on some pairs to practice it
-gives feedback
-asks Ss
* What service is the customer
using in the dialogue?
-asks Ss to find out useful
phrases / expressions to make
requests in the dialogue
-gives feedback
Could you …?
What’s …?
How much …?
…
III. Practice
• Task 2
-gives instructions ( in the text
book)
-asks Ss to work in pairs and make
the conversations, basing on task 1
-lets Ss do the task in 5 minutes
-calls out some pairs to stand up
-listen and answer
-listen and answer the
teacher’s question
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
-look at their books and
listen to the teacher
-work in pairs and practice
the dialogue in the allotted
time
-stand up and practice it
-listen and answer
-look at the dialogue and
answer
-listen and answer
-take notes n their note
books
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-work in pairs and do the
task in the allotted time
-stand up and practice their
conversations
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher’s
Unit 9:
THE POST
OFFICE
Part: Speaking
Content
• Task 1
# Expressions
+ Could you …?
+ What’s …?
+ How much …?
…
• Task 2
• Task 3
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
and practice their conversations
-gives feedback
• Task 3
-gives instructions: “Read the two
situations carefully, make a
dialogue for each of the
situations”
-asks Ss to work in pairs and make
the conversations, basing on task
1,2
-lets Ss do the task in 8 minutes
-calls out some pairs to stand up
and practice their conversations
-gives feedback
instructions
-work in pairs and do the
task in the allotted time
-stand up and practice their
conversations
-listen and answer
• Homework: (5ms)
Asks Ss to make other examples such as “Express Money Transfer”
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare part: “Listening”
• Self –evaluation:
_________________________________________________________________________
Date of teaching:
Period : 55
Unit 9: THE POST OFFICE
Part: Listening
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content: + To encourage Ss to listen to a monologue about the development of
Viet nam’s system overt the past few years
+ To help Ss practice listening
• Language function: Listening for general and for specific information
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
• Educational aim: At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ develop extensive listening skills
+ use the information they have listened to for other communicative tasks
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary : commune, rural net work, capacity , …
b) Grammar : no structures
2. Skills: Speaking
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/activities: Pair work, group works, discussion, question-answer, game
5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
i. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
Checking up previous lesson: (5ms)
Make a conversation about one of the services that you want from the post office
Give feedback
• Presentation of the new material: (35ms)
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Tim
e
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
6ms
6ms
15ms
I. Lead-in
-asks Ss to play game “ Guessing
game”- “What is it?”
-gives instructions” The teacher
gives the clues, Ss will guess what
it is. The student who gives the
correct answer will be the winner
and get the present”
- CLUES: it consist of 9 letters
+ It is a thing
+ It’s small and easy to bring
+ We can use it to contact people,
write and send massage…
-conducts the game
The key: a cell phone
-asks Ss questions in the textbook
-tells the aim of the lesson:
Talking about Viet nam’s
telephone system
II. Before you listen
-introduces some new words
+ commune (n) ( Explanation)
+ rural net work (Example)
+ capacity (n) (Translation)
+ subscriber (n) The person who
subscribes
-sets the situation: “You are going
to listen to some information about
the development of Viet nam’s
telephone system over the past few
years ”
III. While you listen
• Task 1
-gives instruction” read the
statements in task 1 to understand
and guess the answer”
-plays the tape the first time
-asks Ss to give their answers
-plays the tape the second time to
check their answers
-asks Ss to give their answers
-gives feedback
The key:
1. B 2. D 3. C 4. D 5. C
• Task 2
-asks Ss to read the questions and
guess the answers
-has Ss to listen to the tape and do
the task
-asks Ss to give their answers
-plays the tape again
-asks Ss to compare their answers
with their partners
-asks Ss to give their answers
-gives feedback(T may play the
tape to check their answers)
The key:
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-play the game
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
-listen and guess the
meaning of the new words
and take notes
-listen to the teacher
-read the statements in task
1 and listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-listen to the tape and do the
task
-give their answers
-listen to the tape again
-give their answers
-listen and answer
-read the questions and guess
the answers
-listen to the tape and do the
task
-give their answers
-listen to the tape again
-share their answers with
their partners
-give their answers
-listen and answer
-take notes in their note-
books
Unit 9:
THE POST
OFFICE
Part: Listening
Content
New words:
+ commune (n)
+ rural net work
+ capacity (n)
+ subscriber (n)
• Task 1
The keys:
1. B
2. D
3. C
4. D
5. C
• Task 2
The keys:
1. China has the highest grown
in the number of telephone
• Homework: (4ms)
Asks Ss to write in their notebooks:
+ write a passage about the listening passage
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare part: “Writing”
• Self –evaluation:
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
____________________________________________________________________________________
Date of teaching:
Period : 56
Unit 9: THE POST OFFICE
Part: Writing
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content: To provide Ss with practice writing a formal letter to express satisfaction
or dissatisfaction
• Language function: Practicing writing a formal letter
• Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ write a formal letter to express satisfaction or dissatisfaction
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary : security, arrogant, punctuality
b) Grammar : review( simple past)
2. Skills: Writing
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/activities: Explanation, brainstorming, group work, game
5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk, pare board
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
g. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson:(no checking because the teacher wants to save time
So that Ss can have more time to practise writing)
• Presentation of the new material: (39ms)
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
• Homework: (5ms)
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
8ms
8ms
15ms
8ms
I. Warm up
-asks Ss to tell some service at
their local post office
-makes a question:
How do you think about these
services? ( Do you satisfy or
dissatisfy with these
services? Why?)
-gives feedback
-tells the aim of the lesson:
Writing a formal letter to
express you satisfaction or
dissatisfaction
II. Pre-Writing
-asks Ss to read the reading
passage about Thanh Ba post
office and discuss the services
that may make them satisfied or
dissatisfied, following the cues
in task 1
-introduces some new words
+ security (n) - Safe
+ punctuality (n) on time
+ arrogant (a) (Translation)
-lets Ss do the task in 5 minutes
-asks Ss to give their answers
-gives feedback
II. While-writing
-ask Ss to work in individually
and write a letter to express
satisfaction or dissatisfaction
-lets Ss do the task in 15 ms
-goes around to observe and
offer help
IV. Post writing
-asks Ss to change their
paperboards & check each other
-selects some to hang on the b/b
-has Ss correct their friends’
mistakes on the b/b
-gives feedback
-listen to the teacher and
answer the question
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
- read the reading passage
about Thanh Ba post office
and discuss
-listen and guess the meaning
of the new words
-do the task in the allotted
time
-give their answers
-listen ad answer
-work in individually and
write a letter
-do the task in the allotted
time
-change their papers to check
each other
-look at their friends’ work
-correct their friends’
mistakes
-listen and answer
Unit 9:
THE POST
OFFICE
Part: Writing
Content
Writing a formal letter
to express you
satisfaction or
dissatisfaction
+ security (n) - Safe
+ punctuality (n) on time
+ arrogant (a)
Asks Ss to write a letter to the Principle of their school to express satisfaction or
dissatisfaction about their school
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare par: “Language Focus”
• Self –evaluation:
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Date of teaching:
Period : 57
Unit 9: THE POST OFFICE
Part: Language Focus
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ distinguish the clusters /sp/, / st/ and / sk / and pronounce them exactly
+ distinguish the two relative clauses : “ Defining and non- defining R.Cl and use them correctly
1. Vocabulary: + the words with the clusters /sp/, / st/ and / sk / in: speak, stand, school, ……
2. Structure: Revision: Defining Relative Clause
Non- defining Relative Clause
3. Procedures:
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
I. Warm- up (5ms)
-greets Ss
-has a short chat with Ss
II. Checking up Previous knowledge( no checking because the lesson is long)
III. Content of the lesson (35ms)
• Pronunciation (10ms)
-asks Ss to give words with the clusters //sp/, / st/ and / sk / as much as possible
-has Ss read aloud the words
-tells the aim of the task : the clusters /sp/, / st/ and / sk /
-introduces some more in the text book
-has Ss listen and repeat the words
-calls some Ss to stand up and repeat
-helps Ss practice the dialogue containing the target sounds
-calls some pairs to stand up and practice
-gives feedback
• Grammar (25ms)
Presentation and Exercises
I. A. Presentation 1 : Defining Relative clause
-asks Ss to fill in the blank with one suitable relative pronoun
This is the man ………..will help us.
The key: Who / That
-helps Ss to review the meaning and use of Defining Relative Clause
“Defining Relative Clauses are used in order to give important information about a person or an
object. This information helps to distinguish him / her / it from others.”
“ There is no comma. It can start with any pronoun like “ Who, Whom, Whose, Which, That”
-gives another example (in the textbook)
Eg: An architect is someone who designs building
B. Exercise 1:
-asks Ss to complete other sentences in the same way as example
-explains some new words (if necessary):
+ brave (a) + coward (n) + tenant (n)
-lets Ss do exercise 1 in 3 ms
-asks Ss to give their answers
-gives feedback
The keys:
14. A burglar is someone who breaks into the house to steals things.
15. A customer is someone who buys something from a shop.
16. A shoplifter is someone who steals from a shop.
17. A coward is someone who is not brave.
18. A tenant is someone who pays rent to live in a house or flat.
II. A. Presentation 2 : Defining Relative clause with “Who, Whom, or
who”
-helps Ss review when to use “who” “ whom “and “whose”
• WHO: when the noun to be modified is the subject of the main verb in the relative clause
• WHOM: when the noun to be modified is the object of the main verb in the relative clause
• WHOSE: to express possessive
-gets Ss to give some examples to check that hey all understand the rules
B. Exercise 2:
-gives instructions
-lets Ss do exercise 2 in 3 ms
-asks Ss to give their answers
• Self –evaluation:
Date of teaching:
Period : 59
Unit 10: NATURE IN DANGER
Part: Reading
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content : + To introduce Ss to the passage about nature in danger
+ To provide Ss with some new words relating to the topic
• Language function: + Reading the passage for specific information and guessing
meaning in context
• Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
- develop their reading comprehension
- use the information they have read to discuss the related topic-
environmental destruction and conservation
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary: human race, prohibit, offspring, …
b) Grammar : no structure
2. Skills: Reading
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/ activities: pair work, group work, questions – answer, multiple choice, gap-filling
5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, pictures
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
j. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
+ Has a short chat with the Ss
b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson: (5ms)
-Asks Ss to combine these sentences using appropriate relative pronouns
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
1. Have you ever meet Lan? Lan is our new neighbour.
2. We visited the house. It was built a century ago.
-Gives feedback
The keys:
1. Have you ever met Lan who / that is our new neighbour?
2. We visited the house which / that was built a century ago.
• Presentation of the new material: (35ms)
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Tim
e
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
4ms
6ms
I. Lead-in
-shows out some pictures ( a
panda, a dolphin, a shark, a
dinosaur) and asks Ss to tell
their names
-gives feedback
-makes a question: “What is
happening to these animals?
-gives feedback
“They are in danger of being
extinct”
-tells the aim of the lesson:
Nature in danger
II. Before you read
-asks Ss to look at the pictures in
the textbook and name the
animals
-gives feedback
-gets Ss to read the facts about
them and answer the questions
-explains some new words:
+ scatter (v)
+ remain (v)
-gives feedback
-sets a situation:” You are going
to read a passage about how we
have destroyed our environment
and affected other species and
what we can do to save
endangered animals. And then
you do some tasks bellow”
-introduces some new words:
New words:
+ human race : ( Synonym) =
human beings = people
+ consequence (n) ( Synonym)
result
+ prohibit ( v) (Synonym)
= ban, not allow
+ offspring (n) = children
-checks understanding of the
new words
III. While you read
• Task 1
-asks Ss to read the passage
silently then do task 1
-gives instructions” read
through the sentences and
identify part of speech of the
words to fill in each blank. Then
choose the most suitable word
from the box to fill in the blank,
paying attention to their right
form”
-asks Ss to work individually to
do the task
-look at the pictures and tell
their names
-listen and answer
-listen and answer the
teacher’s questions
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
-look at the pictures in the
textbook
-listen and answer
-read the facts and answer the
questions
-listen and guess the meaning
of the new words
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
-listen and guess the meaning
of the new words
-copy down the new words in
their note-books
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-work individually to do the
task in the allotted time
-give their answers
Unit 10:
NATURE IN
DANGER
Part: Reading
Content
New words:
+ human race : = human
beings = people
+ consequence (n) = result
+ prohibit ( v) = ban, not
allow
+ offspring (n) = children
• Task 1
The keys:
1. extinct
2. protect
3. decreasing
4. pollutants
5. endangered
6. interference
• Homework: (4ms)
Asks Ss to write in their notebooks:
+ learn the lesson well.
+ write a short paragraph about the reason why some rare animals become extinct
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare part: “Speaking”
• Self –evaluation:
______________________________________________________________________________________
Date of teaching:
Period : 60
Unit 10: NATURE IN DANGER
Part: Speaking
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content : + To enable Ss to use appropriate language to talk about nature
in danger and talk about measures for protecting endangered nature
• Language function: + Talking about the reason why nature is threatened and measures for
protecting the environment
• Educational aim : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
+ use the require language to talk about endangered nature and ways
to protect it
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary: capture, recreation, fertilizer, pesticides, …
b) Grammar : no structures
2. Skills: Speaking
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/activities: Pair work, group works, discussion, matching
5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
c. Warm- up: Greets the Ss
d. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson: (5ms)
- Calls on one student and asks him/ her to give synonyms of these words in E.L
1. human beings ( human race, people)
2. offspring ( children)
3. prohibit ( ban, not allow)
- Asks a question: “ What has been done to protect the environment?”
(-> Many things have been done to protect the environment such as:
+ many organizations have been set up and money has been raised to save rare animals
+ thousands of national parks have been established
+ laws have been passed to prohibit killing endangered animals )
- Give feedback and marks
• Presentation of the new material: (34ms)
Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
5ms
I. Lead-in
-gets Ss’ brainstorming by asking
them to give words / phrases related
to the environment
-gives feedback
Expected words phrases:
pollutant
nature
trees
water
…
-makes a question:
“Why is our nature threatened?”
-gives feedback
-tells the aim of the lesson:
Talking about the reason why
nature is threatened and
measures of
-give words / phrases related
to the environment
-listen and answer
-listen and answer the
question
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
Unit 10:
NATURE IN
DANGER
Part: Speaking
Content
• Task 1
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
9ms
20ms
protecting the environment
II. Pre- Practice
• Task 1
-asks Ss to read some reasons in
task 1
-introduces some new words
+ capture (v)
+ recreation (n)
+ fertilizer (n)
+ pesticide (n)
+ cultivation(n)
+ discharge (v)
-asks Ss to work in pairs, read the
statements and put them in the
order of importance
-calls on some Ss to present their
ideas
-gives feedback
III. Practice
• Task 2
-asks Ss read through the task
-explains some new words if
necessary
-asks Ss to match the problems in
task 1 with appropriate solutions in
task 2
-lets Ss do in 3 minutes
-calls on some Ss to give their
answers
-gives feedback
The keys:
(worksheet at the end of the
lesson )
• Task 3
-asks Ss state the negative impacts
made by people on the
environment and suggest measures
to protect it
-gives example (in the textbook)
-asks Ss to work in pairs
-lets Ss prepare the task in 5ms
-goes around to offer help
-calls on some pairs to represent
-gives feedback
-read the reasons in task 1
-listen and guess the meaning
of the new words
-copy down the new words
in their note-books
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-present in front of the class
-listen and answer
-read through the task
-listen and take notes
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-prepare the task in the
allotted time
-give their answers
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-listen and take notes
-work in pairs
-prepare the task in the
allotted time
-present in front of the class
-listen and answer
+ capture (v)
+ recreation (n)
+ fertilizer (n)
+ pesticide (n)
+ cultivation(n)
+ discharge (v)
• Task 2
• Task 3
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
• Homework: (5ms)
Asks Ss to write in their notebooks:
-tell some activities that they should do to protect the environment
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare part: “Listening”
• Self –evaluation:
Reason why nature is threatened Measures for protecting endangered nature
Killing endangered animals
for fur, skin and food
Killing endangered animals for
fur, skin and food should be
banned
Keeping animals as pets Keeping animals as pets should be
discouraged
Hunting or capturing animals
for recreation or
entertainment
Animals should not be captured
for recreation or entertainment
Burning forests Zoos and national parks should be
established to save animals and
plants
All kinds of animals and plants
should be protected
Cutting down trees for wood Planning trees should be
encouraged
Using fertilizers and
pesticides for cultivation
Decreasing the use of fertilizers
and pesticides for cultivation
should be encouraged
Discharging chemical
pollutants into the
environment
Discharging chemical pollutants
into the environment should be
prohibited
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
____________________________________________________________________________________
Date of teaching:
Period : 61
Unit 10: NATURE IN DANGER
Part: Listening
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content: + To encourage Ss to listen to a monologue about national parks
+ To help Ss practice listening
• Language function: Listening for specific and for detailed information
• Educational aim: At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ develop extensive listening skills
+ use the acquired language to summarize the information they listen to
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary : scenic feature, devastating, maintenance, …
b) Grammar : no structures
2. Skills: Listening- Speaking
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/activities: Group work, question-answer, multiple choice, discussion
5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk, tape
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
j. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson: (5ms)
Asks Ss to tell some reasons why nature is threatened and offer some solutions to protect
our environment
Give feedback
• Presentation of the new material: (35ms)
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Tim
e
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
6ms
6ms
15ms
I. Lead-in
-asks Ss to list some national parks
in Viet nam they know
-gives feedback
Expected answers:
1. Cat Ba National park
2. Cuc Phuong National park
3. Phong Nha National park
4. Ba Vi National park
…
-tells the topic of the lesson:
National Parks
II. Before you listen
-asks Ss some questions in the
textbook
1. What purposes do national
parks serve?
2. What are the problems that
national parks might be facing
at the moment?
3. What can we do to protect
them?
-gives feedback
Suggested answers:
1. They protect and preserve the
nature beauty of the lands.
2. Many are being polluted by
visitors
3. Encourage people to keep the
parks clean and green by dropping
liter in the right place…
-lets Ss repeat the words
-introduces some new words
+ scenic features (Translation)
+ devastating (a) ( Synonym:
destructive
+ maintenance (n) (Translation)
+ approximately (adv) : nearly
-sets the situation: “You are going
to listen about national parks in
the U.S.A. Listen and do some
tasks below”
III. While you listen
• Task 1
-gives instructions “read through
the statements carefully to
understand them and underline
key words and work out what
information they need to
concentrate on while listening”
-explains some new words if any
-plays the tape the first time
-asks Ss to give their answers
-plays the tape the second time to
-list some national parks in
Viet nam
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
-listen and answer the
questions
-listen and answer
-repeat the words
-listen and guess the
meaning of the new words
and take notes
-listen to the teacher
-read the statements in task
1 and guess the answers
-listen and take notes
-listen to the tape and do the
task
-give their answers
-listen and answer
Unit 10:
NATURE IN
DANGER
Part: Listening
Content
New words:
+ scenic features
+ devastating (a) :
destructive
+ maintenance (n)
+ approximately (adv) :
nearly
• Task 1
The keys:
1. T
2. T
3. F
4. T
5. T
• Homework: (4ms)
Asks Ss to write in their notebooks:
+ write a summary of the listening passage
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare part: “Writing”
• Self –evaluation:
In many part of the United States , national parks are used to(1) ... and preserve the natural
beauty of the land. To day there are(2) … national parks in the United States, covering (3)….3 % of
the total land area of the country(4)….of visitors visit them every year. However , many national
parks are in(5) … of being destroyed. Rare animals are(6) … or(7) ….. for fur, skin or other parts.
Trees are cut down for wood. Large areas of national parks experience(8) … fires caused by
careless people. The pollution from(9) … is harming the parks. If these problems are not solved
immediately, many national parks will be completely (10)….
Date of teaching:
Period : 62
Unit 10: NATURE IN DANGER
Part: Writing
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content: To provide Ss with practice writing descriptive essays
• Language function: Practicing writing descriptions of location
• Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ describe a national park based on given information
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary : coastal, abundant, ha, human bones
b) Grammar : the simple present tense
2. Skills: Writing
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/activities: Explanation, question- answer
5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk, pare board
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
h. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson:(no checking because the teacher wants to save time
So that Ss can have more time to practise writing)
• Presentation of the new material: (39ms)
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
8ms
8ms
I. Warm up
-asks Ss to close their books and
play game “ Competition game-”
-divides Ss into 6 groups
-gives instructions” Ss think and
list national parks they know as
much as possible in 2 minutes,
then the representative will go to
b/b and write down their
answers . The group with the
most correct answers will be the
winner”
-conducts the game
-makes some questions
1. Have you ever been to /
heard Cat Ba national park?
2. Where is it?
3. What do you know about
it?
-gives feedback
-tells the aim of the lesson:
Writing description of Cat Ba
National park
II. Pre-Writing
-asks Ss read the fact about Cat
Ba National Park
-introduces some difficult word
phrases:
+ coastal water
+ ha = hectare
+ stone tool
+ human bone
-asks Ss to answer the following
the questions
+ Where is Cat Ba National
Park located?
+ What are the special
features of Cat Ba National
Park?
+ How large is it?
+ What do you know about
the animals and plants in Cat
Ba National Park?..
+ What are some of the
historic features of the park?
-lets Ss do the task in 4 minutes
-asks Ss to give their answers
-gives feedback
-close their books
-sit in groups
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-play the game
-listen and answer the
teacher's questions
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
-read the fact about Cat Ba
National Park
-listen and answer the
teacher's questions
-do the task in the allotted
time
-give their answers
-listen ad answer
Unit 10:
NATURE IN
DANGER
Part: Writing
Content
Writing description of
Cat Ba National park
+ coastal water
+ ha = hectare
+ stone tool
+ human bone
Answer the questions
+ Where is Cat Ba
National Park located?
+ What are the special
features of Cat Ba
National Park?
+ How large is it?
+ What do you know about
the animals and plants in
Cat Ba National Park?..
+ What are some of the
historic features of the
park?
Suggested answers:
+ Cat Ba National Park
• Homework: (5ms)
- Asks Ss to correct the mistakes and write the complete paragraph in their note books
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare par: “Language Focus”
• Self –evaluation:
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Date of teaching:
Period : 63
Unit 10: NATURE IN DANGER
Part: Language Focus
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ distinguish the sounds /sl / ,/ sm / , / sn / and / sw/ and pronounce them exactly
+ master the use of relative pronouns with prepositions
+ use this structure correctly and appropriately to solve communicative tasks
.
1. Vocabulary: The words with the clusters /sl / ,/ sm / , / sn / and / sw/ in: slave, small, snack swim,…
2. Structure: Relative pronouns with prepositions
3. Procedures:
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
I. Warm- up (5ms)
-greets Ss
-has a short chat with Ss
II. Checking up Previous knowledge( no checking)
III. Content of the lesson (35ms)
• Pronunciation
-asks Ss to give words with the sounds /sl / ,/ sm / , / sn / and / sw/ as much as possible
-has Ss read aloud the words
-tells the aim of the task : the sounds /sl / ,/ sm / , / sn / and / sw/
-introduces some more in the text book
-has Ss listen and repeat the words
-calls some Ss to stand up and repeat
-helps Ss practice the dialogue
-calls some pairs to stand up and practice
-gives feedback
• Grammar
Revision and Exercises
1. Revision: Relative pronouns with prepositions
-asks Ss to combine the following sentences, using relative pronouns
1. That is the girl . I’m looking for her.
2. That is the girl . The girl is our new friend.
3. The picture is beautiful. Lan hangs it over there.
4. The picture is beautiful. You are looking at the picture.
-gives feedback
The keys:
1. That is the girl for whom I’m looking.
2. That is the girl who / that is our new friend.
3. The picture that / which Lan hangs over there is beautiful.
4. The picture at which you are looking is beautiful.
NOTES:
1. “THAT” isn’t used in Non-defining Relative clauses
Wrong: Nam, that is studying over there, is my friend.
Right: Nam, who is studying over there, is my friend.
2. “THAT” isn’t used after prepositions
Wrong: She is the woman about that we are talking.
Right: She is the woman about whom we are talking.
3. We can drop the relative pronoun when it is the object
That is the girl [ that/ whom ] I share the apartment with.
2. Exercises:
( in the textbook)
Exercise 1:
-gives instructions
-lets Ss do exercise 1 in 5 ms
-asks Ss to give their answers
-gives feedback
The keys:
19. whom
20. which
21. whom
• Self –evaluation:
Date of teaching:
Period : 64
Unit 11: SOURCES OF ENERGY
Part: Reading
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content : + To introduce Ss to the passage about sources of energy
+ To provide Ss with some new words relating to the topic
• Language function: + Reading the passage for specific information and guessing
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
meaning in context
• Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
- develop their reading comprehension
- use the information they have read to discuss the advantages and
disadvantages of different sources of energy
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary: Geothermal, windmills, infinite, …
b) Grammar : no structure
2. Skills: Reading
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/ activities: pair work, group work, questions – answer, summarizing, gap-filling
5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, pictures
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
k. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
+ Has a short chat with the Ss
b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson: (5ms)
-Asks Ss to combine these sentences using appropriate relative pronouns with
prepositions
1. The flat is an old part of the city. I have just moves to this flat..
2. The meeting was very interesting. I went to the meeting.
-Gives feedback
The keys:
1. The flat to which I have just moved is an old part of the city.
2. The meeting to which I went was very interesting.
• Presentation of the new material: (35ms)
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Ti
me
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the
lesson
4ms
6ms
17ms
I. Lead-in
-asks Ss to name some sources
of energy they know
sources of
energy
-gives feedback
-makes a question: “What do
we need energy for?
-gives feedback
“We need energy to live and
work/ to cook meals/ to light/ to
run machines/…”
-tells the aim of the lesson:
Sources of energy
II. Before you read
-asks Ss to look at the pictures in
the textbook and tell anything
about the pictures
( What sources of energy is each
of the picture? / How can the
make energy?)
-gives feedback
-sets a situation:” You are going
to read a passage about sources
of energy. And then you do some
tasks bellow”
-introduces some new words:
New words:
+ geothermal heat : ( Picture)
+ windmill: ( Picture)
+ solar panel: ( Picture)
+ infinite (a): (Synonym)-
unlimited
+ potential (a) ( Translation)
-checks understanding of the
new words
III. While you read
• Task 1
-asks Ss to read the passage
silently then do task 1
-gives instructions” read
through the sentences and
identify part of speech of the
words to fill in each blank. Then
choose the most suitable word
from the box to fill in the blank,
paying attention to their right
form”
-asks Ss to work individually to
do the task
-lets Ss do the task in 3 ms
-asks Ss to give their answers
-gives feedback
The keys:
1. released 2.alternative
-name some sources of energy
-listen and answer
-listen and answer the
teacher’s questions
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
-look at the pictures in the
textbook and answer
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
-listen and guess the meaning
of the new words
-copy down the new words in
their note-books
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-work individually to do the
task in the allotted time
-give their answers
-listen and answer
Unit 11:
SOURCES OF
ENERGY
Part: Reading
Content
New words:
+ geothermal heat :
+ windmill:
+ solar panel:
+ infinite (a): )- unlimited
+ potential (a)
• Task 1
The keys:
1. released
2.alternative
3. energy
4. limited
5. exhausted
• Homework: (4ms)
Asks Ss to: name some sources of energy and tell advantages and disadvantages of
them
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare part: “Speaking”
• Self –evaluation:
Task 2: The key:
Sources of
energy
Advantages Disadvantages
Nuclear power It’s unlimited( it can provide
electricity for the world’s needs
for hundreds of years)
It can be very dangerous
Geothermal
heat
It’s valuable It is available in a few places in the
world
Solar energy It is not only plentiful and finite
but also clean and safe
It’s possible during the day time
Wind power It is clean and unlimited (there
is lots of it)
There is no wind energy if the wind
does not blow
Water power It is clean and unlimited (water
power gives energy without
pollution)
It is expensive
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__
Date of teaching:
Period : 65
Unit 11: SOURCES OF ENERGY
Part: Speaking
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content : + To enable Ss to use appropriate language to talk about
advantages
and disadvantages of using alternative sources of energy
sources
• Language function: + Talking about advantages and disadvantages of energy sources
• Educational aim : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
• + use the required language to talk about advantages and
disadvantages
of using alternative sources of energy sources
+ use the required language to talk about the use of alternative sources
of
Energy in the future
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary: hydroelectricity enormous, renewable, …
b) Grammar : no structures
2. Skills: Speaking
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/activities: pair work, group works, discussion, role- play
5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
e. Warm- up: Greets the Ss
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
f. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson: (5ms)
- Calls on one student to go to the b/b and asks him/ her to give these words in E.L
1. địa nhiệt (geothermal heat )
2. khong giới hạn (infinite)
3. tiềm năng (potential)
Question: “ How many sources of energy are mentioned in the text? What are they?”
(-> There are 5 sources of energy mentioned in the text:
+ Nuclear power
+ Solar energy
+ Water energy
+ Wind power
+ Geothermal heat )
- Give feedback and marks
• Presentation of the new material: (34ms)
Tim
e
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the
lesson
5ms
I. Lead-in
-distributes Ss the handouts and
asks them to reorder the letters
into meaningful words related to
energy
1. sosifl seult 2. ralos genery
3. teraw rowep 4. wpero inwd
5. eraluncn owerp
6. lamrehtoeg ygener
-gives feedback
The keys:
1. Fossil fuels
2. solar energy
3. Water power
4. Wind power
5. Nuclear power
6. Geothermal heat
-makes a question:
“What are the advantages
and disadvantages of these
sources of energy?”
-gives feedback
-tells the aim of the lesson:
Talking about advantages and
disadvantages of various
-get the handout
-listen and answer
-listen and answer the question
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
Unit 11:
SOURCES OF
ENERGY
Part: Speaking
Content
• Task 1
+ hydroelectricity (n)
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
9ms
20ms
sources of energy
II. Pre- Practice
• Task 1
-asks Ss to read through the
statements and explains the new
words
+ hydroelectricity (n)
Eg: Vinh Son hydroelectricity
-asks Ss to work individually
and do the task
-lets Ss do in 3 minutes
-asks Ss to compare their
answers with their friends
-asks Ss to give their answers
-gives feedback
The keys:
1. D 2. D 3. D 4. A
5. D 6. A 7. D
III. Practice
• Task 2
-asks Ss look through the
dialogue
-explains some new words if
necessary ( Run out / abundant )
-reminds Ss of the expressions to
ask for and give opinions, agree
or disagree with someone
Expressions:
* Asking for opinion:
+ What do you think about..?
+ What’s your opinion about…?
+ Do you have any opinions
about..?
…
* Expressing opinion:
+ I think/ believe…
+ In my opinion…
+ I feel..
* Expressing agreements:
+ I agree
+ I think so, too
+ That’s right
* Expressing disagreements:
+ That might be true, but
+ Well, maybe, but…
-introduces “ useful language”
-asks Ss to work in pairs and talk
about the ads and disads, using
the prompts in task 2
-read through the statements
and guess the meaning of the
new word
-copy down the new words in
their note-books
-work individually and do the
task in the allotted time
-compare their answers with
their friends
-give their answers
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-listen and take notes
-
-listen and take notes
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-prepare the task in the allotted
time
-stand up and perform
-listen and answer
The keys:
1. D
2. D
3. D
4. A
5. D
6. A
7. D
• Task 2
New words:
+ enormous(a)
+ renewable (a)
* Asking for opinion:
+ What do you think about..?
+ What’s your opinion
about…?
+ Do you have any opinions
about..?
…
* Expressing opinion:
+ I think/ believe…
+ In my opinion…
+ I feel..
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
-lets Ss do in 3 minutes
-calls on some pairs to stand up
and perform
-gives feedback
• Task 3
-asks Ss to work in groups and
discuss their belief on the
increasing use of alternative
sources in the future
-lets Ss prepare the task in 5ms
-goes around to offer help
-calls on some representative to
represent
-gives feedback
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-work in groups
-prepare the task in the allotted
time
-present in front of the class
-listen and answer
* Expressing
agreements:
+ I agree
+ I think so, too
+ That’s right
* Expressing
disagreements:
+ That might be true, but
+ Well, maybe, but…
• Task 3
• Homework: (5ms)
Asks Ss to write in their notebooks:
-write a report on how to use sources of energy economically
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare part: “Listening”
• Self –evaluation:
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_
Date of teaching:
Period : 66
Unit 11: SOURCES OF ENERGY
Part: Listening
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content: + To encourage Ss to listen to a monologue about sources of energy
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
+ To help Ss practice listening
• Language function: Listening for specific and for detailed information
• Educational aim: At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ develop extensive listening skills
+ use the acquired language to talk about different kinds of energy
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary : ecologist, fertilize, resources…
b) Grammar : no structures
2. Skills: Listening- Speaking
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/activities: group work, question-answer, multiple choice, gap-filling
5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, tape
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
k. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson: (5ms)
Checking up in lead-in part
• Presentation of the new material: (35ms)
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Ti
me
Teacher’s activities Students’
activities
The content of the
lesson
6ms
6ms
I. Lead-in
-show out some picture and asks
Ss to name what kid of energy in
each picture
Picture 1: wind energy
Picture 2: gas
Picture 3: electricity
Picture 4: solar energy
-makes some questions:
1. Which sources of energy
do you use in your house?
2. Is energy important to our
life?
3. How important?
-gives feedback
-sets a situation” You are going
to listening to a talk about the
importance of energy and how to
use it carefully”
-tells the topic of the lesson:
Sources of energy
II. Before you listen
-teaches new words
Teach word by word following
the principles and steps of
teaching words
New words:
+ ecology (n) (Translation)
-> ecologist (n) (The person who
study ecology)
+ resources (n)
Eg: Coal, oil, gas … are natural
resources
+ fertilizer (n) (Picture)
-> fertilize (v)
Eg: If the soil is fertilized and
protected, more trees will grow
-checks understanding of the
new words
-sets the situation: “You are
going to listen about sources of
energy. Listen and do some tasks
below”
III. While you listen
• Task 1
-gives instructions “ read the
statements carefully and identify
the key words in each option and
the differences between them,
then work out what information
you need to concentrate on while
listening and guess the answers”
-explains some new words if any
-plays the tape the first time
-asks Ss to give their answers
-plays the tape the second time to
check their answers
-look at the pictures and
answer
-listen and answer the
teacher’s questions
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
-listen and guess the
meaning of the new words
and take notes
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
-read the statements in task
1 and guess the answers
-listen and take notes
-listen to the tape and do the
task
-give their answers
-listen and answer
Unit 11:
SOURCES OF
ENERGY
Part: Listening
Content
New words:
+ ecology (n)
-> ecologist (n)
+ Nitrogen (n): (N)
+ Oxygen (n): (O2)
+ Carbon dioxide (n): CO2)
• Task 1
The keys:
1. D
2. C
3. D
4. A
5. C
• Homework: (4ms)
Asks Ss to write in their notebooks:
+ write 6 sentences about what benefit people get from the sources of energy
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare part: “Writing”
• Self –evaluation:
The chart:
Jumbled words
1. loac
2. emulotrep
3. lio
4. diwn gynere
5. sag
6. salor gynere
7. Mothergale thea
coal
petroleum
oil
wind energy
gas
solar energy
geothermal heat
Date of teaching
Period : 67
Unit 11: SOURCES OF ENERGY
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Part: Writing
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content: To provide Ss with practice writing description
• Language function: Practicing writing descriptions of chart
• Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ interpret the chart and write a description of information from the chart
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary :
b) Grammar : the simple past tense
2. Skills: Writing
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/activities: Explanation, question- answer, gap- filling
5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk, pare board
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
i. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson:(no checking because the teacher wants to save time
So that Ss can have more time to practise writing)
• Presentation of the new material: (39ms)
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
4ms
8ms
20ms
I. Warm up
-shows out a chart and asks Ss
to say something about it
-gives feedback
-tells the aim of the lesson:
Writing description of chart
II. Pre-Writing
-asks Ss to study the chart and
complete the passage
-asks Ss to compare their
answers
-asks Ss to give their answers
-gives feedback
The keys:
1. 117 2. coal 3. smallest
-asks Ss to answer the following
the questions
+ What is the topic of the chart?
+ Does it describe the past, the
present or the future?
+ Which made up the largest
amount of consumption:
petroleum, coal, or nuclear and
hydroelectricity?
+ Which consumption ranked
the second?
+ Which made up the smallest
amount of consumption?
-gives feedback
Suggested answers:
+ The chart shows the energy
consumption in Highland in 2000.
+ It describes the past
+ Petroleum…of consumption
+ Coal ranked the second
+ Nuclear & Hydroelectricity
III. While-writing
-ask Ss to study the chart in
2005
-asks Ss to answer the questions
above
-asks Ss to give their answer
-gives feedback
-asks Ss to look at the chart and
the two tasks again
-asks Ss to write the description
of the chart individually
-reviews some expressions like:
Eg:
* make up the largest/ smallest
percentage
* This is followed by
* This ranks first/ second…
+ Verb tenses:
*The chart shows the present
situation -> simple present tense
* The chart shows the past events
-> simple past tense
-look at the chart
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
-study the chart and do the
task
-compare their answers
-give their answers
-listen and answer
-listen and answer the
teacher's questions
-listen ad answer
-study the chart in 2005
-answer the questions
-give their answer
-listen ad answer
-look at the chart and the
two tasks again
-work individually
and write
-listen and take notes
Unit 11:
SOURCES OF
ENERGY
Part: Writing
Content
Writing description of
chart
• Task 1
The keys:
1. 117
2. coal
3. smallest
Answer the following the
questions
+ What is the topic of the
chart?
+ Does it describe the
past, the present or the
future?
+ Which made up the largest
amount of consumption:
petroleum, coal, or nuclear
and hydroelectricity?
+ Which consumption ranks
second?
+ Which made up the
smallest amount of
consumption?
Suggested answers:
+ The chart shows the energy
consumption in Highland in 2000.
• Homework: (5ms)
- Asks Ss to correct the mistakes and write the complete paragraph in their note books
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare par: “Language Focus”
• Self –evaluation:
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Date of teaching:
Period : 68
Unit 11: SOURCES OF ENERGY
Part: Language Focus
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ distinguish the sounds / r / ,/ spl / and / spr/ and pronounce them exactly
+ use relative clauses replaced by participles and To-inf correctly and appropriately to solve
communicative tasks.
1. Vocabulary: The words with the sounds / r / ,/ spl / and / spr/ / in: shrimp, split, spring,…
2. Structure: Relative clauses replaced by participles and To-inf
3. Procedures:
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
I. Warm- up (5ms)
-greets Ss
-has a short chat with Ss
II. Checking up Previous knowledge( no checking)
III. Content of the lesson (35ms)
• Pronunciation
-asks Ss to give words with the sounds / r / ,/ spl / and / spr/ as much as possible
-has Ss read aloud the words
-tells the aim of the task : the sounds / r / ,/ spl / and / spr/
-introduces some more in the text book
-has Ss listen and repeat the words
-calls some Ss to stand up and repeat
-helps Ss practice the sentences
-calls some Ss to stand up and practice them
-gives feedback
• Grammar
Revision and Exercises
I. A. Revision 1: Relative clauses replaced by present participles
-asks Ss to combine the following sentences, using relative pronouns
The girl is my friend. The girl is dancing with your brother.
-gives feedback
The keys:
The girl who / that is dancing with your brother is my friend.
-asks Ss to rewrite this sentence into another way
-gives feedback
The girl dancing with you brother is my friend.
Present participle
-asks Ss to give any comments on the second sentence
 Relative pronoun functioning as subjects can be replaced by present participle (active Verbs)
-gives another example in the textbook
B. Exercises 1:
-gives instructions
-lets Ss do exercise 1 in 5 ms
-asks Ss to give their answers
-gives feedback
The keys:
26. The boy playing the piano is Bend
27. Do you know the woman coming toward us?
28. The people waiting for the bus in the rain are getting wet
29. ..
II. A. Revision 2 Relative clauses replaced by past participles
-asks Ss to combine the following sentences, using relative pronouns
I found him sitting at the table. The table was covered with papers.
-gives feedback
The keys:
I found him sitting at the table which / that was covered with papers.
-asks Ss to rewrite this sentence into another way
-gives feedback
I found him sitting at the table covered with papers.
• Self –evaluation:
________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__
Date of teaching:
Period : 72
Unit 12: THE ASIAN GAMES
Part: Reading
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content : + To introduce Ss to the passage about the Asian Games
+ To provide Ss with some new words relating to the topic
• Language function: + Reading the passage for specific information and guessing
meaning in context
• Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
- develop their reading comprehension
- use the information they have read to discuss the Asian Games
1. Language:
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
a) Vocabulary: intercultural knowledge, solidarity, squash, …
b) Grammar : no structure
2. Skills: Reading
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/ activities: pair work, group work, questions – answer, summarizing, gap-filling
5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, pictures
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
l. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
+ Has a short chat with the Ss
b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson: (5ms)
-Calls on a student to come to the b/b
-Asks the student to rewrite these sentences using participles clauses
1. The children who attend that school receive a good education.
2. I come from a city that is located in the southern part of the country.
-Gives feedback
The keys:
1. The children attending that school receive a good education.
2. I come from a city located in the southern part of the country.
• Presentation of the new material: (35ms)
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Ti
me
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the
lesson
4ms
6ms
17ms
I. Lead-in
-asks Ss to name some sports at
the Asian Games
-gives feedback
-makes a question:
1. How often are the Asian
Games held?
2. What sports is Viet nam
best ?
-gives feedback
-tells the aim of the lesson:
The Asian Games
II. Before you read
-asks Ss to look at the pictures in
the textbook and name the sports
-gives feedback
-sets a situation:” You are going
to read a passage about the
Asian Games. And then you do
some tasks bellow”
-introduces some new words:
New words:
+ intercultural knowledge :
( Translation)
+ promote (v): develop
+ weightlifting: ( Picture)
+ fencing: ( Picture)
+ solidarity (n): (Translation)
+ squash (n) ( Translation)
-checks understanding of the
new words
III. While you read
• Task 1
-asks Ss to read the passage
silently then do task 1
-gives instructions” read
through the sentences and
identify part of speech of the
words to fill in each blank. Then
choose the most suitable word
from the box to fill in the blank,
paying attention to their right
form”
-asks Ss to work individually to
do the task
-lets Ss do the task in 3 ms
-asks Ss to give their answers
-gives feedback
The keys:
1. facilities 2. aquatic
3. enthusiasm 4. effort
5. advancing 6. appreciated
• Task 2
-asks Ss to scan the passage and
then do task 2
-name some sports at
the Asian Games
-listen and answer
-listen and answer the
teacher’s questions
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
-look at the pictures in the
textbook and answer
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
-listen and guess the meaning
of the new words
-copy down the new words in
their note-books
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-work individually to do the
task in the allotted time
-give their answers
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
Unit 12:
THE ASIAN GAMES
Part: Reading
Content
New words:
+ intercultural knowledge :
+ promote (v): develop
+ weightlifting:
+ fencing:
+ solidarity (n):
+ squash (n)
• Task 1
The keys:
1. facilities
2. aquatic
3. enthusiasm
4. effort
5. advancing
6. appreciated
• Homework: (4ms)
Asks Ss to write in their notebooks:
+ learn the lesson well.
+ discuss the questions” What sports is Viet Nam good at? And what is not?”
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare part: “Speaking”
• Self –evaluation:
If having time, asks Ss to play game” Lucky Number”
1 2 3
4 5 6
9 8 7
Questions:
1. When was the first Asian Games held?
2. Lucky Number
3. How many nations took part in the first Asian Games?
4. Where was the second Asian Games held?
5. Where was the Asian Games held in 2002?
6. Lucky number
7. The 13th
Asian Games was held in New Delhi, India. Right or Wrong?
8. How many nations participated in the 14th
Asian Games?
9. Lucky number
The keys:
1. in 1961
2. Lucky No
3. 11 countries
4. in Manila, The Philippines
5. in Korea
6. Lucky No
7. Wrong
8. 42
9. Lucky No
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
__
Date of teaching:
Period : 73
Unit 12: THE ASIAN GAMES
Part: Speaking
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content : + To enable Ss to use appropriate language to talk about Asian Games
• Language function: + Asking for and giving information about the Asian Games
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
• Educational aim : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ use the required language to ask and answer about the Asian Games
+ use the required language to talk about sport results
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary: old vocabulary
b) Grammar : no structures
2. Skills: Speaking
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/activities: Pair work, group works, discussion, role- play
5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
g. Warm- up: Greets the Ss
h. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson: (5ms)
- Calls on one student to go to the b/b and asks him/ her to give these words in E.L
1. kiến thức liên văn hoá (intercultural knowledge )
2. tình đoàn ket (solidarity)
3. cử tạ (weightlifting)
- Question: “ What is the purpose of the Asian Games?”
(->The purpose of the Asian Games is to develop intercultural knowledge and friendship within Asia
)
- Give feedback and marks
• Presentation of the new material: (34ms)
Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
5ms
I. Lead-in
-makes some questions:
1. When and where were the
first Asian Games held?
2. How many countries took
part in the Games?
3. How many sports were
there at the Games?
-gives feedback
The keys:
1. in 1951 in India
2. eleven
3. six
-tells the aim of the lesson:
Asking and answering about
the Asian Games
-listen and answer the
teacher’s question
-listen and answer
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
Unit 12:
THE ASIAN GAMES
Part: Speaking
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
9ms
20ms
II. Pre- Practice
• Task 1
-hands out the copied papers to
the Ss (they are end of the lesson
plan)
-asks Ss to work in pairs, asks
and answer about the Asian
Games, using the questions:
1. When and where were the
first Asian Games held?
2. How many countries took
part in the Games?
3. How many sports were
there at the Games?
-lets Ss do in 5 minutes
-calls on some pairs to stand up
and perform in front of the class
-gives feedback
III. Practice
• Task 2
-asks Ss study the table and look
at the two pictures below
-asks Ss to work in groups of 4
-gives instructions: ”each groups
chooses a reporter and prepare
the report about Vietnam’s
performance and achievement at
the 14th
Asian Games.”
The cues:
+What the sport
+Where it is held
+How many countries participate in
+What sports Vietnam compete in
+What medal it obtain in each
sport
-lets Ss do in 8 minutes
-calls on the representative of
each group to come to the front
and report
-gives feedback
-get the papers
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-prepare the task in the allotted
-present in front of the class
-listen and answer
-study the table and the two
pictures
-work in groups of 4
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-prepare the task in the allotted
time
-stand up and perform
-listen and answer
Content
• Task 1
1. When and where were the
first Asian Games held?
2. How many countries took
part in the Games?
3. How many sports were
there at the Games?
• Task 2
The cues:
+What the sport
+Where it is held
+How many countries participate in
+What sports Vietnam compete in
+What medal it obtain in each
sport
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
• Homework: (5ms)
Asks Ss to practice more at home
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare part: “Listening”
• Self –evaluation:
The copied papers
Card A:
Games
No
Host
country
Year No of
countries
No of
sports
1 India 1951 11 6
2
3 Japan 1958 20 13
4
5 Thailand 1966 18 14
6
7 Iran 1974 25 16
8
9 India 1982 33 21
10
11 China 1990 37 27
12
13 Korea 1998 41 36
14
15 Qatar 2006 45 39
Card B:
Games
No
Host
country
Year No of
countries
No of
sports
1
2 Philippines 1954 18 8
3
4 Indonesia 1962 17 13
5
6 Thailand 1970 18 13
7
8 Thailand 1978 25 19
9
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
10 Korea 1986 27 25
11
12 Japan 1994 42 34
13
14 Korea 2002 44 38
15
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
____
Date of teaching:
Period : 74
Unit 12: THE ASIAN GAMES
Part: Listening
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content: + To encourage Ss to listen to a monologue about sports
+ To help Ss practice listening
• Language function: Listening for specific and for detailed information
• Educational aim: At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ develop extensive listening skills
+ use the acquired language to talk about sports and sportsmen
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary : freestyle, gymnast, gymnasium…
b) Grammar : no structures
2. Skills: Listening- Speaking
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/activities: Group work, question-answer, multiple choice
5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk, tape
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
a. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson: (5ms)
Asks Ss to talk about sports that Vietnamese athletes won at 14th
Asian Games
Give feedback
• Presentation of the new material: (35ms)
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Tim
e
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
6ms
6ms
15ms
I. Lead-in
-asks Ss to look at the
pictures and name the sports
-makes questions:
1. Have you ever watched
them on T.V?
2. Which one do you like
best? Why?
3. Tell some athletes won
gold medal in these sports
-gives feedback
-tells the topic of the lesson:
Sports and sportsmen
II. Before you listen
-lets Ss repeat the words
-introduces some new words
+ freestyle (n) (Translation)
+ gymnast (n): (Picture)
+ gymnasium (n):
+ bar (n): (Picture)
-sets the situation: “You are
going to listen about sources of
energy. Listen and do some tasks
below”
III. While you listen
• Task 1
-gives instructions “ read the
statements carefully and identify
the key words in each option and
the differences between them,
then work out what information
you need to concentrate on while
listening and guess the answers”
-explains some new words if any
-plays the tape the first time
-asks Ss to give their answers
-plays the tape the second time to
check their answers
-gives feedback
The key:
1. C 2. A 3. B 4. B 5. D
• Task 2
-gives instructions” read
through the questions, identify
the information you need to look
for in each question .Underlined
some key words/ questions
words and guess the answers”
-has Ss to listen to the tape and
do the task
-asks Ss to give their answers
-plays the tape again
-look at the pictures in the
textbook and answer
-listen and answer the
teacher’s questions
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
-repeat the words
-listen and guess the meaning
of the new words and take
notes
-listen to the teacher
-read the statements in task 1
and guess the answers
-listen and take notes
-listen to the tape and do the
task
-give their answers
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-guess the answers
-listen to the tape and do the
task
-give their answers
-listen to the tape again
-share their answers with their
partners
-give their answers
-listen and answer
-take notes in their note-books
Unit 12:
THE ASIAN GAMES
Part: Listening
Content
New words:
+ freestyle (n)
+ gymnast (n)
+ gymnasium (n)
+ bar
• Task 1
The keys:
1. C
2. A
3. B
4. B
5. D
• Homework: (4ms)
Asks Ss to write in their notebooks:
+ write a paragraph about Vietnam’s performance and achievements in recent Asia Games
Asks Ss to prepare part: “Writing”
• Self –evaluation:
Date of teaching:
Period : 75
Unit 12: THE ASIAN GAMES
Part: Writing
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content: To provide Ss with practice writing description
• Language function: Practicing writing descriptions of preparations for the coming Asian Games
• Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ write a paragraph describing the preparations for the coming Asian Games,
using future verb tenses
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary :
b) Grammar : the future tense
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
2. Skills: Writing
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/activities: Explanation, question- answer, brainstorming
5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk, pare board
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
j. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson:(no checking because the teacher wants to save time
So that Ss can have more time to practise writing)
• Presentation of the new material: (39ms)
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
• Homework: (5ms)
- Asks Ss to correct the mistakes and write the complete paragraph in their note books
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
4ms
8ms
20ms
7ms
I. Warm up
-gets Ss to brainstorm and write
down the words/ phrases about
things or facilities related the
Asian Games
-gives feedback
-sets the situation” Suppose
Vietnam is going to host the
coming Asian Games. What will
we prepare for it?”
Expected answers:
+ stadiums
+ car parks
+ roads
+…
-tells the aim of the lesson:
Describing the preparations for
the coming Asian Games
II. Pre-Writing
-asks Ss to read the prompts
-explains some new words
+ upgrade (v) (Translation)
+ stadium (n) ( Picture)
+ equip (v) (Translation)
+ recruit (v) (Translation)
III. While-writing
-asks Ss to write the description
using the prompts
-lets Ss do the task in 15 ms
-goes around to observe and
offer help
IV. Post writing
-selects some of Ss’ paper sheets
and hang them on the b/b
-has Ss correct their friends’
mistakes on the b/b
-gives feedback
* T draw Ss’ attention to the
format of the paragraph ( topic
sentences, supporting ideas/
examples, linking words,
concluding sentence …)
-brainstorm and write down
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
-listen to the teacher
-read the prompts
-listen and guess the meaning
of the new words
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-do the task in the allotted time
-hand in the paper sheets
-look at their friends’ work
-correct their friends’ mistakes
-listen and answer
Unit 12:
THE ASIAN GAMES
Part: Writing
Content
Describing the
preparations for the
coming Asian Games
• New words
+ upgrade (v) (Translation)
+ stadium (n) ( Picture)
+ equip (v) (Translation)
+ recruit (v)
Asks Ss to prepare par: “Language Focus”
• Self –evaluation:
Sample Writing:
To prepare for the coming Asian Games, we have a lot of things to do. First of all, we will
build one more National Stadium and some sports building and car parks. The National Sports
Centers and local
stadiums are not in good condition, so they need to be immediately upgrades. And we will widen
the training areas and the roads to the sports buildings. Then we have to equip all the hotels and
guess houses with modern facilities to welcome foreign athletes and visitors. These hotels should
also have special services for disabled athletes. It is necessary to promote and advertise all the
preparations for the Asian Games on the radio and T.V. Finally, we need to recruit volunteers to
serve the Games. These people should be university teachers and students with good English.
One more important thing is that we have to hold a competition to choose an official song for
welcoming the Asian Games.
__________________________________________________________________________
__
Date of teaching:
Period : 76
Unit 12: THE ASIAN GAMES
Part: Language Focus
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ distinguish the sounds / str /, / skr / and / skw/ and pronounce them exactly
+ mater the use of relative clauses and equivalent types of clauses without relative pronouns
+ use relative clauses correctly and appropriately to solve communicative tasks.
1. Vocabulary: The words with the sounds / str / ,/ skr / and / skw/ in: street, scream, square,…
2. Structure: Relative clauses – Omission of Relative pronouns
3. Procedures:
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
I. Warm- up (5ms)
-greets Ss
-has a short chat with Ss
II. Checking up Previous knowledge( no checking)
III. Content of the lesson (35ms)
• Pronunciation
-asks Ss to give words with the sounds / str /, / skr / and / skw/ as much as possible
-has Ss read aloud the words
-tells the aim of the task : the sounds / str /, / skr / and / skw/
-introduces some more in the text book
-has Ss listen and repeat the words
-calls some Ss to stand up and repeat
-helps Ss practice the sentences
-calls some Ss to stand up and practice them
-gives feedback
• Grammar
Revision and Exercises
I. A. Revision 1: Relative clauses without Relative Pronouns
-asks Ss to combine the following sentences, using a relative clause
I like the book. I bought it at the book store last week.
-gives feedback
The keys:
I like the book which / that I bought at the book store last week.
Or: I like the book I bought at the book store last week.
-asks Ss to give any comments on the second sentence
 Relative pronoun functioning as an object can be omitted
-gives another example in the textbook
B. Exercises 1:
-gives instructions” Complete the following sentences in the same ways as the example”
-lets Ss do exercise 1 in 4 ms
-asks Ss to give their answers
-gives feedback
The keys:
30. you lost
31. he invited to the birthday party
32. John told
33. …
II. A. Revision 2 Relative clause with a prepositions
-asks Ss to combine the following sentences, using relative pronouns
The music is very interesting. He is listening to the music.
-gives feedback
The keys:
The music [which / that] he is listening to is very interesting.
Or: The music he is listening to is very interesting.
-asks Ss to give any comments on the second sentence
 Relative pronouns replacing objects after preposition can be omitted
-gives another example in the textbook
B. Exercises 2:
-gives instructions”” Complete the following sentences in the same ways as the example”
-lets Ss do exercise 1 in 4 ms
-asks Ss to give their answers
-gives feedback
The keys:
• Self –evaluation:
__________________________________________________________________________
___
Date of teaching:
Period : 77
Unit 13: HOBBIES
Part: Reading
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content : + To introduce Ss to the passage about hobbies
+ To provide Ss with some new words relating to the topic
• Language function: + Reading the passage for specific information and guessing meaning
in context
• Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
- develop their reading comprehension
- use the information they have read to discuss the related topic
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary: the new words are in task 1
b) Grammar : no structure
2. Skills: Reading
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/ activities: Pair work, group work, questions – answer
5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk, pictures
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
m. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
+ Has a short chat with the Ss
b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson: (5ms)
-Calls on a student to come to the b/b
-Asks the student to make 2 sentences using relative clauses without relative pronouns
-Gives feedback and marks
• Presentation of the new material: (35ms)
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Tim
e
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
4ms
6ms
17ms
I. Lead-in
-makes a question:
1What do you like to do in
your free time?
-gives feedback
-asks Ss to look at the pictures in
the textbook and name the
hobbies described
-gives feedback
-tells the aim of the lesson:
Hobbies
II. Before you read
-sets a situation:” You are going
to read a passage about a person’s
hobbies. And then you do some
tasks bellow”
III. While you read
• Task 1
-gives instructions” read the
passage quickly and stop at the
lines that contain these words to
guess the meaning”
-asks Ss to work individually to
do the task in 5 minutes
-asks Ss to compare their
answers with their friends
-asks Ss to give their answers
-gives feedback
Suggested answers:
(at the end of the lesson plan)
-checks understanding of the
new words by asking them to do
the following exercise
(the exercise is at the end of the
lesson plan)
-gives instructions” read
through the sentences and
identify part of speech of the
words to fill in each blank. Then
choose the most suitable word
from the box to fill in the blank,
paying attention to their right
form”
-asks Ss to work individually to
do the task
-lets Ss do the task in 3 ms
-asks Ss to compare their
answers with their friends
-asks Ss to give their answers
-gives feedback
The keys:
1. indulge in 2.accomplished
3. avid 4. modest
5. keep me occupied
6. discarded 7. accompanying
-listen and answer the
teacher’s questions
-look at the pictures in the
textbook and answer
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
-listen to the teacher
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-work individually to do the
task in the allotted time
-compare their answers
-give their answers
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-work individually and do the
task in the allotted time
-compare their answers with
their friends
-give their answers
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher’s
Unit 13:
HOBBIES
Part: Reading
Content
• Task 1
The keys:
1. indulge in
2. accomplished
3. avid
4. modest
5. keep me occupied
6. discarded
7. accompanying
• Task 2
Answer the questions:
The keys:
1. His first hobby is playing his
guitar
2. No, he isn’t
3. Because he is an accomplished
guitarist and he is good at
accompanying people singing by
• Homework: (4ms)
Asks Ss to write in their notebooks:
+ learn the lesson well.
+ write a short paragraph talking about their hobbies
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare part: “Speaking”
• Self –evaluation:
Task 1:
Suggested answers:
1. accomplished Well-trained, skilled
tài ba, tài hoa
2. accompanying Going with a singer, using
a musical instrument
đệm đàn
3. modest Humble, unassuming
nhỏ, khiêm tốn
4. avid Eager
Say mê
5. discarded Thrown away
đã bị bỏ đi
6. indulge in Allow oneself the pleasure
of
Đam mê vào một việc gì
đó
7. keep me occupied Keep me busy
làm cho tôi bận rộn
Exercise 1: Use the words above to complete the following sentences
1. I’ll forget about dieting today. I’m going to …….eating whatever I like.
2. He’s an ……..musician. All his songs are very popular.
3. I love all fictions by Sidney Sheldon. I’m an ……..collector of his works.
4. He doesn’t like a big house in the centre. His only dream is to have a …. little house on the
outskirt.
5. I spend most of my free time looking after these puppies. They really……
6. They don’t need the old radio any more. It can be……
7. Her mother loves ….her on the organ.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Date of teaching:
Period : 78
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Unit 13: HOBBIES
Part: Speaking
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content : + To enable Ss to use appropriate language to talk about hobbies
• Language function: + Asking and answering about a hobby and talking about collections
• Educational aim : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ use the required language to ask and answer about a hobby
+ use the required language to talk about collections
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary: oversea, categories, …
b) Grammar : Wh- questions
2. Skills: Speaking
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/activities: pair work, group works, role- play
5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
i. Warm- up: Greets the Ss
j. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson: (5ms)
- Calls on one student to go to in the front and tell his/ her classmates about his/ her hobbies
- Give feedback and marks
• Presentation of the new material: (34ms)
Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
10ms
I. Lead-in
-asks Ss to play game “ Find
someone who…”
-gives instructions” go around
the lass and interview your
classmates to find out someone
who likes or doesn’t like these
activities then tick in the right
column and ask him/her to give
the reasons why. The person
who firstly finishes the task will
be the winner”
(the handout is at the end of the
lesson plan)
-conducts the game
-tells the aim of the lesson:
Asking and answering about
hobbies
II. Pre- Practice
• Task 2
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-play the game
-listen and answer
-
Unit 13:
HOBBIES
Part: Speaking
Content
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
8ms
16ms
-asks Ss read through the
dialogue between Lan and
Huong
-explains some new words
+ stall (n) : small shop
+ tag (n): label to show the name
of sth) eg: a book)
-reads the dialogue along with a
good student
-asks Ss to work in pairs and
practice the dialogue between
Lan and Huong
-lets Ss practice in 2 minutes
-calls on some pairs to stand up
and perform in front of the class
-gives feedback
III. Practice
• Task 3
-asks Ss study the suggestions
about collection of stamps
-reads through and explains
some new words
+ overseas (a )
+ categories (n): example
-makes the questions:
1. What is the hobby?
2. Could you tell me how to
collect them? And how to
organize them?
3. Where do you keep your
stamps?
4. Why do you collect
stamps?
5. What do you plan for the
future?
-asks Ss to work in pairs and
make similar dialogue
-lets Ss do in 8 minutes
-calls on some pairs to stand up
and present
-gives feedback
read through the dialogue
between Lan and Huong
-listen and answer
-reads the dialogue along with
the teacher
-work in pairs and practice the
dialogue
-practise in the allotted time
-stand up and perform
-listen and answer
-study the suggestions about
collection of stamps
-listen and take notes
-listen and answer the teacher's
questions
-work in pairs and do the task
-prepare the task in the allotted
-stand up and present
-listen and answer
• Task 1
+stall (n) : small shop
+ tag (n): label to show the
name of sth) eg: a book)
• Task 2
+ overseas (a )
+ categories (n):
• Task 3
Suggestion questions:
1. What is your hobby?
2. Could you tell me how
to collect them? 3. How
do you organize them?
4. Where do you keep
your stamps?
5. Why do you collect
stamps?
6. What do you plan for
the future?
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
• Homework: (5ms)
Asks Ss to practice more at home
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare part: “Listening”
• Self –evaluation:
Handout for the game
Activities Nam
e
Likes.... Doesn’t
like…
Reasons
Swimming
Fishing
Stamp-
collecting
Reading books
Watching T.V
Playing
computer
games
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
Date of teaching:
Period : 79
Unit 13: HOBBIES
Part: Listening
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content: + To encourage Ss to listen to a monologue about hobbies
+ To help Ss practice listening
• Language function: Listening for specific and for detailed information
• Educational aim: At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ develop extensive listening skills
+ use the acquired language to talk about hobby
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary : gigantic, ignorantly…
b) Grammar : no structures
2. Skills: Listening- Speaking
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/activities: Pair work, T-F statements, gap- filling
5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk, tape
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
b. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson: (5ms)
- Calls on two Ss to ask and answer about their hobbies
- Give feedback and marks
• Presentation of the new material: (35ms)
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Tim
e
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
6ms
6ms
15ms
I. Lead-in
-makes a question: “Do you like
reading books?”
-gives feedback
-divides the class into 2 groups
-asks Ss to play game
“ Competition game”
-gives instructions "list the
benefits of reading books as
much as possible within 2
minutes. Which group having the
most correct answers will be the
winner”
-conducts the game
-tells the topic of the lesson:
Benefits of reading books
II. Before you listen
-lets Ss repeat the words
-introduces some new words
+ gigantic (a) (Synonym): very
big, very great
+ ignorant (adj): lacking
knowledge, unaware of sth
-elicits some more from the
listening passage
+ bygone (a): past
+ to be fed up with: boring of
doing sth
+ to cope with: to face with
+ jungle (n): tropical forest
-sets the situation: “You will
hear a student talk about his
hobby. Listen and do some tasks
below”
III. While you listen
• Task 1
-gives instructions “read through
the statements carefully to
understand them and underline
key words and work out what
information they need to
concentrate on while listening”
-explains some new words if any
-plays the tape the first time
-asks Ss to give their answers
-plays the tape the second time to
check their answers
-gives feedback
The key:
1. T 2. F 3. F 4. F
5. T 6. T 7. T 8. F
• Task 2
-gives instructions “read the
passage carefully, identify the
word you need to fill in each
blank and guess the answers”
-listen and answer the
teacher’s questions
-listen and answer
-sit in groups
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-play the game
-listen to the teacher
-repeat the words
-listen and guess the meaning
of the new words and take
notes
-listen to the teacher
-read the statements in task 1
-listen and take notes
-listen to the tape and do the
task
-give their answers
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-guess the answers
Unit 13:
HOBBIES
Part: Listening
Content
New words:
+ gigantic (a) very big, very
great
+ ignorant (adj): lacking
knowledge, unaware of sth
+ bygone (a): past
+ to be fed up with: boring of
doing sth
+ to cope with: to face with
+ jungle (n): tropical forest
• Task 1
The keys:
1. T
2. F
3. F
4. F
5. T
• Homework: (4ms)
Asks Ss to write in their notebooks:
+ write a paragraph about disadvantages of watching T. V too much
Asks Ss to prepare part: “Writing”
• Self –evaluation:
Date of teaching:
Period : 80
Unit 13: HOBBIES
Part: Writing
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content: To provide Ss with practice writing a collection
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
• Language function: Practicing writing a collection
• Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ write about a collection
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary :
b) Grammar : the simple present tense
2. Skills: Writing
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/activities: brainstorming
5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, pare board
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
k. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson:(no checking because the teacher wants to save time
So that Ss can have more time to practise writing)
• Presentation of the new material: (39ms)
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
4ms
8ms
20ms
7ms
I. Warm up
-asks Ss to list some kind of
collections
Eg: collection of stamps,
collection of books, collection
of songs, collection of ancient
things, …
-tells the aim of the lesson:
Write about a collection
II. Pre-Writing
-asks Ss to look at the network
and make an outline for the
information about book
collection
Where to how to how to
buy books collect keep
why
to Book how to
collect Collection classify
books books
when stared plan for
collecting the future
Suggested answers: ( at the end
of the lesson plan)
III. While-writing
-asks Ss to look at the outline
and write down their work
-lets Ss do the task in 15 ms
-goes around to observe and
offer help
IV. Post writing
-selects some of Ss’ paper sheets
and hang them on the b/b
-has Ss correct their friends’
mistakes on the b/b
-gives feedback
-listen and answer
-listen and answer
-look at the network and make
an outline
-look at the outline and write
down
-do the task in the allotted time
-hand in the paper sheets
-look at their friends’ work
-correct their friends’ mistakes
-listen and answer
Unit 13:
HOBBIES
Part: Writing
Content
Write about a
collection
• Homework: (5ms)
- Asks Ss to correct the mistakes and write the complete one in their note books
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare par: “Language Focus”
• Self –evaluation:
Suggested answers from the network:
+ How to collect books: buy the book when find it interesting
+ How to keep books: keep them in a big bookshelf,…
+ Where to buy/get book: in a bookshop, second-hand stall, from parents/ friends…
+ How to classify books: different categories: history, people, science, ..
+ Why to collect books: to broaden knowledge, know more about the world,…
+ When started collecting: young, 12 years old,….
+ Plan for the future: continue to make collection richer
Sample writing:
I’m very much interested in collecting books and have a book collection at home. I
stared collecting books when I was a 12- year- old student. I buy book whenever I
find them interesting. Near my house are several book shops, so when I have free
time I go there to find books for my collection. Sometimes I also buy books in
second-hand book stalls, and occasionally, my parents and friends give me some.
Now I have a total of about 100 books and I keep them all in a big bookshelf in my
bedroom. I classify them into different categories: books about history, books about
famous people,... …
I love collecting books because books help me broaden my knowledge and know
more about the world. Also, reading books train my patience.
In the future, I’ll continue to make my collection richer and richer. I hope to have a
library of my own.
Date of teaching:
Period : 81
Unit 13: HOBBIES
Part: Language Focus
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ distinguish the clusters / pt /, / bd /,/ /ps / and / bz/ and pronounce them exactly
+ use cleft sentences ( subject focus, object focus, and adverbial focus) correctly and appropriately to
solve communicative tasks.
1. Vocabulary: The words with the clusters / pt /, / bd /,/ /ps / and / bz/ in: stopped, robbed, stops,
robs,…
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
2. Structure: Cleft sentences: subject focus, object focus, and adverbial focus
3. Procedures:
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
I. Warm- up (5ms)
-greets Ss
-has a short chat with Ss
II. Checking up Previous knowledge( no checking)
III. Content of the lesson (35ms)
• Pronunciation
-asks Ss to pronoun these words:
Stopped robbed stops robs
-gives feedback
-tells the aim of the task : the sounds / pt /, / bd /,/ /ps / and / bz/
-introduces some more in the text book
-has Ss listen and repeat the words
-calls some Ss to stand up and repeat
-helps Ss practice the sentences
-calls some Ss to stand up and practice them
-gives feedback
• Grammar
Revision and Exercises
I. A. Presentation 1: Cleft sentence with Subject focus
-asks Ss to look at the following sentence and comment on it :
The girl visited his parents last Sunday.
-> It was the girl who visited his parents last Sunday.
-tells the aim of the exercise : Cleft sentence with subject focus
-asks Ss to draw out the pattern:
It + be + Subject Focus + Clause
-gives another example in the textbook
B. Exercises 1:
-gives instructions” Write the following sentences in the same ways as the example”
-lets Ss do exercise 1 in 4 ms
-asks Ss to give their answers
-gives feedback
The keys:
34. It was the boy who visited his uncle last month.
35. It was my mother who bought me a present on my birthday.
36. It was Huong and Snadra who sang together at the party.
37. …
II. A. Presentation 2: Cleft sentence with Object focus
-asks Ss to look at the following sentence and comment on it :
The girl visited his parents last Sunday.
-> It was his parents that the boy visited last Sunday.
-tells the aim of the exercise : Cleft sentence with Object focus
-asks Ss to draw out the pattern:
It + be + Object Focus + Clause
-gives another example in the textbook
B. Exercises 2:
-gives instructions” Write the following sentences in the same ways as the example”
-lets Ss do exercise 1 in 4 ms
-asks Ss to give their answers
-gives feedback
The keys:
1. It is E.L that the man is learning.
• Self –evaluation:
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Date of teaching:
Period : 82
Unit 14: RECREATION
Part: Reading
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content : + To introduce Ss to the passage about recreation
+ To provide Ss with some new words relating to the topic
• Language function: + Reading the passage for specific information and guessing
meanings of the words in context
• Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
- develop their reading comprehension
- use the information they have read to discuss the related topic
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary: dull, pastime, snooker, dart, bricklaying, engrave, …
b) Grammar : no structure
2. Skills: Reading
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/ activities: pair work, group work, questions – answer, multiple choice
5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, pictures
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
n. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
+ Has a short chat with the Ss
b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson: (5ms)
-Calls on a student to come to the b/b and make complete sentences from the ones that they were
given last period
1. word / he / it / in / was / that / loved / sailing / the / most.
2. December / was / met / in / we / it / that / first.
3. John / it / window / today / was / the / that / broke.
4. scholarship / was / it / the / won / who / Lan.
-Gives feedback
The keys:
1. It was sailing that he loved most in the world. (Object focus )
2. It was in December that we first met. (Adverbial focus )
3. It was today that John broke the window. (Adverbial focus )
4. It was Lan who won the scholarship. (Subject focus )
• Presentation of the new material: (35ms
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Ti
me
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the
lesson
4ms
6ms
17ms
I. Lead-in
-divides Ss into small groups
-asks Ss to play game”
Competition game- Leisure
activities”
-gives instructions” look at the
pictures of leisure activities and
work out which activities is
described in each picture. Which
group finishes first and has the
biggest number of correct
answers will be the winner”
-conducts the game
-tells the aim of the lesson:
Recreation
II. Before you read
-asks Ss to look at the activities
above and guess which of these
leisure activities British people
often do in their free time
-gives feedback
-sets a situation:” You are going
to read a passage about leisure
activities British people often do
in their free time. And then you
do some tasks bellow”
-introduces some new words:
New words:
+ dull (a) : ( Synonym) = boring
+ pastime (n): leisure activities
+ snooker: (n) ( Translation)
+ pool (n) ( Translation)
+ dart: (n) ( Translation)
+ bricklaying (n): (Example)
+ engrave (v) ( Translation)
-checks understanding of the
new words
III. While you read
• Task 1
-asks Ss to read the passage
silently then do task 1
-gives instructions” the words/
phrases in italics in the
following sentences all appear
in the passage. Read the
sentences and go back to the
passage to locate and read
around the italicized words/
phrases so that you can guess
their meaning. Then read the
three choice given and work out
which one is the closed in
meaning to the words/ phrases”
-asks Ss to work individually to
do the task
-lets Ss do the task in 5 ms
-asks Ss to discuss their answers
-sit in group
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-play the game
-listen to the teacher
-look at the activities and
answer
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
-listen and guess the meaning
of the new words
-copy down the new words in
their note-books
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-work individually to do the
task in the allotted time
-discuss the answers
Unit 14:
RECREATION
Part: Reading
Content
New words:
+ dull (a) : = dull
+ pastime (n): leisure
activities
+ snooker: (n)
+ pool (n)
+ dart: (n)
+ bricklaying (n):
+ engrave (v)
• Task 1
The keys:
1. A
2. B
3. B
4. A
• Homework: (4ms)
Asks Ss to write in their notebooks:
+ learn the lesson well.
+ summarize the content of the reading passage
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare part: “Speaking”
• Self –evaluation:
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
Date of teaching:
Period : 83
Unit 14: RECREATION
Part: Speaking
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content : + To enable Ss to use appropriate language to about entertainment
activities
• Language function: + Expressing agreements and disagreements
• Educational aim : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ Express agreements and disagreements about entertainment activities
and stating the reasons
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary: old vocabulary
b) Grammar : no structures
2. Skills: Speaking
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/activities: pair work, group works, role- play
5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
k. Warm- up: Greets the Ss
l. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson: (5ms)
- Calls on one student to go to the b/b and asks him/ her to give these words in E.L
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
1. chạm trổ, khắc (engrave )
2. xây gạch (bricklaying)
3. đần độn, chậm hiểu (dull)
- Question: “ What are your leisure activities? Why do you like them”
(->It’s up to the Ss )
- Give feedback and marks
• Presentation of the new material: (34ms)
Tim
e
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the
lesson
5ms
9ms
I. Lead-in
-sets 2 situations and asks Ss
whether they agree or not and
state the reasons why:
S1. “Playing football is very good
for our health”
S2. “Only men can play the guitar”
-gives feedback
-tells the aim of the lesson:
Expressing agreements and
disagreements
II. Pre- Practice
• Task 1
-gives instructions
-asks Ss to work in pairs, read
the expressions and do task 1
-lets Ss do in 5 minutes
-asks Ss to give their answers
-gives feedback
-introduces some more
Agreements:
+ you are right
+ I agree…
+ I think so, too
+ that’s right, and
Disagreements:
+ well, maybe but…
+ that might be true,
but…
+ well, I don’t think
so, I think…
III. Practice
• Task 2 + 3
-reads through the conversation
-asks Ss t work in pairs and
practice it
-calls some pairs to practice in
front of the class
-gives feedback
-listen and answer
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-work in pairs and do the task
in the allotted time
-give their answers
-listen and answer
-listen and take notes
-listen to the teacher
-work in pairs and practice it
-practice in front of the class
-listen and answer
Unit 14:
RECREATION
Part: Speaking
Content
• Task 1
Agreements:
+ you are right
+ I agree…
+ I think so, too
+ that’s right, and
Disagreements:
+ well, maybe but…
+ that might be true,
but…
+ well, I don’t think so,
I think…
• Task 2 + 3
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
20ms
-asks Ss to work in groups to
continue the discussion
( when you discuss with your
groups members they have to
show their agreements and
disagreements and give the
reasons. You should use the
expressions give in the previous
activity)
-explains some new words if
necessary
-lets Ss do in 8 minutes
-goes around and offer help
• Task 4
-calls on the representative of
each group to come to the front
and report their discussion
-gives feedback
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-listen and take notes
-prepare the task in the allotted
time
-perform in front of the class
-listen and answer
1. Homework: (5ms)
Asks Ss to write in their note books
+ practice more at home
+ learn by heart the expressions
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare part: “Listening”
• Self –evaluation:
Date of teaching:
Period : 84
Unit 14: RECREATION
Part: Listening
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content: + To encourage Ss to listen to a monologue about camping
+ To help Ss practice listening
• Language function: Listening for specific and for detailed information
• Educational aim: At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ develop extensive listening skills
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
+ use the acquired language to talk about advantages of a camping holiday
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary : freestyle, gymnast, gymnasium…
b) Grammar : no structures
2. Skills: Listening- Speaking
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/activities: question-answer, True- False statements, discussions
5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, tape
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
c. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson: (5ms)
Calls on 2 students to stand up and practice again the conversation they learnt in
previous lesson
Give feedback
• Presentation of the new material: (35ms)
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Tim
e
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
6ms
6ms
I. Lead-in
-asks Ss to play game
“ Hangman”
-gives instructions” The rule is
each time T gives a secret word
and the groups will take turn to
guess it by telling what letters
they think there are in this word.
If Ss choose a letter that appears
one or more times in the secret
word, the letters and their
positions will be revealed and Ss
can keep on guessing the next
letter. On the other hand, if Ss
guess a letter that is not in the
secret word, then a piece of the
man being hanged will be added
to the gallows and they will lose
their turn to the other group. Ss
will get one point for each secret
letter they can guess correctly.
When the game is over, T will
count how many points each
group has and the group with
more points will be the winner”
The secret word: HOLIDAY
-conducts the game
-makes questions:
1. Where do you often spend your
holiday?
2. Whom do you often go
with?
3. How do you like it?
-gives feedback
-tells the topic of the lesson:
Camping holiday
II. Before you listen
-asks Ss :
1. Who are they in the
picture?
2. What are they doing?
3. Where are they?
4. What is the weather like?
-gives feedback
-lets Ss repeat the words
-introduces some new words
+ camping ground (n) area for
camping
+ trash (n): rubbish
+ wilderness (n): (Translation)
+ waterfalls (n): Cam Ly
waterfalls in Da Lat
+ depressed (a): ( Synonym): sad
+ solitude (a) state of being alone
+ dirt bike ( Translation)
-sets the situation: “You are
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-play the game
-listen and answer the
teacher’s questions
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
-listen and answer the
teacher’s questions
-listen and answer
-repeat the words
-listen and guess the meaning
of the new words and take
notes
-listen to the teacher
Unit 14:
RECREATION
Part: Listening
Content
New words:
+ camping ground (n) area
for camping
+ trash (n): rubbish
+ wilderness (n):
+ waterfalls (n): Cam Ly
waterfalls in Da Lat
+ depressed (a): sad
+ solitude (a) state of being
alone
+ dirt bike
• Task 1
The keys:
1. T
2. T
3. F
• Homework: (4ms)
Asks Ss to write in their notebooks:
+ list three advantages of a camping holiday and a write a paragraph about that
Asks Ss to prepare part: “Writing”
• Self –evaluation:
______________________________________________________________________________________
Date of teaching:
Period : 85
Unit 14: RECREATION
Part: Writing
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content: To provide Ss with practice writing about a camping holiday
• Language function: Practicing writing descriptions
• Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ describe a camping holiday
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary :
b) Grammar : past tenses
2. Skills: Writing
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/activities: explanation, question- answer, brainstorming
5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, pare board
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
l. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson:(no checking because the teacher wants to save time
So that Ss can have more time to practise writing)
• Presentation of the new material: (39ms)
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson
4ms
8ms
20ms
I. Warm up
-divides SS into 2 groups
-asks Ss to pay game
“ Competition- game”- “ What
should be prepared for a
camping trip?”
-explains the activity:” Image
that your class is going to Hoan
Lap Lake for a camping for 2
days. Discuss and work out the
things you should prepare for
the camping trip. After 3
minutes, which groups has the
most suitable things will be the
winner” .
Expected answers:
Things to bring: food, drinks,
tent, shovel, blanket,
whistle, compass, …
-tells the aim of the lesson:
Describing a camping holiday
II. Pre-Writing
-asks Ss to look at the picture
and guess the activities
-gives feedback
-asks Ss to do task 1: Match the
activities with the pictures
-asks Ss to give their answers
The keys:
1. g 2. a 3. b 4. c 5. f
6. d 7. h 8. i 9. e
III. While-writing
-gives instructions (in the text
book)
-asks Ss to work in groups to
brainstorm the ideas of the
writing
-summarizes the main points
+ Introduction: Write 1/2
sentences about the time and
place of the camping trip
+ Body: Describe the camping
trip in details: the time they
set up, what activities they
did, and the time they came
back from the campground
+ Conclusion: write about their
feeling of the trip
-reminds Ss of the verb tenses
(the past tenses)
-lets Ss do the task in 15 ms
-goes around to observe and
offer help
IV. Post writing
-brainstorm and write down
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
-look at the picture and
guess the activities
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-give their answers
-listen and take notes
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
- work in groups to
brainstorm the ideas of the
writing
-listen and take notes
-
do the task in the allotted
time
-hand in the paper sheets
Unit 14:
RECREATION
Part: Writing
Content
Describing a camping holiday
• Tasks 1
The keys:
1. g 2. a 3. b 4. c 5. f
6. d 7. h 8. i 9. e
• Homework: (5ms)
Asks Ss to correct the mistakes and write the complete paragraph in their note books
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare par: “Language Focus”
• Self –evaluation:
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
Sample Writing:
Last week our class went to Ba Vi for a two-day camping holiday. Our bus left the school
very early, at 5 a.m on Saturday morning so
that we could have more time to play. When we arrived at the campground, we quickly put up the
two big umbrella tents. After that some of us went around to watch wildlife in the forest. Some of
our classmates who had been in the place before went swimming in the lake. At around 10 a.m,
we gathered near the tent and cooked our food over the open fire. After lunch, we had a short rest.
At about 3 p.m , we went fishing in the hope that we could catch some fish for our dinner. Luckily,
we caught three big fishes. We cooked and had dinner together happily. After that, we put up a big
fire to prepare for the evening activities. We sang and danced around the camp fire. At 11 p.m, we
went to sleep in the tents. The boys slept in the blue tent, and the girls stayed in the red one. We
all slept soundly. The next morning, we woke up early. After a light breakfast, we organized some
games with funny and surprising prizes. After lunch, some of us went around the place while
others took a nap in the tents. We got on the bus to leave the campsite at 4 p.m on Sunday
afternoon.
The camping trip has had a great impression on us. After the trip, our classmates seem to
understand more about one another. We hope we can have another chance to go camping again.
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Date of teaching:
Period : 86
Unit 14: RECREATION
Part: Language Focus
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ distinguish the sounds / ts /, / dz / , / t t / and / d d / and pronounce them exactly
+ use “ both… and, not only … but also, either … or, neither … nor” and “cleft sentences
in passive” correctly to do the exercises and appropriately to solve communicative tasks.
1. Vocabulary: The words with the sounds / ts /, / dz / , / t t / and / d d /: sits, reads, watched,
bridged,…
2. Structure: + both… and, not only … but also, either … or, neither … nor
+ cleft sentences in passive”
3. Procedures:
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
I. Warm- up (5ms)
-greets Ss
-has a short chat with Ss
II. Checking up Previous knowledge( no checking)
III. Content of the lesson (35ms)
• Pronunciation
-writes these words on the b/b, and asks Ss to read them aloud:
lots friends pitched managed
/ ts / / dz / / t t / / d d /
-asks Ss to give words with the sounds / ts /, / dz / , / t t / and / d d / as much as possible
-has Ss read aloud the words
-tells the aim of the task : the sounds / ts /, / dz / , / t t / and / d d /
-introduces some more in the text book
-has Ss listen and repeat the words
-calls some Ss to stand up and repeat
-helps Ss practice the sentences
-calls some Ss to stand up and practice them
-gives feedback
• Grammar
Revision and Exercises
I. A. Revision 1: both… and, either … or, neither … nor
-asks Ss to rewrite this sentence into another ways:
1. Tom likes apples and Mary likes apples, too.
2. Tom doesn’t like apples. Mary doesn’t like apples, too.
-gives feedback
The keys:
1. Both Tom and Mary like apples.
Or: Not only Tom but also Mary likes apples.
2. Neither Tom nor Mary likes apples.
-asks Ss to give any comments on the two sentences
NOTES: Correlative Conjunctions
Not only …………….but also
Either ……………….or -> The verb will agree with the second subject
Neither ………………nor
Eg: Neither Tom nor the boys like music
Neither the boys nor Tom likes music
-gives another example in the textbook
B. Exercises 1:
-gives instructions” Combine the following sentences using Both … and, either … or, neither … nor”
-lets Ss do exercise 1 in 4 ms
-asks Ss to give their answers
-gives feedback
The keys:
38. Both Jim and Carol are on holiday
39. George neither smokes nor drinks
40. Neither Jim nor Carol has (got) a car.
41. …
II. A. Revision 2 Cleft sentences in the passive
-asks Ss to change into cleft sentence
• Self –evaluation:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Date of teaching:
Period : 94
Unit 16: THE WONDERS OF THE WORLD
Part: Reading
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content : + To introduce Ss to the passage about the wonder of the world
+ To provide Ss with some new words relating to the topic
• Language function: + Reading the passage for specific ideals and identifying meaning
in
context
• Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
- develop their reading comprehension
- use the information they have read to discuss the related topic
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary: treasures, belongings, proceed, …
b) Grammar : no structure
2. Skills: Reading
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/ activities: pair work, group work, questions – answer, gap- filling
5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, pictures
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
o. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
+ Has a short chat with the Ss
b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson: (5ms)
- Asks Ss to complete the following tag questions
1. You can’t answer all the questions,……………?
2. He believes you, ………………?
3. You won’t tell him, ………………?
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
4. The boy didn’t know the lesson, ………………?
- Gives feedback and marks:
1. can you
2. doesn’t he
3. Will you
4. did he
• Presentation of the new material: (35ms)
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Ti
me
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the
lesson
4ms
6ms
17ms
I. Lead-in
-asks Ss to match the
pictures with their names
P1: Great Wall
P2: Pyramids of Egypt
P3:Statue of Liberty
P4: Eiffel Tower
P5: Taj Mahal
-asks Ss to tell some
information about them
-gives feedback
-tells the aim of the lesson:
The wonders of the world
II. Before you read
-sets a situation:” You are going
to read about Pyramid of Giza .
And then you do some tasks
bellow”
-introduces some new words:
New words:
+ treasures (n) : ( Translation)
+ belongings (n):
( Translation) + proceed (v) (
Synonym): progress
+ surpass (v): ( Translation)
+ propose (v): make
suggestion
+ enclose (v) surround or shut
in sth
-checks understanding of the
new words
III. While you read
• Task 1
-asks Ss to read the passage
silently then do task 1
-gives instructions” read
through the sentences and identify
part of speech of the words to fill
in each blank. Then choose the
most suitable word from the box to
fill in the blank, paying attention
to their right form”
-asks Ss to work individually
-look at the picture and
answer
-answer the teacher
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
-listen and guess the
meaning of the new words
-copy down the new words
in their note-books
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
Unit 16:
THE WONDERS OF
THE WORLD
Part: Reading
Content
New words:
+ treasures (n) :
+ belongings (n):
+ proceed (v) ( Synonym):
progress
+ surpass (v):
+ propose (v): make
suggestion
+ enclose (v) surround or
shut in sth
• Task 1
The keys:
1. tomb
2. wonder
3. ramp
4. chamber
• Homework: (4ms)
Asks Ss to write in their notebooks:
+ learn the lesson well.
+ List the wonders of the world they know and tell which one they like to visit and give
the reason why
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare part: “Speaking”
• Self –evaluation:
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
Date of teaching:
Period : 95
Unit 16: THE WONDERS OF THE WORLD
Part: Speaking
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content : + To enable Ss to use appropriate language to talk about the
wonders of the world
• Language function: + Using facts and opinions to talk about features of man- made
places
• Educational aim : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ Distinguish facts and opinions
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
+ Using facts and opinions to talk about features of man- made places
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary:
b) Grammar :
2. Skills: Speaking
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/activities: pair work, group works, question- answer
5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
m. Warm- up: Greets the Ss
n. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson: (5ms)
- Calls on one student to go to the b/b and asks him/ her to give these words in E.L
1. huyền bí (mysterious )
2. hình xoắn ốc (spiral)
3. của cải (treasures)
- Question: 1. Where is the Great Pyramid of Giza situated?
2. How high was it?
3. What was the purpose of this huge stone pyramid?
-> 1. It is situated on the west bank of the River Nile.
-> 2. 147 m
-> It was to serve as a tomb when Khufu died and to protect the burial chamber from the
weather and from thieves, who might try to steal the treasures and belongings there.
- Give feedback and marks
• Presentation of the new material: (34ms)
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Tim
e
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the
lesson
2ms
12ms
I. Lead-in
-tells the aim of the lesson:
Talking about the Great
Pyramid of Giza
II. Pre- Practice
• Task 1
-listen to the teacher
Unit 16:
THE WONDERS
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
20ms
-gives instructions( in the text
book)
-asks Ss to work in pairs to
decide which sentences
express facts and which ones
express opinions
-lets Ss do in 5 minutes
-calls out some pairs to stand
up ask and answer
-gives feedback
Answers:
Facts: sentences: 2, 3, 4
Opinions: sentences: 1, 5, 6, 7
III. Practice
• Task 2
-gives instructions” work in
pairs to tell your partner about
some facts and opinions of the
Great Pyramid, using the
information in task 1”
-lets Ss do in 8 minutes
-goes around and offer help
-calls on some pairs to
perform in front of the class
-gives feedback
• Task 3
-gives instructions” work in
groups to discuss possible answers
to the questions on page 181”
-introduces some useful
languages (in the textbook)
-gives examples
-lets Ss do in 8 minutes
-goes around and offer help
-calls on the representatives
to present their opinions. The
groups with the greatest
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-work in pairs and do the
task in the allotted time
-stand up ask and answer
-listen and answer
-listen and take notes
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-prepare the task in the
allotted time
-perform in front of the class
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-listen and take notes
-prepare the task in the
allotted time
OF THE WORLD
Part: Speaking
Content
• Task 1
Answers:
Facts: sentences: 2, 3, 4
Opinions: sentences: 1, 5, 6, 7
• Task 2
• Task 3
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
opinions will be the winner
-gives feedback -present in front of the class
-listen and answer
• Homework: (5ms)
Asks Ss to write in their note books
+ practice more at home
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare part: “Listening”
• Self –evaluation:
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Date of teaching:
Period : 96
Unit 16: THE WONDERS OF THE WORLD
Part: Listening
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content: + To encourage Ss to listen to a monologue about The Great Wall of
China
+ To help Ss practice listening
• Language function: Listening for specific and for detailed information
• Educational aim: At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ develop extensive listening skills for specific information and
taking notes
while listening
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary : magnificence , significance, ancient, …
b) Grammar : no structures
2. Skills: Listening- Speaking
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/activities: question-answer, gap- filling, discussions
5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, tape
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
d. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson: (5ms)
Asks Ss to give their own ideas about the Great Pyramid of Giza
Give feedback
• Presentation of the new material: (35ms)
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Ti
me
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the
lesson
6ms
6ms
15ms
I. Lead-in
-asks Ss to look at the
pictures in the textbook and
answer the questions below
-asks Ss to give their answers
-gives feedback
-tells the aim of the lesson:
Listen to a passage about The
Great Wall of China
II. Before you listen
-lets Ss repeat the words
-introduces some new words
+ magnificence (n)
(Translation)
+ World Heritage (n):
(Translation)
+ significance (n)
(Translation)
+ visible (a):able to be seen
+ wind (v): (Translation)
+ ancient (a): very old
-sets the situation: “You are
going to listen to a passage about
The Great Wall of China and do
some tasks below”
III. While you listen
• Task 1
-gives instructions ““read
through the table of information
to understand and carefully, and
decide what kind of information
and what part of speech of the
word or expression to fill in each
blank”
-explains some new words if
any
-plays the tape the first time
-asks Ss to give their answers
-plays the tape the second
time to check their answers
-gives feedback
The key:
-look at the pictures and
answer the questions below
-give their answers
-listen and answer
-listen to the teacher
-repeat the words
-listen and guess the
meaning of the new words
and take notes
-listen to the teacher
-read the statements in
task 1
-listen and take notes
-listen to the tape and do
the task
-give their answers
Unit 16:
THE WONDERS
OF THE WORLD
Part: Listening
Content
New words:
+ magnificence (n)
+ World Heritage (n):
+ significance
+ visible (a):able to be seen
+ wind (v):
+ ancient (a): very old
• Task 1
The keys:
1. moon
2. 1987
3. Ming Dynasty
4. 200
5. 200 B.C
6. 6,000km
7. 11 meters
8. stones
• Homework: (4ms)
Asks Ss to write in their notebooks:
+ write a paragraph about The Great Wall of China from the listening passage
Asks Ss to prepare part: “Writing”
• Self –evaluation:
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Date of teaching:
Period : 97
Unit 16: THE WONDERS OF THE WORLD
Part: Writing
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• Language content: To provide Ss with practice writing a report on a man- made place
• Language function: Practicing writing a report on a man- made place
• Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ define the format and structure of a report to a place
+ write a report on a man- made place
1. Language:
a) Vocabulary: dedicate to, sandstone, throne,…
b) Grammar : present and past tenses
2. Skills: Writing
3. Method: Communicative approach
4. Techniques/activities: explanation, question- answer, brainstorming
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, pare board
6. Procedures:
• Stabilization: (1m)
m. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss
b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance
• Checking up previous lesson:(no checking because the teacher wants to save
time
So that Ss can have more time to practise writing)
• Presentation of the new material: (39ms)
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Time Teacher’s activities Students’
activities
The content of the
lesson
4ms
8ms
I. Warm up
-divides Ss into 4 groups
-asks Ss to play
“competition game”
-gives instructions” List as
many words/ phrases about places
in Nha Trang as possible in 2
minutes. Which group having the
most correct words will be the
winner”
-conducts the game
Suggested answers:



-tells the aim of the lesson:
Writing a report on a man-
made place
II. Pre-Writing
-sets a situation” you are going
to write a report on a visit to the
Ponagar Cham Tower in Nha
Trang”
-gives instructions” Below are
some notes made by a visitor to the
Ponagar Cham Tower in Nha
Trang, use his/ her notes to write
a report on the visit”
-teaches some new words
+ dedicate (v) to:
+ sandstone (n)
+ throne (n)
-helps Ss to work out the
organization of the report on
+ Introduction: general information about
the place
+ Details: the special features, of the
place in detail
+ summary of the visit: how long our visit
lasts and our feeling about the visit
-notes the Ss about the
tenses
+ The past simple: an event
that happened and finished in
the past
+ The present simple: is used
-sit ingroups
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-play the game
-listen to the teacher
-listen to the teacher
-listen to the teacher’s
instructions
-listen and guess the
meaning of the new
words
-do the task in the allotted
time
-give their answers
Unit 16:
THE WONDERS
OF THE WORLD
Part: Writing
Content
Writing a biography
New words
+ dedicate (v) to:
+ sandstone (n)
+ throne (n)
+ Introduction: general information
about the place
+ Details: the special features, of the
place in detail
+ summary of the visit: how long our
visit lasts and our feeling about the
visit
+ The past simple: an event
that happened and finished
in the past
+ The present simple: is
used to describe facts
+ The passive voice is used
occasionally in the report
• Homework: (5ms)
Asks Ss to correct the mistakes and write the complete paragraph in their note books
• Preparation for the next lesson:
Asks Ss to prepare par: “Language Focus”
• Self –evaluation:
Sample Writing:
Last year I had a brief tour to Ponagar Cham Towers. This Tower complex is one of the
most beautiful examples of Cham architecture in central Vietnam.
The Ponagar Cham Towers consist of 4 towers. They are located on Cu Lao Marble Hill, 2
km north of Nha Trang. They were built between the 8th
and 13th
centuries. Each tower is delicated
to a different god. The largest one was built in honour of Lady Thien Y. The 22,5 m tower contains
her sandstone statue sitting on Buddha’s throne. The 2,6 m statue had 10 hands; each is holding
an object illustrating the power of Buddha.
The tour to Ponagar Cham Tower lasted 5 hours. IT was tiring but enjoyable and
memorable
________________________________________________________________________________________________
Date of teaching:
Period : 98
Unit 16: THE WONDERS OF THE WORLD
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Part: Language Focus
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
• At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
+ distinguish the sounds / ft /, / vd / , / fs / and / vz / and pronounce them exactly
+ use the structure “ It is said that….” and “People say that…….” correctly to do the exercises
and appropriately to solve communicative tasks.
1. Vocabulary: The words with the sounds / ft /, / vd / , / fs / and / vz /: gift, loved, roofs, loves
2. Structure: + “ It is said that….”
+ “People say that…….”
3. Procedures:
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
I. Warm- up (5ms)
-greets Ss
-has a short chat with Ss
II. Checking up Previous knowledge( no checking)
III. Content of the lesson (35ms)
• Pronunciation
-writes these words on the b/b, and asks Ss to read them aloud:
gift loved laughs loves
/ ft / / vd / / fs / / vz /
-asks Ss to give words with the sounds / ft /, / vd / , / fs / and / vz / as much as possible
-has Ss read aloud the words
-tells the aim of the task : the sounds / ft /, / vd / , / fs / and / vz /
-introduces some more in the text book
-has Ss listen and repeat the words
-calls some Ss to stand up and repeat
-helps Ss practice the sentences
-calls some Ss to stand up and practice them
-gives feedback
• Grammar
Revision and Exercises
A. Revision: + “ It is said that….”
+ “People say that…….”
-helps Ss to revise the special passive structure” “ It is said that….” and “People say
that…….”
-asks Ss to change into the passive voice
People say that he is a good student.
-gives feedback
-> It is said that he is a good student.
-> He is said to be a good student.
-introduces the structures:
People/ they + Verb (think, say, suppose, believe, consider, report, …) that +
clause
-> It is + thought , said, supposed, ………that + clause ( original
sentence)
-> Subject2 + to be + thought , said, supposed, …
a. V2 : simple
present : To- inf
b. V2 : simple past
or present
perfect :
To have + P.P
c. V2 : present
• Self –evaluation:
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong

Giao an 11

  • 1.
    Unit 1: Friendship. Date of teaching: Period : 03 Unit 1: FRIENDSHIP Part: Reading AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content : + To introduce Ss to the passage about friendship + To provide Ss with some new words relating to the topic • Language function: + Reading the passage for gist and for specific information + Expressing their ideas about friendship • Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: - to develop their reading comprehension - aware of the importance of friends in their life 1. Language: a) Vocabulary: unselfishness, loyalty, constancy… b) Grammar : no structure 2. Skills: Reading 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/ activities: question- answer, multiple choice, gap-fill, discussion 5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, pictures 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) a. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss + Has a short chat with the Ss b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson: (no checking) • Presentation of the new material: (40ms) Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 2.
    Unit 1: Friendship. Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 4ms 8ms 20ms I. Lead-in -sets a situation:” When you have happiness or sadness, who do you often share with?” -makes some questions: 1. Do you have many friends? 2. What do you think about a true friend? 3.What qualities/ conditions to have a true friendship? -gives feedback -tells the aim of the lesson: Friendship II. Before you read -asks Ss to tell the qualities of true friendship, then teaches new words Teach word by word following the principle and steps of teaching words New words: + selfish (a): # unselfish (a) -> selfishness (n) # unselfishness (n) + constant (a) –constancy (n) + loyal (a) – loyalty (n) + trust (n) + sympathy (n) -checks understanding of the new words III. While you read -asks Ss to read the passage and do the tasks below • Task 2 -asks Ss to read the reading and do task 2 -lets Ss do the task in 2 ms -asks Ss to give their answer- gives feedback The keys: B. (Conditions of true friendship) • Task 1 -gives instructions -explains the words in the box -asks Ss to do the task -lets Ss do the task in 3 ms -asks Ss to give their answers -look at the pictures ( in the textbook) -listen and answer the teacher’s questions -listen and answer -listen to the teacher -listen to the teacher and answer -listen and guess the meaning of the new words -copy down the new words in their note-books -listen and answer - read the passage and do the tasks -reread the reading and do the task -do the task in the allotted time -give their answer -listen and answer -listen to the teacher’s instructions and take notes -do the task in the allotted time -give their answers -listen and answer -copy down the answers in their note-books Unit 1: FRIENDSHIP Part: Reading Content New words: + selfish (a): # unselfish (a) -> selfishness (n) # unselfishness (n) + constant (a) –constancy (n) + loyal (a) – loyalty (n) + trust (n) + sympathy (n) • Task 2 The keys: B. (Conditions of true friendship) • Task 1 The keys: 1. mutual 2. incapable of 3. unselfish 4. acquaintance/ friend 5. give – take 6. loyal to 7. suspicious
  • 3.
    Unit 1: Friendship. • Homework: (4ms) Asks Ss to write in their notebooks: + learn the lesson well. + talk about your best friend • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare part: “Speaking” • Self –evaluation: ________________________________________________________________________________________ Date of teaching: Period : 04 Unit 1: FRIENDSHIP Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 4.
    Unit 1: Friendship. Part: Speaking AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content : + To practice describing people’ physical characteristics and personalities + To provide Ss with some Adjs and expressions used to describe people’ physical characteristics and personalities • Language function: + Asking and answering about a famous friend • Educational aim : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + describe people’ physical characteristics and personalities, using appropriate adjectives 1. Language: a) Vocabulary: Adjs and expressions used to describe physical characteristics and personalities b) Grammar : 2. Skills: Speaking 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/activities: pair work, role-play 5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, pictures 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) a. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson: (5ms) + Asks Ss to write the new words about qualities + Asks Ss some questions about friendship + Gives feedback and marks • Presentation of the new material: (35ms) Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 4ms 6ms 25ms I. Lead-in -shows out the picture and ask Ss to describe the girl -gives feedback -tells the aim of the lesson: Describing people II. Pre-practice -hangs the chart in which there are some words used to describe people’s physical characteristics -has Ss to take notes III. Controlled-practice • Task 1 -asks Ss to look at the pictures in their book -asks Ss to work in pairs and describe them -lets Ss do the task in 5 ms -look at the picture and describe -listen and answer -listen to the teacher -look at the chart on the b/b -take notes in their note books -look at the pictures in their book -work in pairs and describe the people in the pictures -do the task in the allotted time -stand up and perform Unit 1: FRIENDSHIP Part: Speaking Content Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 5.
    Unit 1: Friendship. -calls on some Ss to stand up and perform -gives feedback • Task 2 -asks Ss to look at the list of Adjs in task 2 -helps Ss understand the some new words -asks Ss “Which of these personalities is the most important in friendship? Why?” -gives feedback -asks Ss to work in groups and do task 2 -lets Ss do in 5 minutes -goes around to offer help -calls on one/two leader to stand up and report their discussion -gives feedback • Task 3 -sets the situation (in the textbook) and gives instructions -helps Ss master the questions with the suggestions -provides Ss with some words/ word phrases in “Useful language” -asks Ss to work in pairs and play the roles -lets Ss to discuss in 8 minutes -asks some pairs to perform their interview -gives feedback -listen and answer -look at the list of Adjs in task 2 -listen and guess the meaning of the new words and take notes -listen and answer the teacher’s question -work in groups and do the task -do the task in the allotted time -stand up and report -listen and answer -listen to the teacher’s instructions -listen and take notes in their note books -work in pairs and take the roles -do the task in the allotted time -stand up ask and perform -listen and answer • Task 1 • Task 2 • Task 3 • Homework: (4ms) Asks Ss to write in their notebooks: + learn the lesson well. + tell your classmates about one of your friend that you admire him /her. • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare part: “Listening” • Self –evaluation: The chart: ________________________________________________________________________________________ Describing people’s appearance Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 6.
    Unit 1: Friendship. Height Tall, medium, short Build Slim, plump(buï baãm, ñaày ñaën), overweight, thin, well-built(löïc löôõng), normal build Hair + Length: long, short, shoulder- length + Style: straight, wavy, curly, crew- cut + Colour: black, grey, red, brown Others: a fringe(maùi), a bun( buùi toùc), plait( ñuoâi sam)(to wear one’s hair in a bun/ a plait/ plaits) Face Oval, round, large, square, skinny(gầy trô xöông), chubby (phuùng phính), long, with high cheekbones Eyes Small, big, black, brown, blue Nose Straight, crooked, big, small, flat(teït) Chin Pointed chin, double chin Lips Thin, full, narrow, heart- shaped Forehead Broad, high Skin White, pale, suntanned, dark, brown, black A smooth complexion/ pale complexion/ dark complexion/ clear skin/ greasy skin(da nhôøn) General appearance Beautiful(women/ girl), handsome(men), pretty( women/ girl), good- looking( men and women), plain Age She was in her late teens(18,19 years old), he was in his early twenties( 21- 23), she was about thirty years old, … Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 7.
    Unit 1: Friendship. ________________________________________________________________________________________________ Date of teaching: Period : 05 Unit 1: FRIENDSHIP Part: Listening AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content: + To encourage Ss to listen to a talk about one’s best friends + To help Ss practice listening • Language function: Talking about a best friend • Educational aim: At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + Listen to a monologue for specific information + have chances to talk about their best friends 1. Language: a) Vocabulary: apartment building, sense of humour , … b) Grammar : no structures 2. Skills: Listening- Speaking 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/activities: group work, question-answer, T- F statement, discussion 5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, tape 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) a. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson: (5ms) -Calls two Ss to stand up and talk about his/ her best friend -Gives feedback and marks • Presentation of the new material: (35ms) Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 8.
    Unit 1: Friendship. Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 6ms 8ms 15ms I. Lead-in -asks Ss to close their books -divides Ss into two groups -gives instructions” Ss go to the b/b and write down words describing people’s physical characteristics and personalities as much as possible in 3 ms. Which groups has the most correct words will be the winner.” -conducts the game -makes some questions 1. .Have you got a best friend? 2. What qualities do you admire him/ her? -gives feedback -tells the aim of the lesson: Talking about a best friend II. Before you listen -asks Ss to work in pairs , ask and answer the questions -calls on some pairs to stand up and perform -gives feedback -lets Ss repeat the words -introduces some new words + apartment building + sense of humour -sets the situation: “You will listen to Lan and Long talk about their best friends“ III. While you listen • Task 1 -asks Ss to read the information in task 1 in 2ms -asks Ss to guess the answers -gives feedback -plays the tape the first time -asks Ss to give their answers -plays the tape again -gives feedback The key: Lan’s talk 1. F 2. F 3. T 4. F 5. T 6. F Long’s talk 1. F 2. F 3. T 4.T 5. T • Task 2 -asks Ss to reread the information in task 1 again -close their books -sit in groups -listen to the teacher’s instructions -play the game -listen and answer the teacher’s questions -listen and answer -listen to the teacher -work in pairs , ask and answer the questions -stand up and perform -listen and answer -repeat the words listen and guess the meaning of the new words and take notes -listen to the teacher -the information in task 1 in 2ms -guess the answers -listen and answer -listen to the tape and do the task -give their answers -listen and answer -reread the information in task 1 again -guess the answers -listen to the tape and do the task Unit 1: FRIENDSHIP Part: Listening Content New words: + apartment building + sense of humour • Task 1 The keys: LAN’s talk 1. F 2. F 3. T 4. F 5. T 6. F Long’s talk 1. F 2. F 3. T 4.T 5. T
  • 9.
    Unit 1: Friendship. • Homework: (4ms) Asks Ss to write in their notebooks: + learn the lesson well. + write a short paragraph (100 words) about your best friend • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare part: “Writing” • Self –evaluation: ________________________________________________________________________________________ Date of teaching: Period : 06 Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 10.
    Unit 1: Friendship. Unit 1: FRIENDSHIP Part: Writing AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content: To help Ss write about a friend, real or imaginary • Language function: Practicing writing about a friend, real or imaginary • Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: write about a friend, real or imaginary using the words and expressions that they’ve learned in previous lesson 1. Language: a) Vocabulary: ( review) the words and expressions about physical characteristics and personalities b) Grammar : ( review) the past simple and the simple present tense 2. Skills: Writing 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/activities: brainstorming, discussion 5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, pare board 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) a. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson:(5ms) Asks Ss to talk about how Ha and Minh have been Lan’s and Long’s best friends Gives feedback and marks • Presentation of the new material: (36ms) Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 5ms I. Warm up -asks Ss to play game” Guessing game” -gives instructions” One student goes to the b/b and T gives her/ him a piece of paper with the name of one student in the class. Others have to ask Yes/ No questions to find out who he is- (Ss should ask about the appearance, personalities or clothes…)” Eg: Is the person the boy/ girl? Is he/ she tall/ short? … (The game continues until the time is up) -conducts the game -tells the aim of the lesson: Writing -listen to the teacher -listen to the teacher’s instructions -play the game - listen to the teacher Unit 1: FRIENDSHIP Part: Writing Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 11.
    Unit 1: Friendship. 10ms 15ms 6ms about a friend, real or imaginary II. Pre-Writing • Task 1 -asks Ss to tell what they want to know about when they write about a friend -gives feedback ( Name, age, home address, when and where first met, his/ her personalities, physical characteristics, what you like about him /her) -divides Ss into 3 groups -gives some pieces of papers having the table below Where/ when first met Physical characteristics Persona lities -lets Ss discuss in 3 ms -hangs the chart on the b/b -gives feedback( adds some more if necessary) -provides Ss with some structures and an outline + We first met at / when … + We have a lot in common … + What I like most about him/ her is / that … -calls on one good student to stand up and asks him/ her about his/ her friend basing on the outline to get the answers as a model III. While-writing -ask Ss to work individually and write about their friend/ real or imaginary basing on the outline -lets Ss do the task in 15 ms -goes around to observe and offer help IV. Post writing -asks Ss to change their paperboards & check each other -selects some to hang on the b/b -has Ss correct their friends’ -listen and answer -listen and answer -sit in groups -get the papers -do the task in the allotted time -look at the b/b -listen and answer -listen to the teacher and take notes - stand up and answer -listen to the teacher’s instructions -do the task in the allotted time -change their papers to check each other -look at their friends’ work Content Writing about a friend, real or imaginary + Name(sex) + Age + home address + when and where first met his/ her personalities + physical characteristics + what you like about him /her Suggestions: + We first met at / when … + We have a lot in common … + What I like most about him/ her is / that … Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 12.
    Unit 1: Friendship. mistakes on the b/b -gives feedback correct their friends’ mistakes -listen and answer • Homework: (3ms) Asks Ss to correct the mistakes and write in their note books • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare par: “Language Focus” • Self –evaluation: ______________________________________________________________________ Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 13.
    Unit 1: Friendship. Date of teaching: Period : 07 Unit 1: FRIENDSHIP Part: Language Focus AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + distinguish the sounds /d / and /t / and pronounce them exactly + use some structures containing Inf with and without To appropriately 1. Vocabulary: + the words the sounds /d / and /t / in: jam, changeable … + Inf with To/ Inf without To 2. Structure: no structures 3. Procedures: Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 14.
    Unit 1: Friendship. Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong I. Warm- up (5ms) -greets Ss -has a short chat with Ss II. Checking up Previous knowledge ( no checking because the lesson is long) III. Content of the lesson (35ms) • Pronunciation (10ms) -asks Ss how to pronoun these words: enjoy, bridge , cheap, which -gives feedback -tells the aim of the lesson : practice the sounds /d / and /t / in a single word and practise them in sentences -introduces some more in the text book -has Ss listen and repeat the words -calls some Ss to stand up and repeat -helps Ss practice the dialogue containing the target sounds -calls some pairs to stand up and practice -gives feedback • Grammar (25ms) Presentation and Exercises I. A. Presentation 1 : To Inf -asks Ss to give some Verbs followed by To inf -gives feedback -tells the aim of the exercise 1: To Inf -presents the language: To infinitives are used: 1. After “ have, decide, want, hope, promise …” 2. Expressing purpose Why are you learning E.l” -> To get a good job 3. After “ Something, nothing, anything, nowhere, anybody…” 4. Too Adj + To Inf Adj enough + To-inf -gives other examples in the text book B. Exercise 1: -gives instructions -lets Ss do exercise 1 in 3 ms -asks Ss to give their answers -gives feedback The keys: 1. Who wants to eat something? 2. I have some letters to write 3. … II. A. Presentation 2 : Bare Inf -asks Ss to tell some verbs followed by Bare Inf -gives feedback -tell the aim of ex 2: Inf without To -presents the language + After “ let, make” + After perception Verbs” see, hear, watch, feel…” -gives examples in the textbook B. Exercise 2: -gives instructions -asks Ss to do the same with Ex2 in 4 ms
  • 15.
    Unit 1: Friendship. • Self –evaluation: Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 16.
    Unit 1: Friendship. Date of teaching: Period : 08 Unit 2: PERSONAL EXPERIENCES Part: Reading AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content : + To introduce Ss to the passage about personal experiences + To provide Ss with some new words relating to the topic • Language function: + Reading the passage for gist and for specific information • Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: - to develop their reading comprehension - draw out their own experiences in their own life 1. Language: a) Vocabulary: idol, glance, sneaky, … b) Grammar : no structure 2. Skills: Reading 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/ activities: question- answer, gap-fill, discussion 5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, pictures 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) b. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss + Has a short chat with the Ss b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson: (no checking) • Presentation of the new material: (40ms) Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 17.
    Unit 1: Friendship. Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong Tim e Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 4ms 8ms 20ms I. Lead-in -asks Ss to play game” Hangman” -gives instructions -conducts the game The key: Embarrassing -makes a question” Have you ever been in an embarrassing situation?” -gives feedback -tells the aim of the lesson: An embarrassing situation II. Before you read -asks Ss to look at the pictures in their book and guess what is happening in each of them -gives feedback -tells the aim of the reading: the story about the most embarrassing experience of the girl -introduces some new words: New words: + idol (n) (Example) + glance (v) + at (Mime) + sneaky (a) (Translation) -> sneaky look + make a fuss ( Translation) -checks understanding of the new words(by asking Ss to do task 1) III. While you read • Task 2 -asks Ss to work in pairs, read the passage and put the pictures in the order of the story -lets Ss do the task in 5 ms -asks Ss to give their answers -gives feedback The keys: 1.d 2. b 3. f 4. e 5. a 6. c • Task 1 -gives instructions -lets Ss do the task in 3 ms -asks Ss to give their answers -gives feedback The keys: 1. glanced 2. making a fuss 3. embarrassing -listen to the teacher’s instructions -play the game -listen and answer the teacher’s questions -listen and answer -listen to the teacher -look at the pictures in their book and guess what is happening in each of the picture -listen to the teacher -listen and guess the meaning of the new words -copy down the new words in their note-books -listen and answer -work in pairs, read the passage and put the pictures in the order of the story -do the task in the allotted time -give their answers -listen and answer -copy down the answers in their note-books -listen to the teacher’s instructions -do the task in the allotted time -give their answers -listen and answer -copy down the answers in their notebooks Unit 2: PERSONAL EXPERIENCES Part: Reading Content New words: + idol (n) + glance (v) + at + sneaky (a) -> sneaky look + make a fuss • Task 2 The keys: 1.d 2. b 3. f 4. e 5. a 6. c
  • 18.
    Unit 1: Friendship. • Homework: (4ms) Asks Ss to write in their notebooks: + learn the lesson well. + write a short paragraph about one of the most experiences in your daily life • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare part: “Speaking” • Self –evaluation: _________________________________________________________ Date of teaching: Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 19.
    Unit 1: Friendship. Period : 09 Unit 2: PERSONAL EXPERIENCES Part: Speaking AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content : + To introduce Ss to some useful structures used to talk about the past experiences + To enable Ss to use the past tenses to talk about the past experiences • Language function: + Talking about the past experiences • Educational aim : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + use the structures to talk about a past experiences and how it affect their life 1. Language: a) Vocabulary: old Vocabulary b) Grammar : Revise: + The present perfect + The past simple + Make + O + Adj / V bare inf 2. Skills: Speaking 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/activities: pair work, role-play, matching 5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, pictures 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) c. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss d. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson: (5ms) + calls on one student to come to b/b  write these words in E.L: + laøm oàn ( make a fuss) + boái roái, lung tuùng (embarrasing) + nhìn leùn (sneaky look)  Asks Ss some questions about the story + Gives feedback and marks • Presentation of the new material: (35ms) Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 4ms 4ms I. Lead-in -makes questions: 1.. Do you like listening to music? Why? 2. Do you like playing football? Why? -gives feedback -transforms the answers 1. Listening to music makes me -listen and answer the teacher’s questions -listen and answer -look a the b/b and write down Unit 2: PERSONAL EXPERIENCES Part: Speaking Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 20.
    Unit 1: Friendship. 27ms relax 2. Playing football makes me healthier II. Pre-practice -sets situations: “These are the thing that you might have done or experienced and how they might have affected you” -introduces: Make + O + Adj / V bare inf III. Controlled-practice • Task 1 -gives instructions -asks Ss to work in pairs and do task 1: Matching -lets Ss do the task in 3 ms -calls on some Ss to stand up and perform -gives feedback The keys: 1.d 2. c 3. a 4. b 5. e • Task 2 -sets the situation( in the textbook) -asks Ss to work in pairs and do the task -lets Ss do in 5 minutes -goes around to offer help -asks Ss to give their answers -gives feedback The key: 1.b 2.d 3.h 4.a 5.e 6.g 7.c 8.f -calls on some pairs to stand up and play the roles -gives feedback • Task 3 -asks Ss to underline the structures used to talk about past experience in the dialogue 2 -reminds Ss of using the past simple and the present perfect -gives feedback -provides Ss with some useful structures in “Useful structures” (T may ask some questions to get the answers that the Ss can follow) -asks Ss to work in pairs and make similar dialogues -lets Ss to discuss in 8 minutes -listen to the teacher -listen and take notes in their notebook -listen to the teacher’s instructions -work in pairs -do the task in the allotted time -stand up and perform -listen and answer -listen to the teacher -work in pairs and do the task -do the task in the allotted time -give their answers -listen and answer -stand up and practice the conversation -listen and answer -listen to the teacher’s instructions -listen and take notes -listen and answer -listen and take notes in their note books -work in pairs and do the task -do the task in the allotted time -stand up ask and perform -listen and answer Content • Task 1 The keys: 1.d 2. c 3. a 4. b 5. e • Task 2 The key: 1.b 2.d 3.h 4.a 5.e 6.g 7.c 8.f • Task 3 1. Have you ever …? 2. How did it happen? 3. When did it happen? 4. How did the experience affect you? Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 21.
    Unit 1: Friendship. -asks some pairs to perform -gives feedback • Homework: (4ms) Asks Ss to write in their notebooks: + learn the lesson well. + write a short paragraph about a past experience that has had an influence on you. • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare part: “Listening” • Self –evaluation: _______________________________________________________________________________________ Date of teaching: Period : 10 Unit 2: PERSONAL EXPERIENCES Part: Listening AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content: + To encourage Ss to listen to a talk about an unforgettable experience + To help Ss practice listening • Language function: Talking about an unforgettable experience – a fire • Educational aim: At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + Listen to a monologue for specific information + have chances to express their agreement or disagreement 1. Language: a) Vocabulary: memorable, embrace, terrified, … b) Grammar : no structures 2. Skills: Listening- Speaking 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/activities: group work, question-answer, T- F statement, discussion 5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, tape 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) b. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson: (5ms) -Calls two Ss to stand up and play the roles, talk about their past experience -Gives feedback and marks • Presentation of the new material: (35ms) Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 22.
    Unit 1: Friendship. Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong Tim e Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 4ms 8ms 15ms I. Lead-in - makes some questions 1.Have you ever seen a fire? 2. How would you feel if you were in a fire? -gives feedback -tells the aim of the lesson: Talking about a fire II. Before you listen -asks Ss to look at the picture in the textbook and answer the questions 1. What can you see in the picture? 2. Do you think what caused the fire? 3. Do you think what the girl learned from the fire? -gives feedback -lets Ss repeat the words -introduces some new words + memorable (a) + terrify (v) -> terrified(a) + embrace(v) -sets the situation: “You are going to listen to Christina telling about her most unforgettable experience on an interview“ III. While you listen • Task 1 -asks Ss to read the statements in task 1 and underline the key words -gives feedback -plays the tape the first time -asks Ss to give their answers (correct the false sentences) -gives feedback The key: 1. T 2. F 3. F 4. F 5. T • Task 2 -asks Ss to read the summary and guess the missing words -has Ss to listen to the tape and do the task -asks Ss to give their answers -listen and answer the teacher’s questions -listen and answer -listen to the teacher -look at the picture in the textbook , ask and answer the questions -listen and answer -repeat the words listen and guess the meaning of the new words and take notes -listen to the teacher -read the statements in task 1 and underline the key words -listen and answer -listen to the tape and do the task -give their answers -listen and answer -read the summary and guess the missing words -listen to the tape and do the task -give their answers -listen to the tape again -share their answers with their partners -give their answers -listen and answer Unit 2: PERSONAL EXPERIENCES Part: Listening Content New words: + memorable (a) + terrify (v) -> terrified(a) + embrace(v) • Task 1 The keys: 1. T 2. F (13 years ago) 3. F ( in the kitchen) 4. F (was sleeping) 5. T
  • 23.
    Unit 1: Friendship. • Homework: (4ms) Asks Ss to write in their notebooks: + learn the lesson well. + write a short paragraph (100 words) expressing your idea about Christina‘s idea • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare part: “Writing” • Self –evaluation: Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 24.
    Unit 1: Friendship. _____________________________________________ Date of teaching: Period : 11 Unit 2: PERSONAL EXPERIENCES Part: Writing AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content: To provide Ss with practice writing a personal letter telling about a past experience • Language function: Practicing writing a personal letter telling about a past experience • Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: write a personal letter telling about a past experience 1. Language: a) Vocabulary: ( review) b) Grammar : ( review) the past tenses 2. Skills: Writing 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/activities: brainstorming, discussion 5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, pare board 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) b. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson:(no checking to save time for Ss to write) • Presentation of the new material: (40ms) Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 4ms 14ms I. Warm up -shows out some pictures + A boy who is calling for help in the river + A boy who is being late for school -makes questions: 1. Have you ever in such situations? 2. How the experience affected you? -tells the aim of the lesson: Writing about a past experience II. Pre-Writing -look at the pictures and answer the teacher’s questions - listen to the teacher -listen and answer -listen and answer Unit 2: PERSONAL EXPERIENCES Part: Writing Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 25.
    Unit 1: Friendship. 15ms 7ms -asks Ss to tell form of a letter -gives feedback + The heading( Date) + The salutation ( Greeting) + The body + The closing ( your love, your son, …) + The signature(Name of the writer) -hangs the chart on the b/b -asks Ss to read the story and answer the following questions 1. When it happened? 2. Where it happened? 3. How it happened? 4. Who was involved? 5. How it affected the writer? -lets Ss do in 3 ms -asks Ss to give their answers -gives feedback -calls on one good student to stand up and tell the class about his/ her past experience III. While-writing -ask Ss to work individually and write a personal letter about their past experience basing on the suggestions -lets Ss do the task in 15 ms -goes around to observe and offer help IV. Post writing -asks Ss to change their paperboards & check each other -selects some to hang on the b/b -has Ss correct their friends’ mistakes on the b/b -gives feedback -look at the chart - read the story and answer the questions -do the task in the allotted time -listen and answer -stand up and tell the class about his/ her past experience -listen to the teacher’s instructions -do the task in the allotted time -change their papers to check each other -look at their friends’ work -correct their friends’ mistakes -listen and answer Content Writing about a personal letter about a past experience + The heading( Date) + The salutation ( Greeting) + The body + The closing ( your love, your son, …) + The signature(Name of the writer) Answer the following questions: 1. When it happened? 2. Where it happened? 3. How it happened? 4. Who was involved? 5. How it affected you? • Homework: (4ms) Asks Ss to correct the mistakes and write in their note books • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare par: “Language Focus” • Self –evaluation: Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 26.
    Unit 1: Friendship. _________________________________________________________________ Date of teaching: Period : 12 Unit 2: PERSONAL EXPERIENCES Part: Language Focus AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + distinguish the sounds /m / , / n/ and / / and pronounce them exactly + master the tenses and use them correctly 1. Vocabulary: the words the sounds /m / , / n/ and / / in: snow, wrong … 2. Structure: Revision: The present simple, the past simple, past progressive and past perfect 3. Procedures: Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 27.
    Unit 1: Friendship. Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong I. Warm- up (5ms) -greets Ss -has a short chat with Ss II. Checking up Previous knowledge ( no checking because the lesson is long) III. Content of the lesson (35ms) • Pronunciation (10ms) -draws on the b/ a face with a nose, a mouth smiling -writes down the words: mouth, nose, smiling -introduce the three sounds: / m , / n/ , / / -tells the aim of the lesson : practice the sounds / m , / n/ , / / in a single word and practise them in sentences -introduces some more in the text book -has Ss listen and repeat the words -calls some Ss to stand up and repeat -helps Ss practice the dialogue containing the target sounds -calls some pairs to stand up and practice -gives feedback • Grammar (25ms) Presentation and Exercises I. A. Presentation 1 : The present simple indicating past time -asks Ss to give the correct form of the Verbs 1. The earth( move)….. around the sun. 2. She never (get)…….up late -gives feedback -helps Ss revise the simple present tense -tells the aim of the exercise 1: The present simple indicating past time B. Exercise 1: -gives instructions -lets Ss do exercise 1 in 3 ms -asks Ss to give their answers - gives feedback The keys: 1.invites 2. sets 3. gets 4. waves 5. promises 6. …. II. A. Presentation 2 : The simple past or past progressive -asks Ss to give the correct form of the Verbs When I (go)…. to school yesterday, I ( meet)…. him -gives feedback “ was going / met” -helps Ss revise the simple past -tells the aim of the exercise 2: The simple past or past progressive -gives examples in the textbook B. Exercise 2: -gives instructions -lets Ss do exercise 1 in 3 ms -asks Ss to give their answers -gives feedback
  • 28.
    Unit 1: Friendship. • Self –evaluation: Lesson Plan - English 11 Teacher: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 29.
    Unit 3: AParty . Date of teaching: Period : 13 Unit 3: A PARTY Part: Reading AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content : + To introduce Ss to the passage about parties + To provide Ss with some new words relating to the topic • Language function: + Reading the passage for gist and for specific information • Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: - to develop their reading comprehension - talk their own parties 1. Language: a) Vocabulary: celebrate, anniversary, … b) Grammar : no structure 2. Skills: Reading 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/ activities: question- answer, gap-fill, discussion 5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, pictures 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (3ms) c. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss + Has a short chat with the Ss b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson: (no checking) • Presentation of the new material: (40ms) Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 30.
    Unit 3: AParty . Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong Tim e Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 4ms 8ms 20ms I. Lead-in -asks Ss to” What is it?” + It is a social occasion at which people eat and drink, dance, enjoy themselves + It has 5 letters + It is ended in letter “Y” The key: PARTY -asks Ss to tell some parties they know -gives feedback -tells the aim of the lesson: Parties II. Before you read -asks Ss to look at the pictures in their book and answer the two questions -gives feedback -sets situation :”the passage is about Lisa’s birthday and an anniversary of Rosa and Luis” -introduces some new words: New words: + celebrate (v) (Translation) + anniversary (n) + weeding anniversary: silver anniversary and golden anniversary -checks understanding of the new words III. While you read • Task 1 -gives instructions -lets Ss do the task in 5 ms -asks Ss to give their answers -gives feedback The keys: B. party W. A. party 1   2   3   4  5  6  7  • Task 2 -gives instructions -lets Ss do the task in 4 ms -asks Ss to give their answers -gives feedback The keys: 1. eight-> seven 2. makes-> eats 3. food-> presents 4. anniversaries-> ages … -listen to the teacher’s instructions -guess the answer -listen and answer the teacher’s questions -listen and answer -listen to the teacher -look at the pictures in their book and answer the two questions -listen to the teacher -listen and guess the meaning of the new words -copy down the new words in their note-books -listen and answer -listen to the teacher’s instructions -do the task in the allotted time -give their answers -listen and answer -copy down the answers in their note-books -listen to the teacher’s instructions -do the task in the allotted time -give their answers -listen and answer -copy down the answers in their notebooks Unit 3: A PARTY Part: Reading Content New words: + celebrate (v) + anniversary (n) + weeding anniversary: silver anniversary and golden anniversary • Task 1 The keys: B. party W. A. party 1   2   3   4  5  6  7  • Task 2 The keys: 1. eight-> seven 2. makes-> eats 3. food-> presents 4. anniversaries-> ages 5. months-> years
  • 31.
    Unit 3: AParty . • Homework: (2ms) Asks Ss to write in their notebooks: + learn the lesson well. + talk about their own parties • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare part: “Speaking” • Self –evaluation: _________________________________________________________________________________________ Date of teaching : Period : 14 Unit 3: A PARTY Part: Speaking AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content : + To enable Ss to use appropriate language to talk about parties • Language function: + Talking about the past parties • Educational aim : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + use appropriate language to talk about parties and know how to organize a party + have a chance to take part in competition to organize a party 1. Language: a) Vocabulary: old Vocabulary b) Grammar : Revise: The future tense 2. Skills: Speaking 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/activities: pair work, role-play, discussion 5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, pictures 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1ms) e. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss f. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson: (5ms) + Asks Ss to write some new words : + ñaùm cöôùi vaøng + leã kæ nieäm + Asks Ss some questions about Lisa’s birthday and the anniversary of Rosa and Luis + Gives feedback and marks • Presentation of the new material: (37ms) Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 4ms I. Lead-in -makes questions: 1. Do you like parties? -listen and answer the teacher’s questions Unit 3: Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 32.
    Unit 3: AParty . 33ms 2. Have you ever been to a party? 3. Whose party was it? 4. On what occasion? -gives feedback -tells the aim of the lesson: Talking about Parties III. Practice • Task 1 -introduces the task and goes over the questions -asks Ss to work individually and do the task -lets Ss do the task in 5 ms -goes around to offer help -calls on some Ss to stand up and perform -gives feedback • Task 2 -puts Ss in pairs and asks them to ask and answer about the parties they have been to -calls on some pairs to stand up and perform -gives feedback • Task 3 -gives instructions -asks Ss to work in groups and do the task following the suggestions (the chart – at the end of the lesson) -provides Ss with some useful structures of invitation: + Would you like to come …? + Please do come …. + We would love to have you … -lets Ss to discuss in 8 minutes • Task 4 -calls on the representative in front of the class to present -asks the rest to give their comments -gives feedback -listen and answer -listen to the teacher -listen to the teacher -listen to the teacher’s instructions -do the task in the allotted time -stand up and perform -listen and answer -work in pairs and do the task -stand up and practice the conversation -listen and answer -listen to the teacher’s instructions -listen and answer -listen and take notes in their note books -do the task in the allotted time -present -present in front of the class - to give their comments -listen and answer A PARTY Part: Speaking Content • Task 1 • Task 2 • Task 3 • Task 4 • Homework: (2ms) Asks Ss to write in their notebooks: + learn the lesson well. + write a short paragraph about your party. Try to convince your friends to come. • Preparation for the next lesson: Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 33.
    Unit 3: AParty . Asks Ss to prepare part: “Listening” • Self –evaluation: _______________________________________________________________________ The chart: When? Where? Entertainment? (Date and time) (Home /restaurant?) (Dance / music / game?) Dressing codes? Budget? (formal / Planning a party ( how much to spend / informal?) contribute?) Who to invite? Decoration? Foods and drinks? (family / friends / ( colour lights / (cook our own Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 34.
    Unit 3: AParty . relatives/ teachers bulbs / flowers?) or order?) classmates?) __________________________________________________________________________________ Date of teaching : Period : 15 Unit 3: A PARTY Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 35.
    Unit 3: AParty . Part: Listening AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content: + To encourage Ss to listen to a talk about birthday parties + To help Ss practice listening • Language function: Talking about birthday parties • Educational aim: At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + Listen to a monologue for specific information 1. Language: a) Vocabulary: memorable, embrace, terrified, … b) Grammar : no structures 2. Skills: Listening- Speaking 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/activities: group work, question-answer, T- F statement 5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, tape 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1ms) c. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson: (no checking) • Presentation of the new material: (42ms) Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 36.
    Unit 3: AParty . Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong Tim e Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 6ms 8ms 15ms I. Lead-in -show out a party -ask Ss to guess what party it is -gives feedback: A birthday party - makes some questions 1. What is the date today? 2. Who was born on this date? / this month? -gives feedback -asks Ss to sing the song ” Happy Birthday” to those who were born on that date. -tells the aim of the lesson: Talking about a birthday party II. Before you listen -introduces some new words + gather (v) : come together + clap (v) (Mime) + slice( n) (Picture) + icing (n) (Picture) + pink (n) (picture) -sets the situation: “.You are going to listen to a girl talking about a birthday party she had been to“ III. While you listen • Task 1 -asks Ss to read the statements in task 1 and underline the key words -gives feedback -plays the tape the first time -asks Ss to give their answers (correct the false sentences) -gives feedback The key: 1. F 2. F 3. F 4. T 5. F • Task 2 -asks Ss to read the questions and guess the answers -has Ss to listen to the tape and do the task -asks Ss to give their answers -plays the tape again -asks Ss to compare their answers with their partners -asks Ss to give their answers -gives feedback(T may play the tape to check their answers) The key: 1. !6 years old. 2. Because it is noisy and expensive. 3. Soft drink and biscuits. 4. … IV. After you listen -look at the picture and answer -listen and answer -listen and answer the teacher’s questions -listen and answer -sing the song ” Happy Birthday” -listen to the teacher -listen and guess the meaning of the new words and take notes -listen to the teacher -read the statements in task 1 and underline the key words -listen and answer -listen to the tape and do the task -give their answers -listen and answer - read the questions and guess the answers -listen to the tape and do the task -give their answers -listen to the tape again -share their answers with their partners -give their answers -listen and answer -take notes in their note-books Unit 3: A PARTY Part: Listening Content New words: + gather (v) + clap (v) + slice( n) + icing (n) + pink (n) • Task 1 The keys: 1. F (in the afternoon) 2. F (About 20 guests) 3. F ( in the middle of the party) 4. T (From 3 to 6 p.m) 5. F (only the writer with her family) • Task 2 The keys: 1. !6 years old. 2. Because it is noisy and expensive. 3. Soft drink and biscuits. 4. …
  • 37.
    Unit 3: AParty . • Homework: (2ms) Asks Ss to write in their notebooks: + write a short paragraph (100 words) about Mai’s birthday party • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare part: “Writing “ • Self –evaluation: __________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Date of teaching : Period : 16 Unit 3: A PARTY Part: Writing AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content: To provide Ss with practice writing a letter of invitation • Language function: Practicing writing a letter of invitation • Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: write a letter of invitation 1. Language: a) Vocabulary: refreshments b) Grammar : ( review) the future tense 2. Skills: Writing 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/activities: brainstorming, discussion, gap-filling 5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, pare board 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) c. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson:(3ms) Makes some questions to get the answers about Mai’s birthday party Gives feedback • Presentation of the new material: (40ms) Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 4ms I. Warm up -asks Ss to play game “Hangman” -gives instructions -look at the b/b and listen to the teacher’s Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 38.
    Unit 3: AParty . 16ms -conducts the game The key: “LETTERS” -asks Ss to tell some kind of letters they know -gives feedback -tells the aim of the lesson: Writing a letter of invitation II. Pre-Writing -makes some questions: 1. On what occasions are parties held? 2. What kind of clothes do you often wear at the party? 3. What kind of presents do you often bring to the party? -gives feedback -asks Ss to complete the letter in task 2 -explains the word: + refreshments (n) -lets Ss do in 3 ms -asks Ss to give their answers -gives feedback -hangs the chart having the complete letter on the b/b -asks Ss to reread the letter and complete the following table What party? Where? When? Who to invite? What foods? / Drinks? What games? / activities? -lets Ss do in 1 ms -asks Ss to give their answers -gives feedback -asks Ss to tell the structure of invitation in the letter -gives feedback + Would you like to come …? -provides some more + Please do come… + How about going to …? -asks Ss to retell form of a letter -gives feedback + The heading( Date) + The salutation ( Greeting) + The body + The closing instructions -play the game -tell some kind of letters -listen and answer -listen to the teacher -listen and answer the teacher’s questions -listen and answer -listen and guess the meaning of the word -do the task in the allotted time -listen and answer -look at the chart -reread the letter and complete the table -do the task in the allotted time -listen and answer -answer -listen and answer -listen and take note -retell form of a letter -listen ad answer Unit 3: A PARTY Part: Writing Content Writing about a letter of invitation Task 2 The keys: 1. at home 2. to come 3. refreshments 4. to cook 5. winners 6. by Monday Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 39.
    Unit 3: AParty . 15ms 5ms + The signature -asks Ss to use the information above to do task 3 III. While-writing -ask Ss to work in groups and write a letter of invitation basing on the suggestions above -lets Ss do the task in 15 ms -goes around to observe and offer help IV. Post writing -asks Ss to change their paperboards & check each other -selects some to hang on the b/b -has Ss correct their friends’ mistakes on the b/b -gives feedback -listen to the teacher’s instructions -do the task in the allotted time -change their papers to check each other -look at their friends’ work -correct their friends’ mistakes -listen and answer • Homework: (1ms) Asks Ss to correct the mistakes and write the complete letter in their note books • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare par: “Language Focus” • Self –evaluation: Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 40.
    Unit 3: AParty . _________________________________________________________________________________________________ Date of teaching: Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 41.
    Unit 3: AParty . Period : 17 Unit 3: A PARTY Part: Language Focus AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + distinguish the sounds /l / , / h / and / r / and pronounce them exactly + use Passive infinitive and gerund correctly 1. Vocabulary: + the words the sounds /l / , / h / and / r / in: lemonade, library, house … 2. Structure: Passive infinitive and gerund 3. Procedures: Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 42.
    Unit 3: AParty . Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong I. Warm- up (5ms) -greets Ss -has a short chat with Ss II. Checking up Previous knowledge( no checking because the lesson is long) III. Content of the lesson (35ms) • Pronunciation (10ms) -draws on the b/b + a pair of glasses + a ring + a house -introduce the three sounds: /l / , / h / and / r / -tells the aim of the lesson : practice the sounds /l / , / h / and / r / in a single word and practise them in sentences -introduces some more in the text book -has Ss listen and repeat the words -calls some Ss to stand up and repeat -helps Ss practice the dialogue containing the target sounds -calls some pairs to stand up and practice -gives feedback • Grammar (25ms) Presentation and Exercises I. A. Presentation 1 : “Inf and Gerund” Exercise 1 -asks Ss to give the correct form of the Verbs 1. They hate ( stay).. at home all day. 2. She was asked (answer) … the question. -gives feedback The keys: 1. staying 2. to answer -tells the aim of the exercise 1: “Inf and Gerund” B. Exercise 1: -gives instructions -lets Ss do exercise 1 in 3 ms -asks Ss to give their answers -gives feedback The keys: 1.having 2. getting 3. to tell 4. practicing 5. to see II. A. Presentation 2 : Passive infinitive/ Gerund -asks Ss to give the correct form of the Verbs 1. I hope (give)… a present by my mother. 2. The mouse avoided (catch)… by coming out when the house was empty and the cat was outside. -gives feedback -> to be given -> being caught
  • 43.
    Unit 3: AParty . • Self –evalua • • Self –evaluation: _________________________________________________________________________________________ Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 44.
    Date of teaching: Period: 21 Unit 4: VOLUNTEER WORK Part: Reading AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content : + To introduce Ss to the passage about volunteer work + To provide Ss with some new words relating to the topic • Language function: + Reading the passage for gist and for specific information • Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: - develop their reading comprehension - take part in volunteer work frequently 1. Language: a) Vocabulary: volunteer, orphanage, handicapped, participate, … b) Grammar : no structure 2. Skills: Reading 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/ activities: multiple choice, gap-fill, questions – answer, discussion 5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, pictures 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) d. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss + Has a short chat with the Ss b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson: (no checking) • Presentation of the new material: (40ms) Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 45.
    Lesson Plan -English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong Tim e Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 4ms 8ms I. Lead-in -shows out some pictures of “volunteer Ss doing some things to help people in mountain areas” -asks Ss : 1. Who are they? 2. What are they doing? 3. What do you call the work that they are doing? -gives feedback The key: VOLUNTEER WORK -asks Ss to tell some activities that the volunteers often do to help people -gives feedback -tells the aim of the lesson: Volunteer Work II. Before you read -asks Ss to look at the pictures in their book and tell some things about them -gives feedback -asks Ss to work in pairs, read the saying and discuss its meaning -gives feedback “If S.O gives you sth to eat, you will not heel hungry but it won’t last long. If S.O gives you an opportunity t work or teaches you how to work, you will earn your own living for a long time” -introduces some new words: New words: + volunteer (v , n) -> voluntary (a) -> voluntarily (adv) + orphanage (n) (Definition) + mow the lawn (v) = cut the grass + handicapped (a) = disabled + participate in (v) = take part in + remote = far away -checks understanding of the new words III. While you read • Task 1 -gives instructions -lets Ss do the task in 5 ms -asks Ss to give their answers -gives feedback The keys: 1. voluntary 2. voluntarily 3. volunteers 4. volunteered • Task 2 -gives instructions -lets Ss do the task in 5 ms -asks Ss to give their answers -look at the pictures and answer -listen and answer the teacher’s questions -listen and answer -listen and answer the teacher -listen and answer -listen to the teacher -look at the pictures in their book and answer -listen and answer -work in pairs, read the saying and discuss its meaning -listen and answer -listen and guess the meaning of the new words -copy down the new words in their note-books -listen and answer -listen to the teacher’s instructions -do the task in the allotted time -give their answers -listen and answer -listen to the teacher’s instructions -do the task in the allotted time Unit 4: VOLUNTEER WORK Part: Reading Content New words: + volunteer (v , n) -> voluntary (a) -> voluntarily (adv) + orphanage (n) + mow the lawn (v) = cut the grass + handicapped (a) = disabled + participate in (v) = take part in + remote = far away • Task 1 The keys: 1. voluntary 2. voluntarily 3. volunteers 4. volunteered • Task 2 The keys:
  • 46.
    • Homework: (4ms) AsksSs to write in their notebooks: + learn the lesson well. + talk about voluntary works that they often do in the summer to help the community • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare part: “Speaking” • Self –evaluation: Date of teaching : Period : 22 Unit 4: VOLUNTEER WORK Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 47.
    Part: Speaking AIMS ANDOBJECTIVES • Language content : + To enable Ss to use appropriate language to talk about different kinds of activities related to volunteer work • Language function: + Talking about volunteer work • Educational aim : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + use appropriate language to talk about different kinds of activities related to volunteer work 1. Language: a) Vocabulary: old Vocabulary b) Grammar : 2. Skills: Speaking 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/activities: pair work, role-play, discussion 5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, pictures 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) g. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss h. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson: (5ms) + Asks Ss to write some new words : + traïò treû moà coâi + tham gia + ngöôøi taøn taät + Asks Ss some questions about volunteer work + Gives feedback and marks • Presentation of the new material: (37ms) Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 4ms 33ms I. Lead-in -asks Ss to list out some activities of volunteer work on the network -gives feedback -tells the aim of the lesson: Talking about different kinds of activities related to volunteer work II. Practice • Task 1 -asks Ss to work in pairs and do the task -lets Ss do the task in 3 ms -goes around to offer help -calls on some Ss to stand up and give their answer -gives feedback -list out some activities of volunteer work -listen and answer -listen to the teacher -work in pairs and do the task in the allotted time -stand up and perform -listen and answer Unit 4: VOLUNTEER WORK Part: Speaking Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 48.
    The keys: + Helpingthe poor in remote or mountain areas. + Giving care and comfort to the poor and the sick. + Providing education for disadvantaged children • Task 2 -makes some questions 1. What kind of volunteer work are you participating in? 2. What exactly are you doing? 3. Do you enjoy the work? -hangs the chart having the conversation on the b/b -calls on two Ss to stand up and practise the conversation -asks Ss to read the list of volunteer activities in the box -explain some new words + war invalid: + martyr: + intersections: -asks Ss to match each activity on the left with corresponding activities on the right -gives feedback -puts Ss in pairs and practise the conversation basing on the model using the information in the box -calls on some pairs to stand up and perform -gives feedback • Task 3 -asks Ss to work in groups -gives instructions” Each group prepares a ‘wheel of fortune’ . The member of each group will take turns to pull the wheel. The person who is luckily pointed to by the stick on the wheel has a chance to talk about his / her volunteer work ( just one sentence each time) Eg: S1: I often take part in helping people in remote area S2: I sometime look after the sick S3: … S1 (again) -lets Ss to work in groups and do the task in 8 minutes following the example -listen and answer the teacher’s questions -look at the chart on the b/b -stand up and practice the conversation -listen and take notes -listen to the teacher’s instructions -listen and answer -work in pairs and practise the conversation -stand up and perform -listen and answer -listen to the teacher’s instructions -do the task in the allotted time -present in front of the class Content • Task 1 The keys: +Helping the poor in remote or mountain areas. + Giving care and comfort to the poor and the sick. + Providing education for disadvantaged children • Task 2 New words + war invalid: + martyr: + intersections: • Task 3 Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 49.
    -calls on therepresentative in front of the class to talk about activities they take part in -asks the rest to give their comments -gives feedback -to give their comments -listen and answer • Homework: (2ms) Asks Ss to write in their notebooks: + learn the lesson well. + write a short paragraph about your volunteer work they usually do during their summer holiday. • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare part: “Listening” • Self –evaluation: Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 50.
    _________________________________________________________ Date of teaching: Period: 23 Unit 4: VOLUNTEER WORK Part: Listening AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content: + To encourage Ss to listen to a talk about Spring School + To help Ss practice listening • Language function: Talking about Spring School • Educational aim: At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + Listen to a monologue for specific information 1. Language: a) Vocabulary: co-operate, co- ordinate, fund- raising, … b) Grammar : no structures 2. Skills: Listening- Speaking 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/activities: group work, question-answer, T- F statement 5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, tape 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) d. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson: (no checking) • Presentation of the new material: (40ms) Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 51.
    Lesson Plan -English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong Tim e Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 6ms 6ms 20ms I. Lead-in -asks Ss to play game “ Guessing word” -The cues: 1. This is the name of the season 2. It falls on the early month of the year 3. it’s ended in letter G -gives feedback: SPRING -tells the aim of the lesson: Talk about Spring School, a special school in HCM city II. Before you listen -asks Ss to work individually and tick the best answer that suit them -gives feedback -lets Ss repeat the words -introduces some new words + fund- raising activity + co-ordinate ( v) + Co-operate (v) - work together -sets the situation: “You are going to listen to a talk about Spring School, a special school in HCM city” III. While you listen • Task 1 -asks Ss to read the statements in task 1 and underline the key words, decide what word may be needed in each blank -plays the tape the first time -asks Ss to give their answers -plays the tape the second time to check their answers -gives feedback The key: 1. formal 2. 30 street children 3. 250 children 4. 1998 5. volunteers / June • Task 2 -asks Ss to read the questions and guess the answers -has Ss to listen to the tape and do the task -asks Ss to give their answers -plays the tape again -asks Ss to compare their answers with their partners -asks Ss to give their answers -gives feedback(T may play the -look at the b/b and answer -listen and answer -listen to the teacher - work individually and answer -listen and answer -repeat the words listen and guess the meaning of the new words and take notes -listen to the teacher -read the statements in task 1 and underline the key words decide what word may be needed in each blank -listen to the tape and do the task -give their answers -listen and answer -read the questions and guess the answers -listen to the tape and do the task -give their answers -listen to the tape again -share their answers with their partners -give their answers -listen and answer -take notes in their note-books Unit 4: VOLUNTEER WORK Part: Listening Content New words: + fund- raising activity + co-ordinate ( v) + Co-operate (v) • Task 1 The keys: 1. formal 2. 30 street children 3. 250 children 4. 1998 5. volunteers / June
  • 52.
    • Homework: (4ms) _______________________________________________________________________________________ AsksSs to write in their notebooks: + learn the lesson well. + write a short paragraph (100 words) about Spring School • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare part: “Writing” • Self –evaluation: Match the information in column A with one in column B A B The aim of Spring School About 250 The number of children who live and study at the school or attend classes Provide classes to disadvantaged children The activities the children at the school take part in Volunteers to help organize their fund-raising dinner held annually The kinds of volunteers that Spring School requires Dance, sing, play music Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 53.
    _______________________________________________________________________________________ Date of teaching: Period : 24 Unit 4: VOLUNTEER WORK Part: Writing AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content: To provide Ss with practice writing a formal letter expressing gratitude • Language function: Practicing writing a formal letter expressing gratitude • Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: write a formal letter expressing gratitude 1. Language: a) Vocabulary : gratitude, issue, receipt, acknowledge b) Grammar : 2. Skills: Writing 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/activities: Brainstorming, discussion 5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk, pare board 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) b. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson:(3ms) Makes some questions to get the answers about Spring School Gives feedback • Presentation of the new material: (38ms) Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 4ms I. Warm up -sets a situation” I received a special gift from my uncle some day ago. And now I want to write a letter to him. Tell me what king of letter I’m going to write?” -gives feedback -listen to the teacher’s and answer -listen and answer Unit 4: VOLUNTEER WORK Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 54.
    12ms -tells the aimof the lesson: Writing a formal letter expressing gratitude II. Pre-Writing • Task 1 -asks Ss to play “ Competition game” -divides the model letter into 6 parts and write down each part on a piece of paper -asks Ss to close their books -divides the Ss into 2 groups -gives the papers to the Ss and asks them to rearrange them to make a complete letter -lets Ss complete in 1 minute -asks Ss to open their books , read the letter and check their work (which group finishing first with the right letter will be the winner) -asks Ss to read the model -provides some new words + gratitude (n) + issues (v) + receipt(n) + assistance (n) -asks Ss to read the model and find out the sentences that express the 6 points in the textbook -asks Ss to retell form of a formal letter -gives feedback + The heading( Address, Date) + The salutation (Dear Sir, Madam) + The body + The closing (Yours faithfully, Yours sincerely,) + The signature -provides Ss with some expressions +Thank you very much for ……. + I would like to thank you for … + I would like to take this opportunity to thank you for … • Task 2 -asks Ss to read the requirement carefully -helps Ss analyze the requirement basing on the suggestions in task1 III. While-writing - listen to the teacher -listen and answer the teacher’s questions -close their books -sit in groups -get the papers -listen and answer -do in the allotted time - open their books , read the letter and check -read the model -listen and guess the meaning of the word -read the model and answer -retell form of a formal letter -listen and answer -listen and take note -read the requirement carefully and listen to the teacher’s instructions Part: Writing Content Writing about a formal letter expressing gratitude New words: + gratitude (n) + issues (v) + receipt(n) + assistance (n) • Task 1 1. Dear Sir / Madam, 2. sentence 2 3. sentence 4 4. sentence 1 5. sentence 3 6. I look forward to hearing from you. Yours faithfully, form of a formal letter + The heading( Address, Date) + The salutation (Dear Sir, Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 55.
    15ms 7ms -ask Ss towork in individually and write a formal letter expressing gratitude, basing on the suggestions above -lets Ss do the task in 15 ms -goes around to observe and offer help IV. Post writing -asks Ss to change their paperboards & check each other -selects some to hang on the b/b -has Ss correct their friends’ mistakes on the b/b -gives feedback -listen to the teacher’s instructions -do the task in the allotted time -change their papers to check each other -look at their friends’ work -correct their friends’ mistakes -listen and answer Madam) + The body + The closing (Yours faithfully, Yours sincerely,) + The signature Expressions + I would like to express our thanks for… +Thank you very much for ……. + I would like to thank you for … + I would like to take this opportunity to thank you for … • Homework: (3ms) Asks Ss to correct the mistakes and write the complete letter in their note books • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare par: “Language Focus” • Self –evaluation: Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 56.
    __________________________________________________________________________ Date of teaching: Period: 25 Unit 4: VOLUNTEER WORK Part: Language Focus AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + distinguish the sounds /w / and / j/ and pronounce them exactly + use gerund, present participle perfect gerund and perfect participle correctly 1. Vocabulary: + the words the sounds w / and / j/ / in: wheel, young, whale … + Perfect gerund and perfect participle 2. Structure: Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 57.
    3. Procedures: Lesson Plan- English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 58.
    Lesson Plan -English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong I. Warm- up (5ms) -greets Ss -has a short chat with Ss II. Checking up Previous knowledge( no checking because the lesson is long) III. Content of the lesson (35ms) • Pronunciation (10ms) -asks Ss to write some words beginning with “W” and “Y” -gives feedback -tells the aim of the lesson : practice the sounds / w / and / j / in a single word and practise them in sentences -introduces some more in the text book -has Ss listen and repeat the words -calls some Ss to stand up and repeat -helps Ss practice the dialogue containing the target sounds -calls some pairs to stand up and practice -gives feedback • Grammar (25ms) Presentation and Exercises I. A. Presentation 1 : Gerund -asks Ss to give the correct form of the Verbs 1. They enjoy ( read )... books. 2. She is interested in (play)… the piano. -gives feedback 1. -> reading 2. -> playing -tells the aim of the exercise 1: “Gerund - review” -helps Ss revise the form and uses of Gerund -asks Ss t give some mote examples -gives feedback B. Exercise 1: -gives instructions -lets Ss do exercise 1 in 3 ms -asks Ss to give their answers -gives feedback The keys: 1. listening 2. bending 3. behaving 4. meeting 5. spending 6. waiting 7. starting II. A. Presentation 2 : “Present participles” -asks Ss to give the correct form of the Verbs 1. He spends 3 hours a day (learn) ……. E.L 2. My mother used to go (shop)… everyday. -gives feedback 1. learning 2. shopping -tells the aim of the exercise 2: “Present participles” -helps Ss revise the form and uses of Present participles -asks Ss t give some more examples -gives feedback
  • 59.
    • Self –evaluation: _________________________________________________________________ Dateof teaching: Period : 26 Unit 5: ILLITERACY Part: Reading AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content : + To introduce Ss to the passage about illiteracy + To provide Ss with some new words relating to the topic • Language function: + Reading the passage for gist and for specific information • Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: - develop their reading comprehension - apply some useful dictionary skills to the interpretation of its meaning 1. Language: a) Vocabulary: illiterate, illiteracy, ethnic minority, … b) Grammar : no structure 2. Skills: Reading 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/ activities: Multiple choice, pare work, group work, questions – answer, discussion 5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk, pictures 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) e. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 60.
    + Has ashort chat with the Ss b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson: (no checking) • Presentation of the new material: (40ms) Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 61.
    Lesson Plan -English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong Tim e Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 4ms 8ms I. Lead-in -asks Ss to play game “anagram game” -divides Ss into 2 groups -draws a circle on the b/b and write the letter of the topic world ,but all are jumbled For example: TYALELIRIC C L I E I A R T Y L -gives instructions” Ss write as many words as they can with the letters in the circle in two ms. Which group having the most meaningful and correct words will be the winner” -conducts the game -gives feedback -gets the words “ ILLITERACY” -tells the aim of the lesson: Illiteracy II. Before you read -asks Ss to look at the pictures in their books -makes questions: 1. Where do you think the class is? 2. Who are attending the class? 3. What about the teacher? Who is he? 4. Do all children have textbooks? -gives feedback -introduces some new words: New words: + illiterate (a): not able to read and write -> illiteracy (n) + eradicate (v) (to clean up, wipe up) -> eradication (n) + ethnic minority ( Picture) + campaign (n) (Example) Mua He Xanh campaign + rate (n) -checks understanding of the new words III. While you read • Task 1 -gives instructions -lets Ss do the task in 3 ms -asks Ss to give their answers -gives feedback The keys: -listen to the teacher -sit in groups -look at the b/b -listen to the teacher’s instructions -play the game -listen and answer -listen to the teacher -look at the pictures in their book and answer -listen and answer the teacher’s questions -listen and answer -listen and guess the meaning of the new words -copy down the new words in their note-books -listen and answer -listen to the teacher’s instructions -do the task in the allotted time -give their answers -listen and answer Unit 5: ILLITERACY Part: Reading Content New words: + illiterate (a): not able to read and write -> illiteracy (n) + eradicate (v) (to clean up, wipe up) -> eradication (n) + ethnic minority + campaign (n) : Mua He Xanh campaign + rate (n) • Task 1 The keys: 1. Phoå caäp GDTH 2. Hoäi KH Vieät Nam 3. Xoaù muø chöõ 4. Kæ thuaät canh taùc 5. Keá hoaïch hoaù GD • Task 2
  • 62.
    • Homework: (4ms) AsksSs to write in their notebooks: + learn the lesson well. + Discuss “ What are the advantages of enabling all people in a community to read and write • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare part: “Speaking” • Self –evaluation: __________________________________________________________ Date of teaching: Period : 27 Unit 5: ILLITERACY Part: Speaking AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content : + To enable Ss to use appropriate language to talk about illiteracy problems and offer solutions • Language function: + Talking about illiteracy problems • Educational aim : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + use appropriate language to talk about schooling and illiteracy related problems and offer solutions to these problems + use model “ SHOULD” to give advices 1. Language: a) Vocabulary: old Vocabulary b) Grammar : the model “ SHOULD” to give advices Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 63.
    2. Skills: Speaking 3.Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/activities: Pair work, group works, matching, discussion, pictures 5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) i. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss j. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson: (15ms) 15 Minute Test Listen and fill in the blanks. Albert Einstein was born on (1)____ in Um, Germany. His interest in (2)___ began when he was only (3)__ years old. But in school, he was not a very good(4)___. Albert dropped out of school at (5)___ because he hated strict discipline and rote-learning. When his family moved to Milan. (6)____. Albert decided to (7)___ Physics. He failed the institute’s entrance exam, but after a year’s study at a school near Zurich, he passed and entered(8)___ . He graduated in(9)___. Then he became a private physics and mathematics tutor for (10)___ years The answers: 1………… 2……………… 3……………. 4……………. 5……………….. 6…………. 7……………… 8…………….. 9…………….. 10……………. • Presentation of the new material: (27ms) Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 3ms 3ms 21ms I. Lead-in -asks Ss to tell some problem they often meet at school and offer some solutions to solve them -gives feedback -tells the aim of the lesson: Problems and solutions II. Pre- Practice -introduces some school problems -teaches some new words + cheat ( v) ( Mime) + regulation (n) ( Real thing) + enforce (v) ( Translation) + income (v) (Explanation) III. Practice • Task 1 -asks Ss to work in pairs and do the task: Matching -lets Ss do the task in 3 ms -calls on some Ss to stand up and give their answer -gives feedback The keys: -tell some problem and offer some solutions -listen and answer -listen to the teacher -listen to the teacher -listen and guess the meaning of the words -copy down in their note- books - work in pairs and do the task in the allotted time -stand up and answer -listen and answer Unit 5: ILLITERACY Part: Speaking Content New words + cheat ( v) + regulation (n) + enforce (v) + income (v) • Task 1 The keys: Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 64.
    1. b, g2. a, e 3. d, f 4. c 5. h, I, j • Task 2 -gives Ss a problem and asks them for the solutions to set up a model dialogue Eg: “Many Ss can not buy the required textbooks. What do you think we should do to help them?” St1: I think we should ask the school headmaster to provide free textbooks for Ss from low-income families. St2: We should collect used textbooks for school library -asks Ss to look at the model in task 2 -asks Ss to give the model “ Should” to give advices -calls on 3 Ss to practice -asks Ss to work in groups and make similar dialogues - lets Ss prepare in 3 ms -calls on some groups to stand up and perform -gives feedback • Task 3 -asks Ss some questions to set the task 1. Are there any problems in our class? 2. What are they?( if Ss can not answer, give them some cues as in the textbook) 3. What should we do to solve these problems? -lets Ss to work in groups and do the task in 3 minutes -asks the rest to give their answers -gives feedback IV. Post - speaking (if enough time) -sets a situation” many Ss have difficulties in learning E.l ,please tell me some solutions to improve it” -elicits prompts answers from Ss -gives feedback -tell a problem -look at the chart the model in task 2 -listen to the teacher -stand up and practice it -work in groups and make similar dialogues -do the task in the allotted time -stand up and practice the conversation -listen and answer -listen and answer teacher’s questions -work in groups and do the task in the allotted time -give their answers -listen and answer -listen to the teacher -to give their answers -listen and answer 1. b, g 2. a, e 3. d, f 4. c 5. h, I, j • Task 2 T : Many Ss can not buy the required textbooks. What do you think we should do to help them? St1: I think we should ask the school headmaster to provide free textbooks for Ss from low- income families. St2: We should collect used textbooks for school library • Task 3 • Homework: (2ms) Asks Ss to write in their notebooks: + write a short paragraph about difficulties in learning E.l and suggest some solutions Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 65.
    to solve theproblems. • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare part: “Listening” • Self –evaluation: __________________________________________________________________________ Date of teaching: Period : 28 Unit 5: ILLITERACY Part: Listening AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content: + To encourage Ss to listen to a talk about the result of a school survey on what makes an effective school + To help Ss practice listening • Language function: Listening for gist and specific information Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 66.
    • Educational aim:At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + develop extensive listening skills + use the information they have listened to for other communicative tasks 1. Language: a) Vocabulary : survey, maturity, academic, self- respect, … b) Grammar : no structures 2. Skills: Listening- Speaking 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/activities: Group work, question-answer, T- F statement 5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk, tape 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1ms) e. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson: (5ms)(mistake correction of 15 minute test) The keys: 1. March 14th , 1879 2. science 3. five 4. student 5. fifteen 6. Italy 7. study 8. in 1896 9. 1900 10.two • Presentation of the new material: (36ms) Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 67.
    Lesson Plan -English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong Tim e Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 6ms 6ms 20ms I. Lead-in (prepares a small survey and copies it on a paper (the table is at the end of the lesson plan) -hands out these papers to Ss -gives instructions -lets Ss complete the table -collects the papers gives feedback -tells the topic of the lesson: A survey II. Before you listen -makes some questions: 1. Have you ever done a survey? 2. Do you know where Perth is? -gives feedback -lets Ss repeat the words -introduces some new words + survey (n) ( Example) + effective (a) (Explanation) + mature (a) – maturity (n) + self- respect (n) (Translation) + academic ( a) (Translation) -sets the situation: “You are going to listen to a talk about the results of a school survey carried out in Perth, Western Australia. The school asked its students what makes an effective school” III. While you listen • Task 1 -asks Ss to read the statements in task 1 and think of the answers -plays the tape the first time -asks Ss to give their answers -plays the tape the second time to check their answers -gives feedback The key: 1. D 2. B 3. B 4. C • Task 2 -asks Ss to read the questions and guess the answers -has Ss to listen to the tape and do the task -asks Ss to give their answers -plays the tape again -asks Ss to compare their answers with their partners -asks Ss to give their answers -gives feedback(T may play the tape to check their answers) The key: 1. It took place in Perth. 2. 90 % of the Ss -get the copied papers -listen to the teacher’s instructions -hand in the papers, listen and answer -listen to the teacher -listen and answer the questions -listen and answer -repeat the words listen and guess the meaning of the new words and take notes -listen to the teacher -read the statements in task 1 and think of the answers -listen to the tape and do the task -give their answers -listen and answer -read the questions and guess the answers -listen to the tape and do the task -give their answers -listen to the tape again -share their answers with their partners -give their answers -listen and answer -take notes in their note-books Unit 5: ILLITERACY Part: Listening Content New words: + survey (n) + effective (a) + mature (a) – maturity (n) + self- respect (n) + academic ( a) • Task 1 The keys: 1. D 2. B 3. B 4. C • Task 2 The keys:
  • 68.
    • Homework: (3ms) AsksSs to write in their notebooks: + revise “describing a chart” of unit 16 in E.L 10. + write a short paragraph (100 words) about “What makes an effective school” • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare part: “Writing” • Self –evaluation: Do you agree with the following? In an effective school Yes No The teacher encourages Ss to set realistic goads for their own learning The teacher is motivating and interested in what Ss do Ss are involved in making decisions which have a direct effect on themselves Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 69.
    __________________________________________________________________________ Date of teaching: Period: 29 Unit 5: ILLITERACY Part: Writing AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content: To provide Ss with practice describing information in a table • Language function: Practicing describing tables • Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + interpret information presented in tables + identify language to be used for describing tables + write descriptions of tables 1. Language: a) Vocabulary : trend, data, the nouns / verbs/ adjs / advs in the table b) Grammar : 2. Skills: Writing 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/activities: Gap- fill, discussion 5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk, pare board 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) c. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson:(no checking) • Presentation of the new material: (39ms) Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 70.
    Lesson Plan -English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong Tim e Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 4ms 12ms I. Warm up -draws on the b/b a table like this Country 1995 2000 China 45% 56% Korea 29% 67% -asks Ss to tell where they see it -gives feedback(in geography) -tells the aim of the lesson: Describing tables II. Pre-Writing • Task 1 -asks Ss to open their books -provides some new words + trend (n) (Translation) + data (n) (Translation) + decline (v)= decrease + dramatically ( adv) -asks Ss to do the task in 4 minutes -asks Ss to give their answers -gives feedback The keys: 1. varied 2. rise 3. declined 4. different 5. went up 6. dramatically -elicits the languages used to describe a table from the passage -hangs the chart on the b/b ( The table about Ns / Vs / Adjs / Advs in the textbook) -asks Ss to tell: 1. Topic sentence of the passage 2. Supporting sentences 3. Concluding sentence 4. Verb tenses 5. expressions of changes -gives feedback -introduces the useful language + The table shows / describes .. + As can be seen from the data in the table … • Task 2 -asks Ss to read the table of literacy rates in Sunshine country from 1998 - 2997 -helps Ss describe the table by making questions: 1. What is the topic of the table? 2. Does it describe the past, present or future? 3. What patterns are shown? + Which region had the highest rate of literacy in 1998? / 2002?... … III. While-writing -ask Ss to work in individually and describe the table, basing on the suggestions above -look at the b/b -listen and give the answer -listen and answer -listen to the teacher -open their books -listen and guess the meaning of the word -do the task in the allotted time -give their answers -listen ad answer -listen and take notes -look at the chart on the b/b -listen and answer -take notes in their notebooks -listen and answer -listen to the teacher’s instructions -read the table -listen and answer the questions -work in individually and Unit 5: ILLITERACY Part: Writing Content Describing tables New words: + trend (n) + data (n) + decline (v) = decrease + dramatically ( adv) • Task 1 The keys: 1.varied 2. rise 3. declined 4. different 5. went up 6. dramatically 1. Topic sentence of the passage 2. Supporting sentences 3. Concluding sentence 4. Verb tenses 5. expressions of changes
  • 71.
    • Homework: (5ms) AsksSs to correct the mistakes and write the complete letter in their note books • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare par: “Language Focus” • Self –evaluation: ________________________________________________________________________________ Date of teaching: Period : 30 Unit 5: ILLITERACY Part: Language Focus AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + distinguish the clusters /pl / ,/ bl / / pr/ and / br/ and pronounce them exactly + use the structures with reported speech with To- Inf to solve communicative task 1. Vocabulary: + the words with the clusters /pl / ,/ bl / / pr/ and / br/ in: please, black, pride, brown … 2. Structure: Reported speech with To- Inf 3. Procedures: Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 72.
    Lesson Plan -English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong I. Warm- up (5ms) -greets Ss -has a short chat with Ss II. Checking up Previous knowledge( no checking because the lesson is long) III. Content of the lesson (35ms) • Pronunciation (10ms) -asks Ss to read aloud the sentence “ Mrs Brown is proud of her platinum blonde” -gives feedback -introduces the clusters /pl /, / bl / / pr/ and / br/ -tells the aim of the lesson : practice the clusters /pl /, / bl / / pr/ and / br/ in a single word and practise them in sentences -introduces some more in the text book -has Ss listen and repeat the words -calls some Ss to stand up and repeat -helps Ss practice the sentences containing the target sounds -calls some pairs to stand up and practice -gives feedback • Grammar (25ms) Presentation and Exercises A. Presentation : Reported Speech with infinitives -asks Ss to reported this sentence 1. “Close your books” said the teacher -> The teacher asked/ told…… 2. “ You should give up smoking, Nam,” said the doctor. -> The doctor advised Nam…. -gives feedback 1. The teacher asked/ told us to close our books. 2. The doctor advised Nam to give up smoking. -tells the aim of the grammatical point: “Reported Speech with To- Inf” -helps Ss revise the form, meaning and use Form: V + Object + (NOT) + To-inf Meaning and use: it is used to report other’s orders, requests, advice, suggestions, … -helps Ss revise the form and uses of Gerund -asks Ss t give some mote examples -gives feedback B. Exercise 1: -gives instructions -lets Ss do exercise 1 in 5 ms -asks Ss to give their answers -gives feedback The keys: 1. They promised to come back again. 2. The lifeguard advised us not to swim too far from the shore. 3. John asked Peter to close the window. 4. …… C. Exercise 2: -gives instructions -lets Ss do exercise 2 in 5 ms
  • 73.
    • Self –evaluation: _________________________________________________________________ Dateof teaching: Period : 31 Unit 6: COMPETITIONS Part: Reading AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content : + To introduce Ss to the passage about competitions + To provide Ss with some new words relating to the topic • Language function: + Reading the passage for specific information and identifying meaning in context • Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: - develop their reading comprehension - use the information they have read to discuss the related topic 1. Language: a) Vocabulary: sponsor, recite, announce, … b) Grammar : no structure 2. Skills: Reading 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/ activities: Pair work, group work, questions – answer, matching, completion 5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk, pictures 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) f. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss + Has a short chat with the Ss b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson: (no checking) • Presentation of the new material: (40ms) Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 74.
    Lesson Plan -English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong Tim e Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 4ms 8ms 23ms I. Lead-in -shows out some pictures in the textbook -asks Ss to look at the pictures and tell the names -gives feedback -asks Ss to tell some more -makes questions: 1. Have you ever participate in competitions like these? 2. Which of these competitions do you like most? Why? -gives feedback -tells the aim of the lesson: Competitions II. Before you read -asks Ss work in pairs and answer the questions in the textbook -gives feedback -introduces some new words: New words: + announce ( v) ( Translation) + maximum ( a) ( Example) + sponsor (v, n) ( Explanation) + recite ( v) (Example) -checks understanding of the new words III. While you read • Task 1 -gives instructions -explains some new words in column b if necessary -asks Ss to work in groups, read the passage and identify the meaning in context -lets Ss do the task in 5 ms -asks Ss to give their answers -gives feedback The keys: 1. d 2. f 3. e 4. c 5. b 6. a • Task 2 -gives instructions -asks Ss to work in pairs, read and answer the questions -lets Ss do the task in 5 ms -asks Ss to give their answers -gives feedback The keys: 1. The representatives of three class of the school… 2. Its aim was to stimulate the sprit of learning E.L among Ss 3. The student’s parents Society 4. …….. • Task 3 -asks Ss to read the third paragraph -look at the pictures and answer -listen and answer -tell some more -listen and answer the teacher’s questions -listen and answer -listen to the teacher -work in pairs and answer the questions -listen and answer -listen and guess the meaning of the new words -copy down the new words in their note-books -listen and answer -listen to the teacher’s instructions -work in groups and do the task -do the task in the allotted time -give their answers -listen and answer -listen to the teacher’s instructions -work in pairs and do the task in the allotted time -give their answers -listen and answer -listen to the teacher’s Unit 6: Competitions Part: Reading Content New words: + announce ( v) + maximum ( a) + sponsor (v, n + recite ( v) • Task 1 The keys: 1. d 2. f 3. e 4. c 5. b 6. a • Task 2 Answer the questions: The keys: 1. The representatives of three class of the school… 2. Its aim was to stimulate the sprit of learning E.L among Ss 3. The student’s parents Society
  • 75.
    • Homework: (4ms) AsksSs to write in their notebooks: + learn the lesson well. + write a short paragraph about a competition they took part in • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare part: “Speaking” • Self –evaluation: _________________________________________________________________ Date of teaching: Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 76.
    Period : 32 Unit6: COMPETITIONS Part: Speaking AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content : + To enable Ss to use appropriate language to talk about a competition or contest • Language function: + Asking for and giving information about types of competitions • Educational aim : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + talk about a competition or contest + ask for and give information about types of competitions 1. Language: a) Vocabulary: old Vocabulary b) Grammar : structures of asking for and giving opinion 2. Skills: Speaking 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/activities: Pair work, group works, discussion, pictures 5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) k. Warm- up: Greets the Ss l. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson: (5ms) - Asks Ss to give the words in E.L with the following definitions 1. encourage or make sth more active (-> stimulate) 2. happening or done once every year (-> annual) 3. altogether or as a total (-> in all) 4. without problems or difficulties (-> smoothly) Question: “ What was the aim of the competition according to the passage?” (-> its aim was to stimulate the sprit of learning E.L among Ss) - Give feedback and marks • Presentation of the new material: (34ms) Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 5ms I. Lead-in -shows out some pictures and gets Ss to tell the names : 1. “Who wants to be the millionaire” 2. “ Ring the golden bell” 3. “Miss world” -gives feedback -tells the aim of the lesson: Talking about competitions and -look at the pictures and answer -listen and answer -listen to the teacher -tell some competitions and contest Unit 6: COMPETITIONS Part: Speaking Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 77.
    3ms 24ms contests II. Pre- Practice -asksSs to tell some competitions and contests they know -makes some questions: 2. Which one do you like? Why? 3. Have you ever taken part in such competitions and contests like that? -gives feedback III. Practice • Task 1 -introduces the task -explains the meaning of the new word + sculpture (n) -asks Ss to name some contests / competitions under each category Eg: General knowledge quiz includes “ Hanh trinh van hoa” “Ai la trieu phu” “ Duong len dinh Olympia”.. Singing contests: “ Sao mai diem hen”, “ Bai hat viet”… -asks Ss to work individually and do the task -lets Ss do the task in 3 ms -asks Ss to compare with their partner’s -calls on some Ss to stand up and express their ideas -gives feedback • Task 2 -asks Ss to ask their partner how they feel about each type of competitions/ contests -asks Ss to look at the model in task 2 and read it aloud -introduces the table of useful language and explains new words if necessary -elicits the structures that are used for asking for and giving opinion + Asking for opinion: What do you think about…? What’s your opinion about…? How do you feel about….? Do you like…..? + Giving opinion: I think ……. -listen and answer the teacher’s questions -listen and answer -listen to the teacher -listen and guess the meaning of the words -name some contests / competitions -work individually and do the task in the allotted time -compare with their partner’s -stand up and express their ideas -listen and answer -listen to the teacher’s instructions -look at the chart the model in task 2 -listen to the teacher -listen and take notes -work in pairs and make similar dialogues -do the task in the allotted time -stand up and practice the conversation Content • Task 1 New word: + sculpture (n) • Task 2 + Asking for opinion: What do you think about…? What’s your opinion about…? How do you feel about….? Do you like…..? + Giving opinion: I think ……. Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 78.
    -asks Ss towork in pairs and make similar dialogues -lets Ss prepare in 3 ms -calls on some pairs to stand up and perform -gives feedback • Task 3 -puts Ss into groups of 3 / 4 and choose the leader of the group -asks Ss to choose a famous T.V game/ talent show/ competition or contest and work out details about it following the suggestions in task 3( They should not let other groups know what it is) -lets Ss prepare the task in 5ms -calls on each representative to come to the front. The whole class will ask questions about the game / competition/ contest and guess what it is -gives feedback -listen and answer -sit in groups -listen to the teacher’s instructions -prepare the task in the allotted time -give their answers -listen and answer • Task 3 If having enough time , asks Ss to play game “ Guessing game” - divides Ss into 2 groups -gives instructions” T will read the cues and Ss will name the programs as quickly as possible. One correct answer with the first cue earns the group 3 marks, with the second cue 2 point, and the third cue one point. Which group with more points will be the winner” 1. a. It’s a competition for young girl b. The girls are accessed based on their physical appearance and general knowledge c. This is done through fashion shows and answering the questions 2. a. It is an international game held every 4 years b. 2 teams of 11 players play against each other each time c. Brazil has won the champion 5 times Expected answers: 1. Beauty contest 2. The world cup • Homework: (5ms) Asks Ss to write in their notebooks: write a short paragraph about a game show / contest they like, using the suggestions: + What type of game show / contest is it? + When and where does it take place? + Who organize it? + Who participate in? + Why do you like it? • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare part: “Listening” • Self –evaluation: Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 79.
    ________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Date of teaching: Period: 33 Unit 6: COMPETITIONS Part: Listening AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content: + To encourage Ss to listen to a monologue about a marathon race + To help Ss practice listening • Language function: Listening for gist and specific information • Educational aim: At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + develop extensive listening skills + use the information they have listened to for other communicative tasks 1. Language: a) Vocabulary : athletic, clock, association, … b) Grammar : no structures 2. Skills: Listening- Speaking 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/activities: Group work, question-answer, T- F statement 5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk, tape, pictures 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) f. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance Checking up previous lesson: (5ms) Asks Ss to tell a game show/ contest he / she likes most and tells the reason Give feedback • Presentation of the new material: (35ms) Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 80.
    Lesson Plan -English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong Tim e Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 6ms 6ms I. Lead-in -divides Ss into 4 groups and asks them to play game” Jumble words” -gives out each groups one card containing 10 word whose letters are jumbled -gives instructions” rearrange the letters to make the meaning words in 3 ms. Which group finishing the task first with the most correct words will be the winner) -lets Ss do the task in 3ms -collects the cards and gives feedback -asks Ss to guess the topic for the listening -tells the topic of the lesson: A marathon race II. Before you listen -asks Ss to look at the pictures in the textbook -makes some questions: 1. What do you see in the picture? 2. What is vent is it? 3. Where do you think the Boston Marathon might take place? 4. Who can participate in it? -gives feedback (It is one of the oldest races in the US and held every year in mid April) -lets Ss repeat the words -introduces some new words + race (n) ( Example) + athletic (n) (picture) + association (n) (Translation) + clock (v) (Situation- Example) -sets the situation: “You are going to listen to monologue about the Boston Marathon. Listen and do some tasks below” III. While you listen • Task 1 -asks Ss to read the statements carefully in task 1 and work out what information they need to concentrate on while listening -plays the tape the first time -asks Ss to give their answers -plays the tape the second time to -sit in groups -get the cards -listen to the teacher’s instructions -do the task in 3ms -hand in the cards, listen and answer -guess the topic -listen to the teacher -look at the pictures -listen and answer the questions -listen and answer -repeat the words -listen and guess the meaning of the new words and take notes -listen to the teacher -read the statements in task 1 and underline the key words -listen to the tape and do the task -give their answers -listen and answer Unit 6: COMPETITIONS Part: Listening Content New words: + race (n) + athletic (n) + association (n) + clock (v) • Task 1 The keys: 1. T 2. T 3. F (2 hours 50ms and 10 seconds) 4. F (1967) 5. T 6.F ( pass through 13 towns and ends in centre of Boston)
  • 81.
    • Homework: (4ms) AsksSs to write in their notebooks: + give some special information about these people” Nguyen Chi Dong, Nguyen Thi Tinh, Nguyen Lan Anh, Pham Tran Khanh Doan, …”. • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare part: “Writing” • Self –evaluation: The card – “Jumble words” 1. tohamarn -> marathon 2. sifihn -> finish 3. renurn -> runner 4. chiatelt -> athletic 5. crae -> race 6. conpahim -> champion 7. nurning -> running 8. centadis -> distance 9. storp -> sport 10. cirang -> racing Date of teaching: Period : 34 Unit 6: COMPETITIONS Part: Writing AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content: To provide Ss with practice writing a letter of reply • Language function: Practicing writing a letter of reply • Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + write a letter of reply to the request of information 1. Language: a) Vocabulary : review b) Grammar : structures: “Thank you for …….”, “It’s our pleasure to ……” 2. Skills: Writing 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/activities: Explanation, question- answer Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 82.
    5. Teaching aidsneeded: Textbooks, board, chalk, pare board 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) d. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson:(no checking) • Presentation of the new material: (39ms) Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 83.
    Lesson Plan -English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 4ms 12ms I. Warm up -asks Ss if they want to participate in a competition/ contest, what information about the competition/ contest they would like to know and look for (using network) What you want to know about the competition/ contest -make a question” If you want to let the other know these information, what kind of letter will you write?” -gives feedback -tells the aim of the lesson: Writing a letter of reply II. Pre-Writing • Task 1 -asks Ss to open their books and read the letter -provides some new words + entry (v) (Translation) + procedure (n) (Translation) + venue (n) a place to meet each other + participant (n) the person who participate in the competition -asks Ss read the letter and identify : + Who wrote the letter? + For what purpose? + What information requested? -lets Ss do the task in 4 minutes -asks Ss to give their answers -gives feedback Suggested answers: + Thu Trang + To participate in the E.L speaking competition + Number of participants, entry procedures, venue, date and time, phone number and e-mail • Task 2 -asks Ss to read the requirements in task 2 -asks Ss to retell the form of a letter -reminds Ss of the format and the language of a formal letter (they’ve learnt in unit 4) -look at the b/b and answer -listen and give the answer the teacher’s question -listen and answer -listen to the teacher -open their books -listen and guess the meaning of the word -do the task in the allotted time -give their answers -listen ad answer -read the requirements -retell the form of a letter -listen and answer -work in individually and write Unit 6: COMPETITION S Part: Writing Content Writing a letter of reply New words: + entry (v) + procedure (n) + venue (n) a place to meet each other + participant (n) • Task 1 + Who wrote the letter? + For what purpose? + What information requested? Suggested answers: +Thu Trang + To participate in E.L the speaking competition + Number of participants, entry procedures, venue, date and time, phone number and e-mail
  • 84.
    • Homework: (5ms) -Asks Ss to correct the mistakes and write the complete letter in their note books _______________________________________________________________________________________ - “You are working at the Organizing Committee for Vietnam Idol. A young singer name Lan wrote you a letter to ask for information about the contest. Write her a reply, including in your letter the following information”: - The date and time - The venue - The entry procedure - The contact person - The contact phone number • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare par: “Language Focus” • Self –evaluation: Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 85.
    __________________________________________________________________________ Date of teaching: Period: 35 Unit 6: COMPETITIONS Part: Language Focus AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + distinguish the clusters /tr/ ,/ dr/ and / tw / and pronounce them exactly + use the structures with reported speech with Gerund to solve communicative task 1. Vocabulary: The words with the clusters tr/ ,/ dr/ and / tw/ in: traffic, drive, twelve,… 2. Structure: V + (O) + Preposition + (NOT) + Ving 3. Procedures: Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 86.
    Lesson Plan -English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong I. Warm- up (5ms) -greets Ss -has a short chat with Ss II. Checking up Previous knowledge( no checking) III. Content of the lesson (35ms) • Pronunciation -asks Ss to play game -gives instructions” One student goes to the b/b , the teacher will shows him / her three pictures. The student sees the pictures in 1 minute then he/ she has to act or mime that the others will guess what are the pictures” Picture1: a pair of trousers Picture1: a dress Picture1: number 12 -writes on the b/b : trousers , dress, twelve -has Ss read aloud the words -tells the aim of the task : the clusters /tr/ ,/ dr/ and / tw / -introduces some more in the text book -has Ss listen and repeat the words -calls some Ss to stand up and repeat -helps Ss practice the sentences -calls some Ss to stand up and speak out -gives feedback • Grammar Revision and Exercises A. Revision : Reported Speech with gerund Form: V + (Object) + Preposition + (NOT) + V-ing Thank (for) , congratulation (on), apologize (for) …….. Meaning and use: it is used to report other’s thanking, apologies, accusation, … Example: “ Thank for helping me,” Mary said -> Mary thanked me for helping her. “ I’m sorry I didn’t wait for you,” Tom said to me. -> Tom apologized for not waiting for me. B. Exercises: ( in the textbook) Exercise 1 -gives instructions -lets Ss do exercise 1 in 5 ms -asks Ss to come to b/b and write down their sentences - gives feedback The keys: 1. John congratulated us on passing our exams. 2. Mary apologized for not phoning me earlier. 3. Peter insisted on driving Linda to the station. 4. The teacher accused the boy of not paying attention to what he had said. 5. …. Exercise 2 -gives instructions -lets Ss do exercise 2 in 5 ms -asks Ss to come to b/b and write down their sentences - gives feedback The keys: 1. Tom insisted on paying for the meal.
  • 87.
    • Self –evaluation: Dateof teaching: Period : 39 Unit 7: WORLD POPULATION Part: Reading AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content : + To introduce Ss to the passage about world population + To provide Ss with some new words relating to the topic • Language function: + Reading the passage for specific information and guessing meaning in context • Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: - develop their reading comprehension - use the information they have read to discuss the related topic 1. Language: a) Vocabulary: birth- control method, double, figure, … b) Grammar : no structure 2. Skills: Reading 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/ activities: Pair work, group work, questions – answer, matching, gap-filling 5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk, pictures 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) g. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss + Has a short chat with the Ss b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson: (no checking because they’ve just had a 45 minute test) • Presentation of the new material: (40ms) Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 88.
    Lesson Plan -English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong Tim e Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 4ms 8ms 15ms I. Lead-in -asks Ss to tell the world’s problems education the world’s problems social evil environment -shows out the chart: Year Population 10,000 B.C 10 million 1750 625 million 1985 5760 million 2000 6,6 billion 2015 over 7 billion -asks Ss to give their comments on the figures -gives feedback -tells the aim of the lesson: World population II. Before you read -asks Ss to look at the pictures in the textbook -asks Ss work in pairs and discuss the questions in the textbook on page 81 -gives feedback -introduces some new words: New words: + figure ( n) (illustration)- 1,2,3.. + birth- control method (Explanation) + double ( v) (Example) + It’s time S.b did sth -checks understanding of the new words III. While you read • Task 1 -gives instructions” read through the sentences and identify part of speech of the words to fill in each blank. Then choose the most suitable word from the box to fill in the blank, paying attention to their right form” -asks Ss to work individually to do the task -lets Ss do the task in 3 ms -asks Ss to give their answers -gives feedback The keys: 1. although 2. method 3. increases 4. resources 5. figures 6. limit 7. international 8. control -tell the world’s problems -look at the chart -give their comments on the figures -listen and answer -listen to the teacher -look at the pictures in the textbook -work in pairs and discuss the questions -listen and answer -listen and guess the meaning of the new words -copy down the new words in their note-books -listen to the teacher’s instructions -work individually to do the task in the allotted time -give their answers -listen and answer Unit 7: WORLD POPULATION Part: Reading Content New words: + figure ( n) - 1,2,3.. + birth- control method + double ( v) + It’s time S.b did sth Eg: It’s time you went to bed (Ñaõ ñeán luùc con phaûi ñi nguû roài) • Task 1 The keys: 1. although 2. method 3. increases 4. resources 5. figures 6. limit 7. international 8. control
  • 89.
    • Homework: (4ms) AsksSs to write in their notebooks: + learn the lesson well. + write a short paragraph about the disadvantages of overpopulation and suggest some solution to solve the problem • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare part: “Speaking” • Self –evaluation: _____________________________________________________________________________________ Date of teaching: Period : 40 Unit 7: WORLD POPULATION Part: Speaking AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content : + To enable Ss to use appropriate language to talk about problems of overpopulation and offering solutions • Language function: + Talking about the causes of population explosion, problems of overpopulation and solutions to these problems • Educational aim : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + talk about the causes of population explosion, problems of overpopulation and solutions to these problems 1. Language: a) Vocabulary: words in “useful language”: exercise, implement, carry out… b) Grammar : no structures 2. Skills: Speaking 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/activities: Pair work, group works, discussion, pictures 5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) m. Warm- up: Greets the Ss n. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson: (5ms) - Asks Ss to give the words in E.L 1. gaáp ñoâi 2. caùc bieän phaùp haïn cheá sinh ñeû 3. con soá Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 90.
    - Asks aquestion: Why can’t women in the world limit the size of their families?” (-> Because they know of no safe way to have fewer children ) - Give feedback • Presentation of the new material: (34ms) Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 5ms 9ms I. Lead-in -asks Ss to find out causes of population explosion -gives feedback Possible causes: High birth rates Illiteracy Desire to have male children Having many children means happiness Unwillingness to practice contraception and abortion … -makes a question: “What should we do to solve this problem?” -gives feedback -tells the aim of the lesson: Talking about the causes of population explosion, problems of overpopulation and solutions to these problems II. Pre- Practice • Task 1 -asks Ss to work in pairs and put the causes in order of important and explain why Eg: “I think people are not properly educated is the most important because people are not properly educated so they feel free to have children….” -calls on some Ss to present their ideas -gives feedback III. Practice • Task 2 -asks Ss discuss and list the problems facing poor and overpopulated countries -introduces some more by asking them to combine the words in -find out causes of population explosion and answer -listen and answer -listen and answer the question -listen and answer -listen to the teacher -work in pairs and do the task -stand up and present their ideas -listen and answer -discuss and list the problems facing poor and overpopulated countries -listen to the teacher -do the task Unit 7: WORLD POPULATION Part: Speaking Content • Task 1 Possible causes: High birth rates Illiteracy Desire to have male children Having many children means happiness Unwillingness to practice contraception and abortion … Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 91.
    20ms useful language andexplains new words if necessary -calls on some Ss to report their results -gives feedback Suggested answers: +poor living condition, low living standard, not enough food, lack / shortage of school / hospital / teachers/ doctor, nurses… + unemployment , social evils, illiteracy … • Task 3 -puts Ss into groups of 6 / 7 and choose the leader of the group -lets Ss read “useful language” and elicits some new words: + to exercise (v) -to implement + to carry out (v) -asks Ss to find out other solutions to the problems of overpopulation -lets Ss prepare the task in 3ms -goes around to offer help -calls on each representative to represent -gives feedback • Task 4 -asks Ss to work in groups again and work out the problems of overpopulation and offer solutions to these problems -provides Ss with some transition signals to make their presentation coherent +first / firstly, second, next .. + also, beside, moreover, in addition, further more… + on the other hand, however, but + the first problem is that, the next solution is that… -lets Ss prepare in 3 minutes -calls on each representative to represent -gives feedback -stand up and report their results -listen and answer -listen to the teacher’s instructions -look at the chart the model in task 2 -listen to the teacher -sit in group -choose the leader of the group -read “useful language” -listen and guess the meaning of the words -copy down in their note- books -prepare the task in the allotted time -present their results -listen and answer -listen to the teacher’s instructions -listen and take notes -prepare the task in the allotted time -present in front of the class -listen and answer • Task 2 Suggested answers: +poor living condition, low living standard, not enough food, lack / shortage of school / hospital / teachers/ doctor, nurses… + unemployment , social evils, illiteracy … • Task 3 + to exercise (v) -to implement + to carry out (v) • Task 4 Transition signals +first / firstly, second, next .. + also, beside, moreover, in addition, further more… + on the other hand, however, but + the first problem is that, the next solution is that… • Homework: (5ms) Asks Ss to write in their notebooks: write a short paragraph about the causes of overpopulation, the problems facing poor and overpopulated countries and work out solutions to these problems • Preparation for the next lesson: Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 92.
    Asks Ss toprepare part: “Listening” • Self –evaluation: _______________________________________________________________________________________ Date of teaching: Period : 41 Unit 7: WORLD POPULATION Part: Listening AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content: + To encourage Ss to listen to a monologue about a world population expert talking about the world population + To help Ss practice listening • Language function: Listening for general and for specific information • Educational aim: At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + develop extensive listening skills + use the information they have listened to for other communicative tasks 1. Language: a) Vocabulary : rank, generation , improvement, … b) Grammar : no structures 2. Skills: Listening- Speaking 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/activities: Group work, question-answer, multiple choice, game, discussion 5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk, tape 6. Procedures: Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 93.
    • Stabilization: (1m) g.Warm- up: + Greets the Ss b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson: (5ms) Asks Ss to tell some problems of overpopulation and offer some solutions to these problems Give feedback • Presentation of the new material: (35ms) Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 94.
    Lesson Plan -English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong Tim e Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 6ms 6ms I. Lead-in -divides Ss into 4 groups and asks them to play game” Hangman” -gives instructions” T gives a secret word and Ss will guess it by telling what letters they think there are in the word. If Ss choose a letter that appears one or more times in the secret word, the letters and their positions will be revealed and Ss keep on guessing the next letter . On the other hand, if Ss guess a letter that is not in the secret word, then a piece of the man being hanged will be added to the gallows and they will lose their turn. The game continue until all the letters are revealed” The word” overpopulation” _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ -conducts the game -tells the topic of the lesson: World population II. Before you listen -asks Ss some questions in the textbook 1. Do you think that our world is overpopulated? 2. What continent has the largest population? -gives feedback Suggested answers: 1. Yes, because it has more than 6 billion people. 2. Asia has the largest population with china the most populated country in the world and India the second -lets Ss repeat the words -introduces some new words + Latin America (n) ( Example) + rank (n, v) ( Example) + generation (n) (Translation) + improve (v) -> improvement (n) -sets the situation: “You are going to listen to Dr. Brown, a population expert, talk about the world population. Listen and do some tasks below” III. While you listen • Task 1 -asks Ss to read the statements in task 1 and guess the answers -plays the tape the first time -sit in groups -listen to the teacher’s instructions -play the game -listen to the teacher -listen and answer the questions -listen and answer -repeat the words listen and guess the meaning of the new words and take notes -listen to the teacher -read the statements in task 1 and guess the answers -listen to the tape and do the task Unit 7: WORLD POPULATION Part: Listening Content New words: + Latin America (n) + rank (n, v) + generation (n) + improve (v) -> improvement (n) • Task 1 The keys: 1. A 2. D 3. C 4. D 5. A 6.C • Task 2 The keys: 1. According to expert, by the year 2015, the population of the world will be over 7 billion 2. He said that the world growth rates in some parts of
  • 95.
    • Homework: (4ms) AsksSs to write in their notebooks: + write a summary of the listening passage • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare part: “Writing” • Self –evaluation: Date of teaching: Period : 42 Unit 7: WORLD POPULATION Part: Writing AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content: To provide Ss with practice interpreting statistics on population from a chart • Language function: Practicing writing descriptions of pie charts • Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + write descriptions of pie charts, using appropriate language 1. Language: a) Vocabulary : words in “ Useful language” b) Grammar : structures with comparatives 2. Skills: Writing 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/activities: Explanation, question- answer 5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk, pare board 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) e. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 96.
    • Checking upprevious lesson:(no checking because the teacher wants to save time So that Ss can have more time to practise writing) • Presentation of the new material: (39ms) Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 97.
    Lesson Plan -English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 8ms 8ms I. Warm up -asks Ss to close their books and play game “ Competition game- Pie chart drawing” -divides Ss into 6 groups -gives instructions” Ss will get a paper in which there is a table and transfer the table into a pie chart. The group with the quickest and most correct answer will be the winner” The table Countries Population South Asia 32% East Asia 26% Europe 15% Africa 11% Latin America 8% Northern America 6% Oceania 2% -conduct the game -asks Ss to open their books , look at the pie chart and give their comments on the distribution of world population -gives feedback -tells the aim of the lesson: Writing description of pie charts II. Pre-Writing -asks Ss to analyze the chart following the questions + What does the pie chart show? + Is the population distributed evenly? + Where does most of the world population live? + Which region has the largest population? Which comes second?.. + Which region has the smallest population? -lets Ss do the task in 4 minutes -asks Ss to give their answers -gives feedback Suggested answers: + It shows the distribution of the world population by region + No, it isn’t + most of the world population -close their books -sit in groups -listen to the teacher’s instructions -play the game -open their books , look at the pie chart and give their comments -listen and answer -listen to the teacher -look at the chart and analyze the chart -do the task in the allotted time -give their answers -listen ad answer -listen and take notes Unit 7: WORLD POPULATION Part: Writing Content Writing description of pie charts Answer the questions + What does the pie chart show? + Is the population distributed evenly? + Where does most of the world population live? + Which region has the largest population? Which comes second?.. + Which region has the smallest population? • Task 1 + Who wrote the letter? + For what purpose? + What information requested? Suggested answers: + It shows the distribution of the world population by region + No, it isn’t + most of the world population lives in South and
  • 98.
    • Homework: (5ms) -Asks Ss to correct the mistakes and write the complete letter in their note books - “The chart shows the number of Ss in a class who achieved each grade” Fail 8% Distinction 21% Pass Merit 38% 33% - Asks Ss to write a description of the pie chart • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare par: “Language Focus” • Self –evaluation: Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 99.
    ________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Date of teaching: Period: 43 Unit 7: WORLD POPULATION Part: Language Focus AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + distinguish the clusters /kl/ ,/ gl/ , / kr/, / gr/ and / kw / and pronounce them exactly + use the conditional sentences – type 1, 2, 3 and conditional sentences in reported speech appropriately. 1. Vocabulary: The words with the clusters /kl/ ,/ gl/ , / kr/, / gr/ and / kw / in: clean, glass, crow, grow, quarrel,… 2. Structure: structures with If - clauses 3. Procedures: Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 100.
    Lesson Plan -English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong I. Warm- up (5ms) -greets Ss -has a short chat with Ss II. Checking up Previous knowledge( no checking) III. Content of the lesson (35ms) • Pronunciation -asks Ss to give words with the clusters /kl/ ,/ gl/ , / kr/, / gr/ and / kw / as much as possible -has Ss read aloud the words -tells the aim of the task : the clusters /kl/ ,/ gl/ , / kr/, / gr/ and / kw / -introduces some more in the text book -has Ss listen and repeat the words -calls some Ss to stand up and repeat -helps Ss practice the dialogue -calls some pairs to stand up and practice -gives feedback • Grammar Revision and Exercises 1. Revision A. Revision 1 : The conditional sentence- type 1 Form: If Clause , Main Clause Use Present tense future tense Real situation in the present (will+ V bare inf) or future If the bus doesn’t come soon, I’ll be late for school. B. Revision 2 : The conditional sentence- type 2 Form: If Clause , Main Clause Use Subjunctive - Unreal situation in the present (- Past tense) ( would/ could + V bare inf ) or future (- “To be” - WERE ) - To give an advice Eg: If I won a lot of money, I would travel around the world. If I were you, I wouldn’t argue with my employer. NOTES: “If”can be omitted when it is followed by “WERE”, we use “inversion” Eg: If she were taller, she could become a model. -> Were she taller, she could become a model. c. Revision 3 : The conditional sentence- type 3 Form: If Clause , Main Clause Use Past perfect - Unreal
  • 101.
    • Self –evaluation: _______________________________________________________________________________________________ Dateof teaching: Period : 44 Unit 8: CELEBRATIONS Part: Reading AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content : + To introduce Ss to the passage about Tet in Vietnam + To provide Ss with some new words relating to the topic- celebrations • Language function: + Reading the passage for specific information and guessing meaning in context • Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: - develop their reading comprehension - use the information they have read to discuss the related topic 1. Language: a) Vocabulary: celebration, decorate, apricot blossom,… b) Grammar : no structure 2. Skills: Reading 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/ activities: Pair work, group work, questions – answer, matching, gap-filling 5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk, pictures 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) h. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss + Has a short chat with the Ss b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson: (5ms) Asks Ss to make conditional sentences: 1. You didn’t study hard, so you failed the exam. 2. I don’t visit you because I don’t have time. Gives feedback: 1. If you had studied hard, you wouldn’t have failed the exam. 2. If I had time, I would visit you. • Presentation of the new material: (35ms) Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 102.
    Lesson Plan -English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong Tim e Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 4ms 8ms 15ms I. Lead-in -asks Ss to think of the celebrations in a year Suggested answers: + Mother’s Day + Christmas Day + Teacher’s Day + Vietnam National Day + Women’s Day + Valentine Day + Tet holiday + Mid fall festival … -makes some questions: 1. What celebrations do you like best? 2. What do you often do on these day? -gives feedback -shows the picture in the textbook and asks Ss tell what celebration it is -asks Ss “Do you like Tet holiday? Why?” -tells the aim of the lesson: Celebrations – Tet holiday II. Before you read -asks Ss work in pairs and tell which of the activities in the book they enjoy doing most at Tet -calls some Ss to stand up and present -gives feedback -introduces some new words: New words: + peach blossom (Picture) + apricot blossom (Picture) + kumquat tree (Picture) + positive comments + spread (v) : (Translation) -checks understanding of the new words III. While you read • Task 1 -gives instructions” read the passage quickly and stop at the lines that contain these words to guess the meaning” -asks Ss to work individually to -think of the celebrations in a year -listen and answer the teacher’s questions -listen and answer -look at the pictures in the textbook -listen and answer the teacher’s questions -listen to the teacher -work in pairs and do the task -stand up and present -listen and answer -listen and guess the meaning of the new words -copy down the new words in their note-books -listen and answer -listen to the teacher’s instructions -work individually to do the task in the allotted time -give their answers -listen and answer Unit 8: CELEBRATIONS Part: Reading Content New words: + peach blossom + apricot blossom + kumquat tree + positive comments + spread (v) • Task 1 The keys: 1. hoaønh traùng 2. thuoäc veà ngheà noâng 3. baêng roân, khaåu hieäu 4. caàu nguyeän 5. taùo taåm ñöôøng 6. söï noâ nöùc, nhoän nhòp • Task 2
  • 103.
    • Homework: (4ms) AsksSs to write in their notebooks: + learn the lesson well. + talk about their last Tet holiday, following the main points in the textbook • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare part: “Speaking” • Self –evaluation: _____________________________________________________________________________________ Date of teaching: Period : 45 Unit 8: CELEBRATIONS Part: Speaking AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content : + To enable Ss to use appropriate language to talk about the celebrations and popular holidays in Vietnam and in the world • Language function: + Talking about the celebration of Tet and other festivals’ activities • Educational aim : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + talk about the celebrations and popular holidays in Vietnam and in the world 1. Language: a) Vocabulary: Valentine, harvest, mask parade… b) Grammar : It is the time when… / Wh- questions 2. Skills: Speaking 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/activities: Pair work, group works, discussion, pictures 5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) o. Warm- up: Greets the Ss p. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson: (5ms) - Asks Ss to give the words in E.L 1. troïng ñaïi, hoaønh traùng 2. thuoäc veà ngheà noâng 3. hoa ñaøo 4. Talk about the last Tet holiday - Give feedback and marks Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 104.
    The keys: 1. grand2. agrarian 3. peach blossom 4. ( It’s up to the SS) • Presentation of the new material: (34ms) Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 5ms 9ms I. Lead-in -asks Ss to play game “ Competition game” -gives instructions” work in groups and quickly find out the names, dates and main activities of some celebrations or popular holidays in Vietnam or in the world in 3 minutes. Which groups having the most correct answers will be the winner” -conduct the game -tells the aim of the lesson: Talking about the celebrations or holidays in Vietnam or in the world II. Pre- Practice • Task 1 -introduces the model dialogue -asks Ss to work in pairs and practice the dialogue in 2 ms -calls on some pairs to practice it -gives feedback -asks Ss to draw the structures -gives feedback + Do you know that …? +WH- questions “What…? / When..?” +It’s the time when… -makes questions with the structures above 1. Do you know that Christmas Day is coming soon? 2. What is Christmas Day? 3. When is it exactly? 4. What do you often do on Christmas Day? III. Practice • Task 2 -asks Ss to look at the pictures in the textbook and work out the names of theses holidays -listen to the teacher’s instructions -play the game -listen to the teacher -look at their books and listen to the teacher -work in pairs and practice the dialogue in the allotted time -stand up and practice it -listen and answer -look at the dialogue and answer -take notes n their note books -listen and answer the teacher’s questions -look at the pictures in the textbook and work out the names of theses holidays -listen and answer Unit 8: CELEBRATIONS Part: Speaking Content • Task 1 + Do you know that …? +WH- questions: “What…? / When..?” +It’s the time when… Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 105.
    20ms -gives feedback Suggested answers: Picture1: Mid- Autumn Festival Picture 2: Thanksgiving Picture 3: Valentine’s Day -asks Ss to list the activities people usually do in these days -gives feedback -asks Ss to do the task on page 94 (matching) -asks Ss to give their answers -gives feedback The keys: 1. c. C 2. a. A 3. b. B • Task 3 -gives instructions” ask and answer about the holidays in task 2,using the dialogue in task 1. You can add any information about the holiday you know to make the dialogue more interesting” -does model with a good student -asks Ss to work in pairs and prepare the task in 3ms -goes around to offer help -calls on some pairs to act out the conversation -gives feedback -list the activities people usually do in these days -listen and answer -do the task on page 94 -give their answers -listen and answer -listen to the teacher’s instructions -does the model with the teacher -work in pairs and prepare the task in the allotted time -stand up and act out the conversation -listen and answer • Task 2 The keys: 1. c. C 2. a. A 3. b. B • Task 3 • Homework: (5ms) Asks Ss to write in their notebooks: Talk about one of the celebrations/ holidays you like best, following: + name of the celebration or holiday + time of the celebration or holiday + purpose of the celebration or holiday + main activities of the celebration or holiday + your feeling about the celebration or holiday( why you like it best) • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare part: “Listening” • Self –evaluation: Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 106.
    _______________________________________________________________________________________ Date of teaching: Period: 46 Unit 8: CELEBRATIONS Part: Listening AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content: + To encourage Ss to listen to a dialogue about activities the Japanese often do on their New Year’s Day + To help Ss practice listening • Language function: Listening for general and for specific information • Educational aim: At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + develop extensive listening skills + use the information they have listened to for other communicative tasks 1. Language: a) Vocabulary : kimono. shrine, longevity, constancy , … b) Grammar : no structures 2. Skills: Listening- Speaking Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 107.
    3. Method: Communicativeapproach 4. Techniques/activities: Group work, question-answer, game, discussion 5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk, tape 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) h. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson: (5ms) Make a conversation about the celebration or festival with a student Give feedback • Presentation of the new material: (35ms) Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 108.
    Lesson Plan -English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong Tim e Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 6ms 6ms 15ms I. Lead-in -has Ss listen to the song “Happy New Year” -asks Ss to tell activities Vietnamese usually do at Tet -asks Ss to think what activities the Japanese usually do on their New Year’s Days -gives feedback -tells the topic of the lesson: Talking about the New Year in Japan II. Before you listen -asks Ss to look at the textbook and guess which of the following activities the Japanese often do on their New Year’s Day -lets Ss repeat the words -introduces some new words + similar (a) -> similarity (n) ( Antonym) # different (a) – difference (n) + shrine (n) ( synonym) - temple + longevity (n) (Translation) + pine tree (Pictures) + constant (a) - constancy (n) (Translation) -sets the situation: “You are going to listen to two people talking about how the New Year is celebrated in Japan” III. While you listen • Task 1 -gives instruction” read the statements in task 1 to understand and underline the key words. Listen and tick the things you hear” -plays the tape the first time -asks Ss to give their answers -plays the tape the second time to check their answers -gives feedback The key: 1.  2.  3.  4.  5. x 6.  7. x 8.  9. x 10.  11.  • Task 2 -gives instructions” read through the questions, identify the information you need to look for in each question .Underlined some key words/ questions words and guess the answers” -has Ss to listen to the tape and do the task -asks Ss to give their answers -listen to the song -listen to the teacher’s and answer -listen and answer -listen to the teacher -look at the textbook and answer -repeat the words -listen and guess the meaning of the new words and take notes -listen to the teacher -read the statements in task 1 and listen to the teacher’s instructions -listen to the tape and do the task -give their answers -listen and answer -listen to the teacher’s instructions and guess the answers -listen to the tape and do the task -give their answers Unit 8: CELEBRATIONS Part: Listening Content New words: + similar (a) - similarity (n) # different (a) – difference (n) + shrine (n) - temple + longevity (n) + pine tree + constant (a) - constancy (n) • Task 1 The keys: 1.  2.  3.  4.  5. x 6.  7. x 8.  9. x 10.  11. 
  • 109.
    • Homework: (4ms) AsksSs to write in their notebooks: + write a passage about the similarities and differences between Vietnam’s New Year and Japan’s New Year • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare part: “Writing” • Self –evaluation: _____________________________________________________________________________________ Date of teaching: Period : 47 Unit 8: CELEBRATIONS Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 110.
    Part: Writing AIMS ANDOBJECTIVES • Language content: To provide Ss with practice writing a description of one of the popular celebration in Vietnam • Language function: Practicing writing descriptions a celebration’s activities • Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + write a descriptions of a popular celebration 1. Language: a) Vocabulary : review b) Grammar : review( simple present) 2. Skills: Writing 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/activities: Explanation, brainstorming, group work, game 5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk, pare board 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) f. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson:(no checking because the teacher wants to save time So that Ss can have more time to practise writing) • Presentation of the new material: (39ms) Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 111.
    Lesson Plan -English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 8ms 8ms I. Warm up -asks Ss to play game “ Competition game- Christmas Cloze” -divides Ss into small groups -gives instructions” Ss will get a paper in which there is a passage. Ss have to fill in each blank with a suitable word from the box. The group with the quickest and most correct answer will be the winner” The passage (at the end of the lesson plan) -conduct the game -tells the aim of the lesson: Writing description of a celebration II. Pre-Writing -asks Ss to look at the model passage about Christmas again -asks Ss to work out the answers for these points: + name of the celebration + time of the celebration + purpose of the celebration + main activities of the celebration + feeling of the writer -lets Ss do the task in 4 minutes -asks Ss to give their answers -gives feedback Suggested answers: + Christmas Day + December 25 + it is the time when people get together with family and share peaceful moments + people give presents or send cards wishing each other a merry Christmas, decorate Christmas trees and put up lights around the house… + the writer love it very much -asks Ss to get an outline about Mid- Autumn Festival in Vietnam following the points above -lets Ss prepare in 3 ms -calls on some Ss to stand up and answer -gives feedback and suggests some more + lantern (n) + candlelit lantern procession II. While-writing -ask Ss to work in individually and write a description about Mid- Autumn Festival , basing on the suggestions above -lets Ss do the task in 15 ms -listen to the teacher -sit in groups -listen to the teacher’s instructions -play the game -listen to the teacher -look at the model -work out the answers -do the task in the allotted time -give their answers -listen ad answer -get an outline about Mid- Autumn Festival -do the task in the allotted time -stand up and answer -listen and take notes -work in individually and write -do the task in the allotted Unit 8: CELEBRATIONS Part: Writing Content Writing description of a celebration + name of the celebration + time of the celebration + purpose of the celebration + main activities of the celebration + feeling of the writer Writing a description of Mid- Autumn Festival in Vietnam + lantern (n) + candlelit lantern procession
  • 112.
    • Homework: (5ms) AsksSs to write another description of a popular celebration in Vietnam, basing on the model • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare par: “Language Focus” • Self –evaluation: _________________________________________________________________ The passage: Use the words in the box to fill in each blank marks cards lights turkey merry holiday family presents decorate sing Christmas is an annual holiday that (1)……….the birth of Jesus of Nazareth. Christmas Day falls on December 25. It is preceded by Christmas Ever on December 24. It is a (2)…….. when people get together with(3)………… People give(4)………….to each other or send(5)…………..wishing each other a(6) …………. Christmas . At Christmas, people(7) …………..carols to get into the Christmas spirit. As well, people(8) ………… Christmas trees and put up(9) …………..around the house. A common Christmas dinner is(10) ………… There are also lots of baked goodies for the kids. I love Christmas because it is the time when we can share peaceful moments with our family.. The keys: 1. marks 2. holiday 3. family 4. presents 5. cards 6. merry 7. sing 8. decorate 9. lights 10. turkey Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 113.
    __________________________________________________________ Date of teaching: Period: 48 Unit 8: CELEBRATIONS Part: Language Focus AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + distinguish the clusters /fl/, / fr/ and / r/ and pronounce them exactly + use one(s), someone, no one, anyone and everyone appropriately + use vocabulary about holidays and celebrations appropriately 1. Vocabulary: + the words with the clusters //fl/, / fr/ and / r/ in: flower, fruit, threaten, …… + pronouns one(s), someone, no one, anyone and everyone + vocabulary about holidays and celebrations 2. Structure: no structures 3. Procedures: Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 114.
    Lesson Plan -English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong I. Warm- up (5ms) -greets Ss -has a short chat with Ss II. Checking up Previous knowledge( no checking because the lesson is long) III. Content of the lesson (35ms) • Pronunciation (10ms) -asks Ss to give words with the clusters /fl/, / fr/ and / r/ as much as possible -has Ss read aloud the words -tells the aim of the task : the clusters /fl/, / fr/ and / r/ -introduces some more in the text book -has Ss listen and repeat the words -calls some Ss to stand up and repeat -helps Ss practice the dialogue containing the target sounds -calls some pairs to stand up and practice -gives feedback • Grammar (25ms) Presentation and Exercises I. A. Presentation 1 : someone, no one, anyone and everyone Someone = somebody + Singular Verb -> in an affirmative statement or a question Everyone = everybody + Singular Verb -> in an affirmative statement refer to every person or people Anyone = anybody + Singular Verb -> in a negative statement or a question No one + Singular Verb -> use an affirmative verb B. Exercise 1: -gives instructions -lets Ss do exercise 1 in 3 ms -asks Ss to give their answers -gives feedback The keys: 7. anyone 8. someone 9. anyone 10. someone 11. no one 12. everyone 13. no one II. A. Presentation 2 : One/ Ones One/ Ones + Singular / plural Verb -> replace a previous mentioned noun B. Exercise 2: -gives instructions -lets Ss do exercise 2 in 3 ms -asks Ss to give their answers - gives feedback The keys: 1. Of the three bags I like the blue one 2. Mai is making a fruit cake, Huong is making one, too. 3. I like reading books, especially the ones about the natural world. 4. I don’t have a computer, and my father doesn’t want me to have one. 5. They let me choose a pencil, and I took the red one.
  • 115.
    • Self –evaluation: LessonPlan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 116.
    Date of teaching: Period: 53 Unit 9: THE POST OFFICE Part: Reading AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content : + To introduce Ss to the passage about the post office + To provide Ss with some new words relating to the topic • Language function: + Reading the passage for gist and for specific information • Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: - develop their reading comprehension - use the information they have read to discuss the related topic 1. Language: a) Vocabulary: equip (with), notify, recipient, facsimile,… b) Grammar : no structure 2. Skills: Reading 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/ activities: Pair work, group work, questions – answer, matching, gap-filling 5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk, pictures 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) i. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss + Has a short chat with the Ss b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson: (no checking because Ss have just finished the first semester examination) • Presentation of the new material: (39ms) Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 117.
    Lesson Plan -English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong Tim e Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 6ms 10ms I. Lead-in -asks Ss to play game “ Guessing game”- “What is it?” -gives instructions” The teacher gives the clues, Ss will guess what it is. The student who gives the correct answer will be the winner and get the present” CLUES: it consist of 2 words + It is the place that there are many good services + You can come there to send/ receive money, make phone calls or send letters… + Its beginning letter is “P” -conducts the game The key: The post office -asks Ss questions in the textbook -tells the aim of the lesson: The post office II. Before you read -asks Ss to give some words/ phrases related to the post office in some ways Sending letters post office making calls -gives feedback -introduces some new words: New words: + equip (with) (Example) + notify (v) (Synonym)- inform + recipient (n) (Explanation): The person who receive sth + facsimile : Fax + subscribe (v) : (Translation) + distribute (v) (Situation) -checks understanding of the new words III. While you read • Task 1 -gives instructions -asks Ss to work in pairs to do the task -lets Ss do the task in 5 ms -asks Ss to give their answers -gives feedback The keys: 1. C 2. B 3. D 4. C • Task 2 -gives instructions “ skim the questions to understand them and -listen to the teacher’s instructions -play the game -listen and answer the teacher’s questions -listen and answer -listen and answer -listen and guess the meaning of the new words -copy down the new words in their note-books -listen and answer -listen to the teacher’s instructions -work in pairs to do the task in the allotted time -give their answers -listen and answer -listen to the teacher’s instructions Unit 9: THE POST OFFICE Part: Reading Content New words: + equip (with) + notify (v) - inform + recipient (n) : The person who receive sth + facsimile : Fax + subscribe (v) + distribute (v) • Task 1 The keys: 1. C 2. B 3. D 4. C
  • 118.
    • Homework: (5ms) AsksSs to write in their notebooks: + learn the lesson well. + talk about their local P.O and compare it and Thanh Ba P.O • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare part: “Speaking” • Self –evaluation: _____________________________________________________________________________________ Date of teaching: Period : 54 Unit 9: THE POST OFFICE Part: Speaking AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content : + To enable Ss to use appropriate language to talk about different postal and telecommunication services • Language function: + Talking about different postal and telecommunication services • Educational aim : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + talk about different postal and telecommunication services + know how to make requests 1. Language: a) Vocabulary: b) Grammar : Questions for making requests + Could you help me… + I would like…. 2. Skills: Speaking 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/activities: Pair work, group works, discussion, pictures 5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) a. Warm- up: Greets the Ss b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson: (5ms) - Asks Ss to give the words in E.L 1. th«ng b¸o 2. ®¨ng kÝ, thuª bao 3. ngêi nhËn - Tell some service provided by Than Ba Post Office Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 119.
    The keys: 1. inform2. subscribe 3. recipient - Some service provided by Than Ba Post Office: Mail and Parcel Service Express Money Transfer Phone Calls and Faxes Press Distribution • Presentation of the new material: (34ms) Tim e Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 5ms 9ms 20ms I. Lead-in -asks Ss to list some services provided by their post office -makes question” How can we do if we want to use these service? -gives feedback: Make requests -tells the aim of the lesson: Talking about different postal and telecommunication services II. Pre- Practice • Task 1 -introduces the model dialogue -asks Ss to work in pairs and practice the dialogue in 2 ms -calls on some pairs to practice it -gives feedback -asks Ss * What service is the customer using in the dialogue? -asks Ss to find out useful phrases / expressions to make requests in the dialogue -gives feedback Could you …? What’s …? How much …? … III. Practice • Task 2 -gives instructions ( in the text book) -asks Ss to work in pairs and make the conversations, basing on task 1 -lets Ss do the task in 5 minutes -calls out some pairs to stand up -listen and answer -listen and answer the teacher’s question -listen and answer -listen to the teacher -look at their books and listen to the teacher -work in pairs and practice the dialogue in the allotted time -stand up and practice it -listen and answer -look at the dialogue and answer -listen and answer -take notes n their note books -listen to the teacher’s instructions -work in pairs and do the task in the allotted time -stand up and practice their conversations -listen and answer -listen to the teacher’s Unit 9: THE POST OFFICE Part: Speaking Content • Task 1 # Expressions + Could you …? + What’s …? + How much …? … • Task 2 • Task 3 Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 120.
    and practice theirconversations -gives feedback • Task 3 -gives instructions: “Read the two situations carefully, make a dialogue for each of the situations” -asks Ss to work in pairs and make the conversations, basing on task 1,2 -lets Ss do the task in 8 minutes -calls out some pairs to stand up and practice their conversations -gives feedback instructions -work in pairs and do the task in the allotted time -stand up and practice their conversations -listen and answer • Homework: (5ms) Asks Ss to make other examples such as “Express Money Transfer” • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare part: “Listening” • Self –evaluation: _________________________________________________________________________ Date of teaching: Period : 55 Unit 9: THE POST OFFICE Part: Listening AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content: + To encourage Ss to listen to a monologue about the development of Viet nam’s system overt the past few years + To help Ss practice listening • Language function: Listening for general and for specific information Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 121.
    • Educational aim:At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + develop extensive listening skills + use the information they have listened to for other communicative tasks 1. Language: a) Vocabulary : commune, rural net work, capacity , … b) Grammar : no structures 2. Skills: Speaking 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/activities: Pair work, group works, discussion, question-answer, game 5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) i. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance Checking up previous lesson: (5ms) Make a conversation about one of the services that you want from the post office Give feedback • Presentation of the new material: (35ms) Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 122.
    Lesson Plan -English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong Tim e Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 6ms 6ms 15ms I. Lead-in -asks Ss to play game “ Guessing game”- “What is it?” -gives instructions” The teacher gives the clues, Ss will guess what it is. The student who gives the correct answer will be the winner and get the present” - CLUES: it consist of 9 letters + It is a thing + It’s small and easy to bring + We can use it to contact people, write and send massage… -conducts the game The key: a cell phone -asks Ss questions in the textbook -tells the aim of the lesson: Talking about Viet nam’s telephone system II. Before you listen -introduces some new words + commune (n) ( Explanation) + rural net work (Example) + capacity (n) (Translation) + subscriber (n) The person who subscribes -sets the situation: “You are going to listen to some information about the development of Viet nam’s telephone system over the past few years ” III. While you listen • Task 1 -gives instruction” read the statements in task 1 to understand and guess the answer” -plays the tape the first time -asks Ss to give their answers -plays the tape the second time to check their answers -asks Ss to give their answers -gives feedback The key: 1. B 2. D 3. C 4. D 5. C • Task 2 -asks Ss to read the questions and guess the answers -has Ss to listen to the tape and do the task -asks Ss to give their answers -plays the tape again -asks Ss to compare their answers with their partners -asks Ss to give their answers -gives feedback(T may play the tape to check their answers) The key: -listen to the teacher’s instructions -play the game -listen and answer -listen to the teacher -listen and guess the meaning of the new words and take notes -listen to the teacher -read the statements in task 1 and listen to the teacher’s instructions -listen to the tape and do the task -give their answers -listen to the tape again -give their answers -listen and answer -read the questions and guess the answers -listen to the tape and do the task -give their answers -listen to the tape again -share their answers with their partners -give their answers -listen and answer -take notes in their note- books Unit 9: THE POST OFFICE Part: Listening Content New words: + commune (n) + rural net work + capacity (n) + subscriber (n) • Task 1 The keys: 1. B 2. D 3. C 4. D 5. C • Task 2 The keys: 1. China has the highest grown in the number of telephone
  • 123.
    • Homework: (4ms) AsksSs to write in their notebooks: + write a passage about the listening passage • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare part: “Writing” • Self –evaluation: Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 124.
    ____________________________________________________________________________________ Date of teaching: Period: 56 Unit 9: THE POST OFFICE Part: Writing AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content: To provide Ss with practice writing a formal letter to express satisfaction or dissatisfaction • Language function: Practicing writing a formal letter • Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + write a formal letter to express satisfaction or dissatisfaction 1. Language: a) Vocabulary : security, arrogant, punctuality b) Grammar : review( simple past) 2. Skills: Writing 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/activities: Explanation, brainstorming, group work, game 5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk, pare board 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) g. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson:(no checking because the teacher wants to save time So that Ss can have more time to practise writing) • Presentation of the new material: (39ms) Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 125.
    • Homework: (5ms) LessonPlan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 8ms 8ms 15ms 8ms I. Warm up -asks Ss to tell some service at their local post office -makes a question: How do you think about these services? ( Do you satisfy or dissatisfy with these services? Why?) -gives feedback -tells the aim of the lesson: Writing a formal letter to express you satisfaction or dissatisfaction II. Pre-Writing -asks Ss to read the reading passage about Thanh Ba post office and discuss the services that may make them satisfied or dissatisfied, following the cues in task 1 -introduces some new words + security (n) - Safe + punctuality (n) on time + arrogant (a) (Translation) -lets Ss do the task in 5 minutes -asks Ss to give their answers -gives feedback II. While-writing -ask Ss to work in individually and write a letter to express satisfaction or dissatisfaction -lets Ss do the task in 15 ms -goes around to observe and offer help IV. Post writing -asks Ss to change their paperboards & check each other -selects some to hang on the b/b -has Ss correct their friends’ mistakes on the b/b -gives feedback -listen to the teacher and answer the question -listen and answer -listen to the teacher - read the reading passage about Thanh Ba post office and discuss -listen and guess the meaning of the new words -do the task in the allotted time -give their answers -listen ad answer -work in individually and write a letter -do the task in the allotted time -change their papers to check each other -look at their friends’ work -correct their friends’ mistakes -listen and answer Unit 9: THE POST OFFICE Part: Writing Content Writing a formal letter to express you satisfaction or dissatisfaction + security (n) - Safe + punctuality (n) on time + arrogant (a)
  • 126.
    Asks Ss towrite a letter to the Principle of their school to express satisfaction or dissatisfaction about their school • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare par: “Language Focus” • Self –evaluation: _____________________________________________________________________________________ Date of teaching: Period : 57 Unit 9: THE POST OFFICE Part: Language Focus AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + distinguish the clusters /sp/, / st/ and / sk / and pronounce them exactly + distinguish the two relative clauses : “ Defining and non- defining R.Cl and use them correctly 1. Vocabulary: + the words with the clusters /sp/, / st/ and / sk / in: speak, stand, school, …… 2. Structure: Revision: Defining Relative Clause Non- defining Relative Clause 3. Procedures: Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 127.
    Lesson Plan -English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 128.
    Lesson Plan -English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong I. Warm- up (5ms) -greets Ss -has a short chat with Ss II. Checking up Previous knowledge( no checking because the lesson is long) III. Content of the lesson (35ms) • Pronunciation (10ms) -asks Ss to give words with the clusters //sp/, / st/ and / sk / as much as possible -has Ss read aloud the words -tells the aim of the task : the clusters /sp/, / st/ and / sk / -introduces some more in the text book -has Ss listen and repeat the words -calls some Ss to stand up and repeat -helps Ss practice the dialogue containing the target sounds -calls some pairs to stand up and practice -gives feedback • Grammar (25ms) Presentation and Exercises I. A. Presentation 1 : Defining Relative clause -asks Ss to fill in the blank with one suitable relative pronoun This is the man ………..will help us. The key: Who / That -helps Ss to review the meaning and use of Defining Relative Clause “Defining Relative Clauses are used in order to give important information about a person or an object. This information helps to distinguish him / her / it from others.” “ There is no comma. It can start with any pronoun like “ Who, Whom, Whose, Which, That” -gives another example (in the textbook) Eg: An architect is someone who designs building B. Exercise 1: -asks Ss to complete other sentences in the same way as example -explains some new words (if necessary): + brave (a) + coward (n) + tenant (n) -lets Ss do exercise 1 in 3 ms -asks Ss to give their answers -gives feedback The keys: 14. A burglar is someone who breaks into the house to steals things. 15. A customer is someone who buys something from a shop. 16. A shoplifter is someone who steals from a shop. 17. A coward is someone who is not brave. 18. A tenant is someone who pays rent to live in a house or flat. II. A. Presentation 2 : Defining Relative clause with “Who, Whom, or who” -helps Ss review when to use “who” “ whom “and “whose” • WHO: when the noun to be modified is the subject of the main verb in the relative clause • WHOM: when the noun to be modified is the object of the main verb in the relative clause • WHOSE: to express possessive -gets Ss to give some examples to check that hey all understand the rules B. Exercise 2: -gives instructions -lets Ss do exercise 2 in 3 ms -asks Ss to give their answers
  • 129.
    • Self –evaluation: Dateof teaching: Period : 59 Unit 10: NATURE IN DANGER Part: Reading AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content : + To introduce Ss to the passage about nature in danger + To provide Ss with some new words relating to the topic • Language function: + Reading the passage for specific information and guessing meaning in context • Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: - develop their reading comprehension - use the information they have read to discuss the related topic- environmental destruction and conservation 1. Language: a) Vocabulary: human race, prohibit, offspring, … b) Grammar : no structure 2. Skills: Reading 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/ activities: pair work, group work, questions – answer, multiple choice, gap-filling 5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, pictures 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) j. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss + Has a short chat with the Ss b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson: (5ms) -Asks Ss to combine these sentences using appropriate relative pronouns Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 130.
    1. Have youever meet Lan? Lan is our new neighbour. 2. We visited the house. It was built a century ago. -Gives feedback The keys: 1. Have you ever met Lan who / that is our new neighbour? 2. We visited the house which / that was built a century ago. • Presentation of the new material: (35ms) Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 131.
    Lesson Plan -English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong Tim e Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 4ms 6ms I. Lead-in -shows out some pictures ( a panda, a dolphin, a shark, a dinosaur) and asks Ss to tell their names -gives feedback -makes a question: “What is happening to these animals? -gives feedback “They are in danger of being extinct” -tells the aim of the lesson: Nature in danger II. Before you read -asks Ss to look at the pictures in the textbook and name the animals -gives feedback -gets Ss to read the facts about them and answer the questions -explains some new words: + scatter (v) + remain (v) -gives feedback -sets a situation:” You are going to read a passage about how we have destroyed our environment and affected other species and what we can do to save endangered animals. And then you do some tasks bellow” -introduces some new words: New words: + human race : ( Synonym) = human beings = people + consequence (n) ( Synonym) result + prohibit ( v) (Synonym) = ban, not allow + offspring (n) = children -checks understanding of the new words III. While you read • Task 1 -asks Ss to read the passage silently then do task 1 -gives instructions” read through the sentences and identify part of speech of the words to fill in each blank. Then choose the most suitable word from the box to fill in the blank, paying attention to their right form” -asks Ss to work individually to do the task -look at the pictures and tell their names -listen and answer -listen and answer the teacher’s questions -listen and answer -listen to the teacher -look at the pictures in the textbook -listen and answer -read the facts and answer the questions -listen and guess the meaning of the new words -listen and answer -listen to the teacher -listen and guess the meaning of the new words -copy down the new words in their note-books -listen and answer -listen to the teacher’s instructions -work individually to do the task in the allotted time -give their answers Unit 10: NATURE IN DANGER Part: Reading Content New words: + human race : = human beings = people + consequence (n) = result + prohibit ( v) = ban, not allow + offspring (n) = children • Task 1 The keys: 1. extinct 2. protect 3. decreasing 4. pollutants 5. endangered 6. interference
  • 132.
    • Homework: (4ms) AsksSs to write in their notebooks: + learn the lesson well. + write a short paragraph about the reason why some rare animals become extinct • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare part: “Speaking” • Self –evaluation: ______________________________________________________________________________________ Date of teaching: Period : 60 Unit 10: NATURE IN DANGER Part: Speaking AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content : + To enable Ss to use appropriate language to talk about nature in danger and talk about measures for protecting endangered nature • Language function: + Talking about the reason why nature is threatened and measures for protecting the environment • Educational aim : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 133.
    + use therequire language to talk about endangered nature and ways to protect it 1. Language: a) Vocabulary: capture, recreation, fertilizer, pesticides, … b) Grammar : no structures 2. Skills: Speaking 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/activities: Pair work, group works, discussion, matching 5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) c. Warm- up: Greets the Ss d. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson: (5ms) - Calls on one student and asks him/ her to give synonyms of these words in E.L 1. human beings ( human race, people) 2. offspring ( children) 3. prohibit ( ban, not allow) - Asks a question: “ What has been done to protect the environment?” (-> Many things have been done to protect the environment such as: + many organizations have been set up and money has been raised to save rare animals + thousands of national parks have been established + laws have been passed to prohibit killing endangered animals ) - Give feedback and marks • Presentation of the new material: (34ms) Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 5ms I. Lead-in -gets Ss’ brainstorming by asking them to give words / phrases related to the environment -gives feedback Expected words phrases: pollutant nature trees water … -makes a question: “Why is our nature threatened?” -gives feedback -tells the aim of the lesson: Talking about the reason why nature is threatened and measures of -give words / phrases related to the environment -listen and answer -listen and answer the question -listen and answer -listen to the teacher Unit 10: NATURE IN DANGER Part: Speaking Content • Task 1 Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 134.
    9ms 20ms protecting the environment II.Pre- Practice • Task 1 -asks Ss to read some reasons in task 1 -introduces some new words + capture (v) + recreation (n) + fertilizer (n) + pesticide (n) + cultivation(n) + discharge (v) -asks Ss to work in pairs, read the statements and put them in the order of importance -calls on some Ss to present their ideas -gives feedback III. Practice • Task 2 -asks Ss read through the task -explains some new words if necessary -asks Ss to match the problems in task 1 with appropriate solutions in task 2 -lets Ss do in 3 minutes -calls on some Ss to give their answers -gives feedback The keys: (worksheet at the end of the lesson ) • Task 3 -asks Ss state the negative impacts made by people on the environment and suggest measures to protect it -gives example (in the textbook) -asks Ss to work in pairs -lets Ss prepare the task in 5ms -goes around to offer help -calls on some pairs to represent -gives feedback -read the reasons in task 1 -listen and guess the meaning of the new words -copy down the new words in their note-books -listen to the teacher’s instructions -present in front of the class -listen and answer -read through the task -listen and take notes -listen to the teacher’s instructions -prepare the task in the allotted time -give their answers -listen and answer -listen to the teacher’s instructions -listen and take notes -work in pairs -prepare the task in the allotted time -present in front of the class -listen and answer + capture (v) + recreation (n) + fertilizer (n) + pesticide (n) + cultivation(n) + discharge (v) • Task 2 • Task 3 Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 135.
    • Homework: (5ms) AsksSs to write in their notebooks: -tell some activities that they should do to protect the environment • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare part: “Listening” • Self –evaluation: Reason why nature is threatened Measures for protecting endangered nature Killing endangered animals for fur, skin and food Killing endangered animals for fur, skin and food should be banned Keeping animals as pets Keeping animals as pets should be discouraged Hunting or capturing animals for recreation or entertainment Animals should not be captured for recreation or entertainment Burning forests Zoos and national parks should be established to save animals and plants All kinds of animals and plants should be protected Cutting down trees for wood Planning trees should be encouraged Using fertilizers and pesticides for cultivation Decreasing the use of fertilizers and pesticides for cultivation should be encouraged Discharging chemical pollutants into the environment Discharging chemical pollutants into the environment should be prohibited Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 136.
    ____________________________________________________________________________________ Date of teaching: Period: 61 Unit 10: NATURE IN DANGER Part: Listening AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content: + To encourage Ss to listen to a monologue about national parks + To help Ss practice listening • Language function: Listening for specific and for detailed information • Educational aim: At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + develop extensive listening skills + use the acquired language to summarize the information they listen to 1. Language: a) Vocabulary : scenic feature, devastating, maintenance, … b) Grammar : no structures 2. Skills: Listening- Speaking 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/activities: Group work, question-answer, multiple choice, discussion 5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk, tape 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) j. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson: (5ms) Asks Ss to tell some reasons why nature is threatened and offer some solutions to protect our environment Give feedback • Presentation of the new material: (35ms) Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 137.
    Lesson Plan -English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong Tim e Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 6ms 6ms 15ms I. Lead-in -asks Ss to list some national parks in Viet nam they know -gives feedback Expected answers: 1. Cat Ba National park 2. Cuc Phuong National park 3. Phong Nha National park 4. Ba Vi National park … -tells the topic of the lesson: National Parks II. Before you listen -asks Ss some questions in the textbook 1. What purposes do national parks serve? 2. What are the problems that national parks might be facing at the moment? 3. What can we do to protect them? -gives feedback Suggested answers: 1. They protect and preserve the nature beauty of the lands. 2. Many are being polluted by visitors 3. Encourage people to keep the parks clean and green by dropping liter in the right place… -lets Ss repeat the words -introduces some new words + scenic features (Translation) + devastating (a) ( Synonym: destructive + maintenance (n) (Translation) + approximately (adv) : nearly -sets the situation: “You are going to listen about national parks in the U.S.A. Listen and do some tasks below” III. While you listen • Task 1 -gives instructions “read through the statements carefully to understand them and underline key words and work out what information they need to concentrate on while listening” -explains some new words if any -plays the tape the first time -asks Ss to give their answers -plays the tape the second time to -list some national parks in Viet nam -listen and answer -listen to the teacher -listen and answer the questions -listen and answer -repeat the words -listen and guess the meaning of the new words and take notes -listen to the teacher -read the statements in task 1 and guess the answers -listen and take notes -listen to the tape and do the task -give their answers -listen and answer Unit 10: NATURE IN DANGER Part: Listening Content New words: + scenic features + devastating (a) : destructive + maintenance (n) + approximately (adv) : nearly • Task 1 The keys: 1. T 2. T 3. F 4. T 5. T
  • 138.
    • Homework: (4ms) AsksSs to write in their notebooks: + write a summary of the listening passage • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare part: “Writing” • Self –evaluation: In many part of the United States , national parks are used to(1) ... and preserve the natural beauty of the land. To day there are(2) … national parks in the United States, covering (3)….3 % of the total land area of the country(4)….of visitors visit them every year. However , many national parks are in(5) … of being destroyed. Rare animals are(6) … or(7) ….. for fur, skin or other parts. Trees are cut down for wood. Large areas of national parks experience(8) … fires caused by careless people. The pollution from(9) … is harming the parks. If these problems are not solved immediately, many national parks will be completely (10)…. Date of teaching: Period : 62 Unit 10: NATURE IN DANGER Part: Writing AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content: To provide Ss with practice writing descriptive essays • Language function: Practicing writing descriptions of location • Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + describe a national park based on given information 1. Language: a) Vocabulary : coastal, abundant, ha, human bones b) Grammar : the simple present tense 2. Skills: Writing 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/activities: Explanation, question- answer 5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk, pare board 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) h. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 139.
    b. Checking absence:Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson:(no checking because the teacher wants to save time So that Ss can have more time to practise writing) • Presentation of the new material: (39ms) Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 140.
    Lesson Plan -English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 8ms 8ms I. Warm up -asks Ss to close their books and play game “ Competition game-” -divides Ss into 6 groups -gives instructions” Ss think and list national parks they know as much as possible in 2 minutes, then the representative will go to b/b and write down their answers . The group with the most correct answers will be the winner” -conducts the game -makes some questions 1. Have you ever been to / heard Cat Ba national park? 2. Where is it? 3. What do you know about it? -gives feedback -tells the aim of the lesson: Writing description of Cat Ba National park II. Pre-Writing -asks Ss read the fact about Cat Ba National Park -introduces some difficult word phrases: + coastal water + ha = hectare + stone tool + human bone -asks Ss to answer the following the questions + Where is Cat Ba National Park located? + What are the special features of Cat Ba National Park? + How large is it? + What do you know about the animals and plants in Cat Ba National Park?.. + What are some of the historic features of the park? -lets Ss do the task in 4 minutes -asks Ss to give their answers -gives feedback -close their books -sit in groups -listen to the teacher’s instructions -play the game -listen and answer the teacher's questions -listen and answer -listen to the teacher -read the fact about Cat Ba National Park -listen and answer the teacher's questions -do the task in the allotted time -give their answers -listen ad answer Unit 10: NATURE IN DANGER Part: Writing Content Writing description of Cat Ba National park + coastal water + ha = hectare + stone tool + human bone Answer the questions + Where is Cat Ba National Park located? + What are the special features of Cat Ba National Park? + How large is it? + What do you know about the animals and plants in Cat Ba National Park?.. + What are some of the historic features of the park? Suggested answers: + Cat Ba National Park
  • 141.
    • Homework: (5ms) -Asks Ss to correct the mistakes and write the complete paragraph in their note books • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare par: “Language Focus” • Self –evaluation: Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 142.
    __________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Date of teaching: Period: 63 Unit 10: NATURE IN DANGER Part: Language Focus AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + distinguish the sounds /sl / ,/ sm / , / sn / and / sw/ and pronounce them exactly + master the use of relative pronouns with prepositions + use this structure correctly and appropriately to solve communicative tasks . 1. Vocabulary: The words with the clusters /sl / ,/ sm / , / sn / and / sw/ in: slave, small, snack swim,… 2. Structure: Relative pronouns with prepositions 3. Procedures: Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 143.
    Lesson Plan -English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong I. Warm- up (5ms) -greets Ss -has a short chat with Ss II. Checking up Previous knowledge( no checking) III. Content of the lesson (35ms) • Pronunciation -asks Ss to give words with the sounds /sl / ,/ sm / , / sn / and / sw/ as much as possible -has Ss read aloud the words -tells the aim of the task : the sounds /sl / ,/ sm / , / sn / and / sw/ -introduces some more in the text book -has Ss listen and repeat the words -calls some Ss to stand up and repeat -helps Ss practice the dialogue -calls some pairs to stand up and practice -gives feedback • Grammar Revision and Exercises 1. Revision: Relative pronouns with prepositions -asks Ss to combine the following sentences, using relative pronouns 1. That is the girl . I’m looking for her. 2. That is the girl . The girl is our new friend. 3. The picture is beautiful. Lan hangs it over there. 4. The picture is beautiful. You are looking at the picture. -gives feedback The keys: 1. That is the girl for whom I’m looking. 2. That is the girl who / that is our new friend. 3. The picture that / which Lan hangs over there is beautiful. 4. The picture at which you are looking is beautiful. NOTES: 1. “THAT” isn’t used in Non-defining Relative clauses Wrong: Nam, that is studying over there, is my friend. Right: Nam, who is studying over there, is my friend. 2. “THAT” isn’t used after prepositions Wrong: She is the woman about that we are talking. Right: She is the woman about whom we are talking. 3. We can drop the relative pronoun when it is the object That is the girl [ that/ whom ] I share the apartment with. 2. Exercises: ( in the textbook) Exercise 1: -gives instructions -lets Ss do exercise 1 in 5 ms -asks Ss to give their answers -gives feedback The keys: 19. whom 20. which 21. whom
  • 144.
    • Self –evaluation: Dateof teaching: Period : 64 Unit 11: SOURCES OF ENERGY Part: Reading AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content : + To introduce Ss to the passage about sources of energy + To provide Ss with some new words relating to the topic • Language function: + Reading the passage for specific information and guessing Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 145.
    meaning in context •Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: - develop their reading comprehension - use the information they have read to discuss the advantages and disadvantages of different sources of energy 1. Language: a) Vocabulary: Geothermal, windmills, infinite, … b) Grammar : no structure 2. Skills: Reading 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/ activities: pair work, group work, questions – answer, summarizing, gap-filling 5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, pictures 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) k. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss + Has a short chat with the Ss b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson: (5ms) -Asks Ss to combine these sentences using appropriate relative pronouns with prepositions 1. The flat is an old part of the city. I have just moves to this flat.. 2. The meeting was very interesting. I went to the meeting. -Gives feedback The keys: 1. The flat to which I have just moved is an old part of the city. 2. The meeting to which I went was very interesting. • Presentation of the new material: (35ms) Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 146.
    Lesson Plan -English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong Ti me Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 4ms 6ms 17ms I. Lead-in -asks Ss to name some sources of energy they know sources of energy -gives feedback -makes a question: “What do we need energy for? -gives feedback “We need energy to live and work/ to cook meals/ to light/ to run machines/…” -tells the aim of the lesson: Sources of energy II. Before you read -asks Ss to look at the pictures in the textbook and tell anything about the pictures ( What sources of energy is each of the picture? / How can the make energy?) -gives feedback -sets a situation:” You are going to read a passage about sources of energy. And then you do some tasks bellow” -introduces some new words: New words: + geothermal heat : ( Picture) + windmill: ( Picture) + solar panel: ( Picture) + infinite (a): (Synonym)- unlimited + potential (a) ( Translation) -checks understanding of the new words III. While you read • Task 1 -asks Ss to read the passage silently then do task 1 -gives instructions” read through the sentences and identify part of speech of the words to fill in each blank. Then choose the most suitable word from the box to fill in the blank, paying attention to their right form” -asks Ss to work individually to do the task -lets Ss do the task in 3 ms -asks Ss to give their answers -gives feedback The keys: 1. released 2.alternative -name some sources of energy -listen and answer -listen and answer the teacher’s questions -listen and answer -listen to the teacher -look at the pictures in the textbook and answer -listen and answer -listen to the teacher -listen and guess the meaning of the new words -copy down the new words in their note-books -listen and answer -listen to the teacher’s instructions -work individually to do the task in the allotted time -give their answers -listen and answer Unit 11: SOURCES OF ENERGY Part: Reading Content New words: + geothermal heat : + windmill: + solar panel: + infinite (a): )- unlimited + potential (a) • Task 1 The keys: 1. released 2.alternative 3. energy 4. limited 5. exhausted
  • 147.
    • Homework: (4ms) AsksSs to: name some sources of energy and tell advantages and disadvantages of them • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare part: “Speaking” • Self –evaluation: Task 2: The key: Sources of energy Advantages Disadvantages Nuclear power It’s unlimited( it can provide electricity for the world’s needs for hundreds of years) It can be very dangerous Geothermal heat It’s valuable It is available in a few places in the world Solar energy It is not only plentiful and finite but also clean and safe It’s possible during the day time Wind power It is clean and unlimited (there is lots of it) There is no wind energy if the wind does not blow Water power It is clean and unlimited (water power gives energy without pollution) It is expensive Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 148.
    ________________________________________________________________________________________________________ __ Date of teaching: Period: 65 Unit 11: SOURCES OF ENERGY Part: Speaking AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content : + To enable Ss to use appropriate language to talk about advantages and disadvantages of using alternative sources of energy sources • Language function: + Talking about advantages and disadvantages of energy sources • Educational aim : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: • + use the required language to talk about advantages and disadvantages of using alternative sources of energy sources + use the required language to talk about the use of alternative sources of Energy in the future 1. Language: a) Vocabulary: hydroelectricity enormous, renewable, … b) Grammar : no structures 2. Skills: Speaking 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/activities: pair work, group works, discussion, role- play 5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) e. Warm- up: Greets the Ss Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 149.
    f. Checking absence:Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson: (5ms) - Calls on one student to go to the b/b and asks him/ her to give these words in E.L 1. địa nhiệt (geothermal heat ) 2. khong giới hạn (infinite) 3. tiềm năng (potential) Question: “ How many sources of energy are mentioned in the text? What are they?” (-> There are 5 sources of energy mentioned in the text: + Nuclear power + Solar energy + Water energy + Wind power + Geothermal heat ) - Give feedback and marks • Presentation of the new material: (34ms) Tim e Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 5ms I. Lead-in -distributes Ss the handouts and asks them to reorder the letters into meaningful words related to energy 1. sosifl seult 2. ralos genery 3. teraw rowep 4. wpero inwd 5. eraluncn owerp 6. lamrehtoeg ygener -gives feedback The keys: 1. Fossil fuels 2. solar energy 3. Water power 4. Wind power 5. Nuclear power 6. Geothermal heat -makes a question: “What are the advantages and disadvantages of these sources of energy?” -gives feedback -tells the aim of the lesson: Talking about advantages and disadvantages of various -get the handout -listen and answer -listen and answer the question -listen and answer -listen to the teacher Unit 11: SOURCES OF ENERGY Part: Speaking Content • Task 1 + hydroelectricity (n) Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 150.
    9ms 20ms sources of energy II.Pre- Practice • Task 1 -asks Ss to read through the statements and explains the new words + hydroelectricity (n) Eg: Vinh Son hydroelectricity -asks Ss to work individually and do the task -lets Ss do in 3 minutes -asks Ss to compare their answers with their friends -asks Ss to give their answers -gives feedback The keys: 1. D 2. D 3. D 4. A 5. D 6. A 7. D III. Practice • Task 2 -asks Ss look through the dialogue -explains some new words if necessary ( Run out / abundant ) -reminds Ss of the expressions to ask for and give opinions, agree or disagree with someone Expressions: * Asking for opinion: + What do you think about..? + What’s your opinion about…? + Do you have any opinions about..? … * Expressing opinion: + I think/ believe… + In my opinion… + I feel.. * Expressing agreements: + I agree + I think so, too + That’s right * Expressing disagreements: + That might be true, but + Well, maybe, but… -introduces “ useful language” -asks Ss to work in pairs and talk about the ads and disads, using the prompts in task 2 -read through the statements and guess the meaning of the new word -copy down the new words in their note-books -work individually and do the task in the allotted time -compare their answers with their friends -give their answers -listen and answer -listen to the teacher’s instructions -listen and take notes - -listen and take notes -listen to the teacher’s instructions -prepare the task in the allotted time -stand up and perform -listen and answer The keys: 1. D 2. D 3. D 4. A 5. D 6. A 7. D • Task 2 New words: + enormous(a) + renewable (a) * Asking for opinion: + What do you think about..? + What’s your opinion about…? + Do you have any opinions about..? … * Expressing opinion: + I think/ believe… + In my opinion… + I feel.. Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 151.
    -lets Ss doin 3 minutes -calls on some pairs to stand up and perform -gives feedback • Task 3 -asks Ss to work in groups and discuss their belief on the increasing use of alternative sources in the future -lets Ss prepare the task in 5ms -goes around to offer help -calls on some representative to represent -gives feedback -listen to the teacher’s instructions -work in groups -prepare the task in the allotted time -present in front of the class -listen and answer * Expressing agreements: + I agree + I think so, too + That’s right * Expressing disagreements: + That might be true, but + Well, maybe, but… • Task 3 • Homework: (5ms) Asks Ss to write in their notebooks: -write a report on how to use sources of energy economically • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare part: “Listening” • Self –evaluation: _______________________________________________________________________________________ _ Date of teaching: Period : 66 Unit 11: SOURCES OF ENERGY Part: Listening AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content: + To encourage Ss to listen to a monologue about sources of energy Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 152.
    + To helpSs practice listening • Language function: Listening for specific and for detailed information • Educational aim: At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + develop extensive listening skills + use the acquired language to talk about different kinds of energy 1. Language: a) Vocabulary : ecologist, fertilize, resources… b) Grammar : no structures 2. Skills: Listening- Speaking 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/activities: group work, question-answer, multiple choice, gap-filling 5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, tape 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) k. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson: (5ms) Checking up in lead-in part • Presentation of the new material: (35ms) Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 153.
    Lesson Plan -English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong Ti me Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 6ms 6ms I. Lead-in -show out some picture and asks Ss to name what kid of energy in each picture Picture 1: wind energy Picture 2: gas Picture 3: electricity Picture 4: solar energy -makes some questions: 1. Which sources of energy do you use in your house? 2. Is energy important to our life? 3. How important? -gives feedback -sets a situation” You are going to listening to a talk about the importance of energy and how to use it carefully” -tells the topic of the lesson: Sources of energy II. Before you listen -teaches new words Teach word by word following the principles and steps of teaching words New words: + ecology (n) (Translation) -> ecologist (n) (The person who study ecology) + resources (n) Eg: Coal, oil, gas … are natural resources + fertilizer (n) (Picture) -> fertilize (v) Eg: If the soil is fertilized and protected, more trees will grow -checks understanding of the new words -sets the situation: “You are going to listen about sources of energy. Listen and do some tasks below” III. While you listen • Task 1 -gives instructions “ read the statements carefully and identify the key words in each option and the differences between them, then work out what information you need to concentrate on while listening and guess the answers” -explains some new words if any -plays the tape the first time -asks Ss to give their answers -plays the tape the second time to check their answers -look at the pictures and answer -listen and answer the teacher’s questions -listen and answer -listen to the teacher -listen and guess the meaning of the new words and take notes -listen and answer -listen to the teacher -read the statements in task 1 and guess the answers -listen and take notes -listen to the tape and do the task -give their answers -listen and answer Unit 11: SOURCES OF ENERGY Part: Listening Content New words: + ecology (n) -> ecologist (n) + Nitrogen (n): (N) + Oxygen (n): (O2) + Carbon dioxide (n): CO2) • Task 1 The keys: 1. D 2. C 3. D 4. A 5. C
  • 154.
    • Homework: (4ms) AsksSs to write in their notebooks: + write 6 sentences about what benefit people get from the sources of energy • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare part: “Writing” • Self –evaluation: The chart: Jumbled words 1. loac 2. emulotrep 3. lio 4. diwn gynere 5. sag 6. salor gynere 7. Mothergale thea coal petroleum oil wind energy gas solar energy geothermal heat Date of teaching Period : 67 Unit 11: SOURCES OF ENERGY Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 155.
    Part: Writing AIMS ANDOBJECTIVES • Language content: To provide Ss with practice writing description • Language function: Practicing writing descriptions of chart • Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + interpret the chart and write a description of information from the chart 1. Language: a) Vocabulary : b) Grammar : the simple past tense 2. Skills: Writing 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/activities: Explanation, question- answer, gap- filling 5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk, pare board 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) i. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson:(no checking because the teacher wants to save time So that Ss can have more time to practise writing) • Presentation of the new material: (39ms) Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 156.
    Lesson Plan -English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 4ms 8ms 20ms I. Warm up -shows out a chart and asks Ss to say something about it -gives feedback -tells the aim of the lesson: Writing description of chart II. Pre-Writing -asks Ss to study the chart and complete the passage -asks Ss to compare their answers -asks Ss to give their answers -gives feedback The keys: 1. 117 2. coal 3. smallest -asks Ss to answer the following the questions + What is the topic of the chart? + Does it describe the past, the present or the future? + Which made up the largest amount of consumption: petroleum, coal, or nuclear and hydroelectricity? + Which consumption ranked the second? + Which made up the smallest amount of consumption? -gives feedback Suggested answers: + The chart shows the energy consumption in Highland in 2000. + It describes the past + Petroleum…of consumption + Coal ranked the second + Nuclear & Hydroelectricity III. While-writing -ask Ss to study the chart in 2005 -asks Ss to answer the questions above -asks Ss to give their answer -gives feedback -asks Ss to look at the chart and the two tasks again -asks Ss to write the description of the chart individually -reviews some expressions like: Eg: * make up the largest/ smallest percentage * This is followed by * This ranks first/ second… + Verb tenses: *The chart shows the present situation -> simple present tense * The chart shows the past events -> simple past tense -look at the chart -listen and answer -listen to the teacher -study the chart and do the task -compare their answers -give their answers -listen and answer -listen and answer the teacher's questions -listen ad answer -study the chart in 2005 -answer the questions -give their answer -listen ad answer -look at the chart and the two tasks again -work individually and write -listen and take notes Unit 11: SOURCES OF ENERGY Part: Writing Content Writing description of chart • Task 1 The keys: 1. 117 2. coal 3. smallest Answer the following the questions + What is the topic of the chart? + Does it describe the past, the present or the future? + Which made up the largest amount of consumption: petroleum, coal, or nuclear and hydroelectricity? + Which consumption ranks second? + Which made up the smallest amount of consumption? Suggested answers: + The chart shows the energy consumption in Highland in 2000.
  • 157.
    • Homework: (5ms) -Asks Ss to correct the mistakes and write the complete paragraph in their note books • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare par: “Language Focus” • Self –evaluation: Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 158.
    _______________________________________________________________________________________ Date of teaching: Period: 68 Unit 11: SOURCES OF ENERGY Part: Language Focus AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + distinguish the sounds / r / ,/ spl / and / spr/ and pronounce them exactly + use relative clauses replaced by participles and To-inf correctly and appropriately to solve communicative tasks. 1. Vocabulary: The words with the sounds / r / ,/ spl / and / spr/ / in: shrimp, split, spring,… 2. Structure: Relative clauses replaced by participles and To-inf 3. Procedures: Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 159.
    Lesson Plan -English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong I. Warm- up (5ms) -greets Ss -has a short chat with Ss II. Checking up Previous knowledge( no checking) III. Content of the lesson (35ms) • Pronunciation -asks Ss to give words with the sounds / r / ,/ spl / and / spr/ as much as possible -has Ss read aloud the words -tells the aim of the task : the sounds / r / ,/ spl / and / spr/ -introduces some more in the text book -has Ss listen and repeat the words -calls some Ss to stand up and repeat -helps Ss practice the sentences -calls some Ss to stand up and practice them -gives feedback • Grammar Revision and Exercises I. A. Revision 1: Relative clauses replaced by present participles -asks Ss to combine the following sentences, using relative pronouns The girl is my friend. The girl is dancing with your brother. -gives feedback The keys: The girl who / that is dancing with your brother is my friend. -asks Ss to rewrite this sentence into another way -gives feedback The girl dancing with you brother is my friend. Present participle -asks Ss to give any comments on the second sentence  Relative pronoun functioning as subjects can be replaced by present participle (active Verbs) -gives another example in the textbook B. Exercises 1: -gives instructions -lets Ss do exercise 1 in 5 ms -asks Ss to give their answers -gives feedback The keys: 26. The boy playing the piano is Bend 27. Do you know the woman coming toward us? 28. The people waiting for the bus in the rain are getting wet 29. .. II. A. Revision 2 Relative clauses replaced by past participles -asks Ss to combine the following sentences, using relative pronouns I found him sitting at the table. The table was covered with papers. -gives feedback The keys: I found him sitting at the table which / that was covered with papers. -asks Ss to rewrite this sentence into another way -gives feedback I found him sitting at the table covered with papers.
  • 160.
    • Self –evaluation: ________________________________________________________________________________________________________ __ Dateof teaching: Period : 72 Unit 12: THE ASIAN GAMES Part: Reading AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content : + To introduce Ss to the passage about the Asian Games + To provide Ss with some new words relating to the topic • Language function: + Reading the passage for specific information and guessing meaning in context • Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: - develop their reading comprehension - use the information they have read to discuss the Asian Games 1. Language: Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 161.
    a) Vocabulary: interculturalknowledge, solidarity, squash, … b) Grammar : no structure 2. Skills: Reading 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/ activities: pair work, group work, questions – answer, summarizing, gap-filling 5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, pictures 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) l. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss + Has a short chat with the Ss b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson: (5ms) -Calls on a student to come to the b/b -Asks the student to rewrite these sentences using participles clauses 1. The children who attend that school receive a good education. 2. I come from a city that is located in the southern part of the country. -Gives feedback The keys: 1. The children attending that school receive a good education. 2. I come from a city located in the southern part of the country. • Presentation of the new material: (35ms) Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 162.
    Lesson Plan -English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong Ti me Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 4ms 6ms 17ms I. Lead-in -asks Ss to name some sports at the Asian Games -gives feedback -makes a question: 1. How often are the Asian Games held? 2. What sports is Viet nam best ? -gives feedback -tells the aim of the lesson: The Asian Games II. Before you read -asks Ss to look at the pictures in the textbook and name the sports -gives feedback -sets a situation:” You are going to read a passage about the Asian Games. And then you do some tasks bellow” -introduces some new words: New words: + intercultural knowledge : ( Translation) + promote (v): develop + weightlifting: ( Picture) + fencing: ( Picture) + solidarity (n): (Translation) + squash (n) ( Translation) -checks understanding of the new words III. While you read • Task 1 -asks Ss to read the passage silently then do task 1 -gives instructions” read through the sentences and identify part of speech of the words to fill in each blank. Then choose the most suitable word from the box to fill in the blank, paying attention to their right form” -asks Ss to work individually to do the task -lets Ss do the task in 3 ms -asks Ss to give their answers -gives feedback The keys: 1. facilities 2. aquatic 3. enthusiasm 4. effort 5. advancing 6. appreciated • Task 2 -asks Ss to scan the passage and then do task 2 -name some sports at the Asian Games -listen and answer -listen and answer the teacher’s questions -listen and answer -listen to the teacher -look at the pictures in the textbook and answer -listen and answer -listen to the teacher -listen and guess the meaning of the new words -copy down the new words in their note-books -listen and answer -listen to the teacher’s instructions -work individually to do the task in the allotted time -give their answers -listen and answer -listen to the teacher’s instructions Unit 12: THE ASIAN GAMES Part: Reading Content New words: + intercultural knowledge : + promote (v): develop + weightlifting: + fencing: + solidarity (n): + squash (n) • Task 1 The keys: 1. facilities 2. aquatic 3. enthusiasm 4. effort 5. advancing 6. appreciated
  • 163.
    • Homework: (4ms) AsksSs to write in their notebooks: + learn the lesson well. + discuss the questions” What sports is Viet Nam good at? And what is not?” • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare part: “Speaking” • Self –evaluation: If having time, asks Ss to play game” Lucky Number” 1 2 3 4 5 6 9 8 7 Questions: 1. When was the first Asian Games held? 2. Lucky Number 3. How many nations took part in the first Asian Games? 4. Where was the second Asian Games held? 5. Where was the Asian Games held in 2002? 6. Lucky number 7. The 13th Asian Games was held in New Delhi, India. Right or Wrong? 8. How many nations participated in the 14th Asian Games? 9. Lucky number The keys: 1. in 1961 2. Lucky No 3. 11 countries 4. in Manila, The Philippines 5. in Korea 6. Lucky No 7. Wrong 8. 42 9. Lucky No _______________________________________________________________________________________________ __ Date of teaching: Period : 73 Unit 12: THE ASIAN GAMES Part: Speaking AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content : + To enable Ss to use appropriate language to talk about Asian Games • Language function: + Asking for and giving information about the Asian Games Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 164.
    • Educational aim: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + use the required language to ask and answer about the Asian Games + use the required language to talk about sport results 1. Language: a) Vocabulary: old vocabulary b) Grammar : no structures 2. Skills: Speaking 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/activities: Pair work, group works, discussion, role- play 5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) g. Warm- up: Greets the Ss h. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson: (5ms) - Calls on one student to go to the b/b and asks him/ her to give these words in E.L 1. kiến thức liên văn hoá (intercultural knowledge ) 2. tình đoàn ket (solidarity) 3. cử tạ (weightlifting) - Question: “ What is the purpose of the Asian Games?” (->The purpose of the Asian Games is to develop intercultural knowledge and friendship within Asia ) - Give feedback and marks • Presentation of the new material: (34ms) Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 5ms I. Lead-in -makes some questions: 1. When and where were the first Asian Games held? 2. How many countries took part in the Games? 3. How many sports were there at the Games? -gives feedback The keys: 1. in 1951 in India 2. eleven 3. six -tells the aim of the lesson: Asking and answering about the Asian Games -listen and answer the teacher’s question -listen and answer -listen and answer -listen to the teacher Unit 12: THE ASIAN GAMES Part: Speaking Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 165.
    9ms 20ms II. Pre- Practice •Task 1 -hands out the copied papers to the Ss (they are end of the lesson plan) -asks Ss to work in pairs, asks and answer about the Asian Games, using the questions: 1. When and where were the first Asian Games held? 2. How many countries took part in the Games? 3. How many sports were there at the Games? -lets Ss do in 5 minutes -calls on some pairs to stand up and perform in front of the class -gives feedback III. Practice • Task 2 -asks Ss study the table and look at the two pictures below -asks Ss to work in groups of 4 -gives instructions: ”each groups chooses a reporter and prepare the report about Vietnam’s performance and achievement at the 14th Asian Games.” The cues: +What the sport +Where it is held +How many countries participate in +What sports Vietnam compete in +What medal it obtain in each sport -lets Ss do in 8 minutes -calls on the representative of each group to come to the front and report -gives feedback -get the papers -listen to the teacher’s instructions -prepare the task in the allotted -present in front of the class -listen and answer -study the table and the two pictures -work in groups of 4 -listen to the teacher’s instructions -prepare the task in the allotted time -stand up and perform -listen and answer Content • Task 1 1. When and where were the first Asian Games held? 2. How many countries took part in the Games? 3. How many sports were there at the Games? • Task 2 The cues: +What the sport +Where it is held +How many countries participate in +What sports Vietnam compete in +What medal it obtain in each sport Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 166.
    • Homework: (5ms) AsksSs to practice more at home • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare part: “Listening” • Self –evaluation: The copied papers Card A: Games No Host country Year No of countries No of sports 1 India 1951 11 6 2 3 Japan 1958 20 13 4 5 Thailand 1966 18 14 6 7 Iran 1974 25 16 8 9 India 1982 33 21 10 11 China 1990 37 27 12 13 Korea 1998 41 36 14 15 Qatar 2006 45 39 Card B: Games No Host country Year No of countries No of sports 1 2 Philippines 1954 18 8 3 4 Indonesia 1962 17 13 5 6 Thailand 1970 18 13 7 8 Thailand 1978 25 19 9 Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 167.
    10 Korea 198627 25 11 12 Japan 1994 42 34 13 14 Korea 2002 44 38 15 ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ____ Date of teaching: Period : 74 Unit 12: THE ASIAN GAMES Part: Listening AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content: + To encourage Ss to listen to a monologue about sports + To help Ss practice listening • Language function: Listening for specific and for detailed information • Educational aim: At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + develop extensive listening skills + use the acquired language to talk about sports and sportsmen 1. Language: a) Vocabulary : freestyle, gymnast, gymnasium… b) Grammar : no structures 2. Skills: Listening- Speaking 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/activities: Group work, question-answer, multiple choice 5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk, tape 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) a. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson: (5ms) Asks Ss to talk about sports that Vietnamese athletes won at 14th Asian Games Give feedback • Presentation of the new material: (35ms) Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 168.
    Lesson Plan -English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong Tim e Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 6ms 6ms 15ms I. Lead-in -asks Ss to look at the pictures and name the sports -makes questions: 1. Have you ever watched them on T.V? 2. Which one do you like best? Why? 3. Tell some athletes won gold medal in these sports -gives feedback -tells the topic of the lesson: Sports and sportsmen II. Before you listen -lets Ss repeat the words -introduces some new words + freestyle (n) (Translation) + gymnast (n): (Picture) + gymnasium (n): + bar (n): (Picture) -sets the situation: “You are going to listen about sources of energy. Listen and do some tasks below” III. While you listen • Task 1 -gives instructions “ read the statements carefully and identify the key words in each option and the differences between them, then work out what information you need to concentrate on while listening and guess the answers” -explains some new words if any -plays the tape the first time -asks Ss to give their answers -plays the tape the second time to check their answers -gives feedback The key: 1. C 2. A 3. B 4. B 5. D • Task 2 -gives instructions” read through the questions, identify the information you need to look for in each question .Underlined some key words/ questions words and guess the answers” -has Ss to listen to the tape and do the task -asks Ss to give their answers -plays the tape again -look at the pictures in the textbook and answer -listen and answer the teacher’s questions -listen and answer -listen to the teacher -repeat the words -listen and guess the meaning of the new words and take notes -listen to the teacher -read the statements in task 1 and guess the answers -listen and take notes -listen to the tape and do the task -give their answers -listen and answer -listen to the teacher’s instructions -guess the answers -listen to the tape and do the task -give their answers -listen to the tape again -share their answers with their partners -give their answers -listen and answer -take notes in their note-books Unit 12: THE ASIAN GAMES Part: Listening Content New words: + freestyle (n) + gymnast (n) + gymnasium (n) + bar • Task 1 The keys: 1. C 2. A 3. B 4. B 5. D
  • 169.
    • Homework: (4ms) AsksSs to write in their notebooks: + write a paragraph about Vietnam’s performance and achievements in recent Asia Games Asks Ss to prepare part: “Writing” • Self –evaluation: Date of teaching: Period : 75 Unit 12: THE ASIAN GAMES Part: Writing AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content: To provide Ss with practice writing description • Language function: Practicing writing descriptions of preparations for the coming Asian Games • Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + write a paragraph describing the preparations for the coming Asian Games, using future verb tenses 1. Language: a) Vocabulary : b) Grammar : the future tense Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 170.
    2. Skills: Writing 3.Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/activities: Explanation, question- answer, brainstorming 5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk, pare board 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) j. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson:(no checking because the teacher wants to save time So that Ss can have more time to practise writing) • Presentation of the new material: (39ms) Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 171.
    • Homework: (5ms) -Asks Ss to correct the mistakes and write the complete paragraph in their note books • Preparation for the next lesson: Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 4ms 8ms 20ms 7ms I. Warm up -gets Ss to brainstorm and write down the words/ phrases about things or facilities related the Asian Games -gives feedback -sets the situation” Suppose Vietnam is going to host the coming Asian Games. What will we prepare for it?” Expected answers: + stadiums + car parks + roads +… -tells the aim of the lesson: Describing the preparations for the coming Asian Games II. Pre-Writing -asks Ss to read the prompts -explains some new words + upgrade (v) (Translation) + stadium (n) ( Picture) + equip (v) (Translation) + recruit (v) (Translation) III. While-writing -asks Ss to write the description using the prompts -lets Ss do the task in 15 ms -goes around to observe and offer help IV. Post writing -selects some of Ss’ paper sheets and hang them on the b/b -has Ss correct their friends’ mistakes on the b/b -gives feedback * T draw Ss’ attention to the format of the paragraph ( topic sentences, supporting ideas/ examples, linking words, concluding sentence …) -brainstorm and write down -listen and answer -listen to the teacher -listen to the teacher -read the prompts -listen and guess the meaning of the new words -listen to the teacher’s instructions -do the task in the allotted time -hand in the paper sheets -look at their friends’ work -correct their friends’ mistakes -listen and answer Unit 12: THE ASIAN GAMES Part: Writing Content Describing the preparations for the coming Asian Games • New words + upgrade (v) (Translation) + stadium (n) ( Picture) + equip (v) (Translation) + recruit (v)
  • 172.
    Asks Ss toprepare par: “Language Focus” • Self –evaluation: Sample Writing: To prepare for the coming Asian Games, we have a lot of things to do. First of all, we will build one more National Stadium and some sports building and car parks. The National Sports Centers and local stadiums are not in good condition, so they need to be immediately upgrades. And we will widen the training areas and the roads to the sports buildings. Then we have to equip all the hotels and guess houses with modern facilities to welcome foreign athletes and visitors. These hotels should also have special services for disabled athletes. It is necessary to promote and advertise all the preparations for the Asian Games on the radio and T.V. Finally, we need to recruit volunteers to serve the Games. These people should be university teachers and students with good English. One more important thing is that we have to hold a competition to choose an official song for welcoming the Asian Games. __________________________________________________________________________ __ Date of teaching: Period : 76 Unit 12: THE ASIAN GAMES Part: Language Focus AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + distinguish the sounds / str /, / skr / and / skw/ and pronounce them exactly + mater the use of relative clauses and equivalent types of clauses without relative pronouns + use relative clauses correctly and appropriately to solve communicative tasks. 1. Vocabulary: The words with the sounds / str / ,/ skr / and / skw/ in: street, scream, square,… 2. Structure: Relative clauses – Omission of Relative pronouns 3. Procedures: Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 173.
    Lesson Plan -English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong I. Warm- up (5ms) -greets Ss -has a short chat with Ss II. Checking up Previous knowledge( no checking) III. Content of the lesson (35ms) • Pronunciation -asks Ss to give words with the sounds / str /, / skr / and / skw/ as much as possible -has Ss read aloud the words -tells the aim of the task : the sounds / str /, / skr / and / skw/ -introduces some more in the text book -has Ss listen and repeat the words -calls some Ss to stand up and repeat -helps Ss practice the sentences -calls some Ss to stand up and practice them -gives feedback • Grammar Revision and Exercises I. A. Revision 1: Relative clauses without Relative Pronouns -asks Ss to combine the following sentences, using a relative clause I like the book. I bought it at the book store last week. -gives feedback The keys: I like the book which / that I bought at the book store last week. Or: I like the book I bought at the book store last week. -asks Ss to give any comments on the second sentence  Relative pronoun functioning as an object can be omitted -gives another example in the textbook B. Exercises 1: -gives instructions” Complete the following sentences in the same ways as the example” -lets Ss do exercise 1 in 4 ms -asks Ss to give their answers -gives feedback The keys: 30. you lost 31. he invited to the birthday party 32. John told 33. … II. A. Revision 2 Relative clause with a prepositions -asks Ss to combine the following sentences, using relative pronouns The music is very interesting. He is listening to the music. -gives feedback The keys: The music [which / that] he is listening to is very interesting. Or: The music he is listening to is very interesting. -asks Ss to give any comments on the second sentence  Relative pronouns replacing objects after preposition can be omitted -gives another example in the textbook B. Exercises 2: -gives instructions”” Complete the following sentences in the same ways as the example” -lets Ss do exercise 1 in 4 ms -asks Ss to give their answers -gives feedback The keys:
  • 174.
    • Self –evaluation: __________________________________________________________________________ ___ Dateof teaching: Period : 77 Unit 13: HOBBIES Part: Reading AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content : + To introduce Ss to the passage about hobbies + To provide Ss with some new words relating to the topic • Language function: + Reading the passage for specific information and guessing meaning in context • Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: - develop their reading comprehension - use the information they have read to discuss the related topic 1. Language: a) Vocabulary: the new words are in task 1 b) Grammar : no structure 2. Skills: Reading 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/ activities: Pair work, group work, questions – answer 5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk, pictures 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) m. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss + Has a short chat with the Ss b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson: (5ms) -Calls on a student to come to the b/b -Asks the student to make 2 sentences using relative clauses without relative pronouns -Gives feedback and marks • Presentation of the new material: (35ms) Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 175.
    Lesson Plan -English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong Tim e Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 4ms 6ms 17ms I. Lead-in -makes a question: 1What do you like to do in your free time? -gives feedback -asks Ss to look at the pictures in the textbook and name the hobbies described -gives feedback -tells the aim of the lesson: Hobbies II. Before you read -sets a situation:” You are going to read a passage about a person’s hobbies. And then you do some tasks bellow” III. While you read • Task 1 -gives instructions” read the passage quickly and stop at the lines that contain these words to guess the meaning” -asks Ss to work individually to do the task in 5 minutes -asks Ss to compare their answers with their friends -asks Ss to give their answers -gives feedback Suggested answers: (at the end of the lesson plan) -checks understanding of the new words by asking them to do the following exercise (the exercise is at the end of the lesson plan) -gives instructions” read through the sentences and identify part of speech of the words to fill in each blank. Then choose the most suitable word from the box to fill in the blank, paying attention to their right form” -asks Ss to work individually to do the task -lets Ss do the task in 3 ms -asks Ss to compare their answers with their friends -asks Ss to give their answers -gives feedback The keys: 1. indulge in 2.accomplished 3. avid 4. modest 5. keep me occupied 6. discarded 7. accompanying -listen and answer the teacher’s questions -look at the pictures in the textbook and answer -listen and answer -listen to the teacher -listen to the teacher -listen to the teacher’s instructions -work individually to do the task in the allotted time -compare their answers -give their answers -listen and answer -listen to the teacher’s instructions -work individually and do the task in the allotted time -compare their answers with their friends -give their answers -listen and answer -listen to the teacher’s Unit 13: HOBBIES Part: Reading Content • Task 1 The keys: 1. indulge in 2. accomplished 3. avid 4. modest 5. keep me occupied 6. discarded 7. accompanying • Task 2 Answer the questions: The keys: 1. His first hobby is playing his guitar 2. No, he isn’t 3. Because he is an accomplished guitarist and he is good at accompanying people singing by
  • 176.
    • Homework: (4ms) AsksSs to write in their notebooks: + learn the lesson well. + write a short paragraph talking about their hobbies • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare part: “Speaking” • Self –evaluation: Task 1: Suggested answers: 1. accomplished Well-trained, skilled tài ba, tài hoa 2. accompanying Going with a singer, using a musical instrument đệm đàn 3. modest Humble, unassuming nhỏ, khiêm tốn 4. avid Eager Say mê 5. discarded Thrown away đã bị bỏ đi 6. indulge in Allow oneself the pleasure of Đam mê vào một việc gì đó 7. keep me occupied Keep me busy làm cho tôi bận rộn Exercise 1: Use the words above to complete the following sentences 1. I’ll forget about dieting today. I’m going to …….eating whatever I like. 2. He’s an ……..musician. All his songs are very popular. 3. I love all fictions by Sidney Sheldon. I’m an ……..collector of his works. 4. He doesn’t like a big house in the centre. His only dream is to have a …. little house on the outskirt. 5. I spend most of my free time looking after these puppies. They really…… 6. They don’t need the old radio any more. It can be…… 7. Her mother loves ….her on the organ. _______________________________________________________________________________________ Date of teaching: Period : 78 Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 177.
    Unit 13: HOBBIES Part:Speaking AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content : + To enable Ss to use appropriate language to talk about hobbies • Language function: + Asking and answering about a hobby and talking about collections • Educational aim : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + use the required language to ask and answer about a hobby + use the required language to talk about collections 1. Language: a) Vocabulary: oversea, categories, … b) Grammar : Wh- questions 2. Skills: Speaking 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/activities: pair work, group works, role- play 5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) i. Warm- up: Greets the Ss j. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson: (5ms) - Calls on one student to go to in the front and tell his/ her classmates about his/ her hobbies - Give feedback and marks • Presentation of the new material: (34ms) Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 10ms I. Lead-in -asks Ss to play game “ Find someone who…” -gives instructions” go around the lass and interview your classmates to find out someone who likes or doesn’t like these activities then tick in the right column and ask him/her to give the reasons why. The person who firstly finishes the task will be the winner” (the handout is at the end of the lesson plan) -conducts the game -tells the aim of the lesson: Asking and answering about hobbies II. Pre- Practice • Task 2 -listen to the teacher’s instructions -play the game -listen and answer - Unit 13: HOBBIES Part: Speaking Content Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 178.
    8ms 16ms -asks Ss readthrough the dialogue between Lan and Huong -explains some new words + stall (n) : small shop + tag (n): label to show the name of sth) eg: a book) -reads the dialogue along with a good student -asks Ss to work in pairs and practice the dialogue between Lan and Huong -lets Ss practice in 2 minutes -calls on some pairs to stand up and perform in front of the class -gives feedback III. Practice • Task 3 -asks Ss study the suggestions about collection of stamps -reads through and explains some new words + overseas (a ) + categories (n): example -makes the questions: 1. What is the hobby? 2. Could you tell me how to collect them? And how to organize them? 3. Where do you keep your stamps? 4. Why do you collect stamps? 5. What do you plan for the future? -asks Ss to work in pairs and make similar dialogue -lets Ss do in 8 minutes -calls on some pairs to stand up and present -gives feedback read through the dialogue between Lan and Huong -listen and answer -reads the dialogue along with the teacher -work in pairs and practice the dialogue -practise in the allotted time -stand up and perform -listen and answer -study the suggestions about collection of stamps -listen and take notes -listen and answer the teacher's questions -work in pairs and do the task -prepare the task in the allotted -stand up and present -listen and answer • Task 1 +stall (n) : small shop + tag (n): label to show the name of sth) eg: a book) • Task 2 + overseas (a ) + categories (n): • Task 3 Suggestion questions: 1. What is your hobby? 2. Could you tell me how to collect them? 3. How do you organize them? 4. Where do you keep your stamps? 5. Why do you collect stamps? 6. What do you plan for the future? Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 179.
    • Homework: (5ms) AsksSs to practice more at home • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare part: “Listening” • Self –evaluation: Handout for the game Activities Nam e Likes.... Doesn’t like… Reasons Swimming Fishing Stamp- collecting Reading books Watching T.V Playing computer games Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 180.
    _______________________________________________________________________________________________ Date of teaching: Period: 79 Unit 13: HOBBIES Part: Listening AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content: + To encourage Ss to listen to a monologue about hobbies + To help Ss practice listening • Language function: Listening for specific and for detailed information • Educational aim: At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + develop extensive listening skills + use the acquired language to talk about hobby Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 181.
    1. Language: a) Vocabulary: gigantic, ignorantly… b) Grammar : no structures 2. Skills: Listening- Speaking 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/activities: Pair work, T-F statements, gap- filling 5. Teaching aids needed: Textbooks, board, chalk, tape 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) b. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson: (5ms) - Calls on two Ss to ask and answer about their hobbies - Give feedback and marks • Presentation of the new material: (35ms) Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 182.
    Lesson Plan -English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong Tim e Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 6ms 6ms 15ms I. Lead-in -makes a question: “Do you like reading books?” -gives feedback -divides the class into 2 groups -asks Ss to play game “ Competition game” -gives instructions "list the benefits of reading books as much as possible within 2 minutes. Which group having the most correct answers will be the winner” -conducts the game -tells the topic of the lesson: Benefits of reading books II. Before you listen -lets Ss repeat the words -introduces some new words + gigantic (a) (Synonym): very big, very great + ignorant (adj): lacking knowledge, unaware of sth -elicits some more from the listening passage + bygone (a): past + to be fed up with: boring of doing sth + to cope with: to face with + jungle (n): tropical forest -sets the situation: “You will hear a student talk about his hobby. Listen and do some tasks below” III. While you listen • Task 1 -gives instructions “read through the statements carefully to understand them and underline key words and work out what information they need to concentrate on while listening” -explains some new words if any -plays the tape the first time -asks Ss to give their answers -plays the tape the second time to check their answers -gives feedback The key: 1. T 2. F 3. F 4. F 5. T 6. T 7. T 8. F • Task 2 -gives instructions “read the passage carefully, identify the word you need to fill in each blank and guess the answers” -listen and answer the teacher’s questions -listen and answer -sit in groups -listen to the teacher’s instructions -play the game -listen to the teacher -repeat the words -listen and guess the meaning of the new words and take notes -listen to the teacher -read the statements in task 1 -listen and take notes -listen to the tape and do the task -give their answers -listen and answer -listen to the teacher’s instructions -guess the answers Unit 13: HOBBIES Part: Listening Content New words: + gigantic (a) very big, very great + ignorant (adj): lacking knowledge, unaware of sth + bygone (a): past + to be fed up with: boring of doing sth + to cope with: to face with + jungle (n): tropical forest • Task 1 The keys: 1. T 2. F 3. F 4. F 5. T
  • 183.
    • Homework: (4ms) AsksSs to write in their notebooks: + write a paragraph about disadvantages of watching T. V too much Asks Ss to prepare part: “Writing” • Self –evaluation: Date of teaching: Period : 80 Unit 13: HOBBIES Part: Writing AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content: To provide Ss with practice writing a collection Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 184.
    • Language function:Practicing writing a collection • Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + write about a collection 1. Language: a) Vocabulary : b) Grammar : the simple present tense 2. Skills: Writing 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/activities: brainstorming 5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, pare board 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) k. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson:(no checking because the teacher wants to save time So that Ss can have more time to practise writing) • Presentation of the new material: (39ms) Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 185.
    Lesson Plan -English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 4ms 8ms 20ms 7ms I. Warm up -asks Ss to list some kind of collections Eg: collection of stamps, collection of books, collection of songs, collection of ancient things, … -tells the aim of the lesson: Write about a collection II. Pre-Writing -asks Ss to look at the network and make an outline for the information about book collection Where to how to how to buy books collect keep why to Book how to collect Collection classify books books when stared plan for collecting the future Suggested answers: ( at the end of the lesson plan) III. While-writing -asks Ss to look at the outline and write down their work -lets Ss do the task in 15 ms -goes around to observe and offer help IV. Post writing -selects some of Ss’ paper sheets and hang them on the b/b -has Ss correct their friends’ mistakes on the b/b -gives feedback -listen and answer -listen and answer -look at the network and make an outline -look at the outline and write down -do the task in the allotted time -hand in the paper sheets -look at their friends’ work -correct their friends’ mistakes -listen and answer Unit 13: HOBBIES Part: Writing Content Write about a collection
  • 186.
    • Homework: (5ms) -Asks Ss to correct the mistakes and write the complete one in their note books • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare par: “Language Focus” • Self –evaluation: Suggested answers from the network: + How to collect books: buy the book when find it interesting + How to keep books: keep them in a big bookshelf,… + Where to buy/get book: in a bookshop, second-hand stall, from parents/ friends… + How to classify books: different categories: history, people, science, .. + Why to collect books: to broaden knowledge, know more about the world,… + When started collecting: young, 12 years old,…. + Plan for the future: continue to make collection richer Sample writing: I’m very much interested in collecting books and have a book collection at home. I stared collecting books when I was a 12- year- old student. I buy book whenever I find them interesting. Near my house are several book shops, so when I have free time I go there to find books for my collection. Sometimes I also buy books in second-hand book stalls, and occasionally, my parents and friends give me some. Now I have a total of about 100 books and I keep them all in a big bookshelf in my bedroom. I classify them into different categories: books about history, books about famous people,... … I love collecting books because books help me broaden my knowledge and know more about the world. Also, reading books train my patience. In the future, I’ll continue to make my collection richer and richer. I hope to have a library of my own. Date of teaching: Period : 81 Unit 13: HOBBIES Part: Language Focus AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + distinguish the clusters / pt /, / bd /,/ /ps / and / bz/ and pronounce them exactly + use cleft sentences ( subject focus, object focus, and adverbial focus) correctly and appropriately to solve communicative tasks. 1. Vocabulary: The words with the clusters / pt /, / bd /,/ /ps / and / bz/ in: stopped, robbed, stops, robs,… Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 187.
    2. Structure: Cleftsentences: subject focus, object focus, and adverbial focus 3. Procedures: Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 188.
    Lesson Plan -English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong I. Warm- up (5ms) -greets Ss -has a short chat with Ss II. Checking up Previous knowledge( no checking) III. Content of the lesson (35ms) • Pronunciation -asks Ss to pronoun these words: Stopped robbed stops robs -gives feedback -tells the aim of the task : the sounds / pt /, / bd /,/ /ps / and / bz/ -introduces some more in the text book -has Ss listen and repeat the words -calls some Ss to stand up and repeat -helps Ss practice the sentences -calls some Ss to stand up and practice them -gives feedback • Grammar Revision and Exercises I. A. Presentation 1: Cleft sentence with Subject focus -asks Ss to look at the following sentence and comment on it : The girl visited his parents last Sunday. -> It was the girl who visited his parents last Sunday. -tells the aim of the exercise : Cleft sentence with subject focus -asks Ss to draw out the pattern: It + be + Subject Focus + Clause -gives another example in the textbook B. Exercises 1: -gives instructions” Write the following sentences in the same ways as the example” -lets Ss do exercise 1 in 4 ms -asks Ss to give their answers -gives feedback The keys: 34. It was the boy who visited his uncle last month. 35. It was my mother who bought me a present on my birthday. 36. It was Huong and Snadra who sang together at the party. 37. … II. A. Presentation 2: Cleft sentence with Object focus -asks Ss to look at the following sentence and comment on it : The girl visited his parents last Sunday. -> It was his parents that the boy visited last Sunday. -tells the aim of the exercise : Cleft sentence with Object focus -asks Ss to draw out the pattern: It + be + Object Focus + Clause -gives another example in the textbook B. Exercises 2: -gives instructions” Write the following sentences in the same ways as the example” -lets Ss do exercise 1 in 4 ms -asks Ss to give their answers -gives feedback The keys: 1. It is E.L that the man is learning.
  • 189.
    • Self –evaluation: LessonPlan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 190.
    _______________________________________________________________________________________ Date of teaching: Period: 82 Unit 14: RECREATION Part: Reading AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content : + To introduce Ss to the passage about recreation + To provide Ss with some new words relating to the topic • Language function: + Reading the passage for specific information and guessing meanings of the words in context • Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: - develop their reading comprehension - use the information they have read to discuss the related topic 1. Language: a) Vocabulary: dull, pastime, snooker, dart, bricklaying, engrave, … b) Grammar : no structure 2. Skills: Reading 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/ activities: pair work, group work, questions – answer, multiple choice 5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, pictures 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) n. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss + Has a short chat with the Ss b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson: (5ms) -Calls on a student to come to the b/b and make complete sentences from the ones that they were given last period 1. word / he / it / in / was / that / loved / sailing / the / most. 2. December / was / met / in / we / it / that / first. 3. John / it / window / today / was / the / that / broke. 4. scholarship / was / it / the / won / who / Lan. -Gives feedback The keys: 1. It was sailing that he loved most in the world. (Object focus ) 2. It was in December that we first met. (Adverbial focus ) 3. It was today that John broke the window. (Adverbial focus ) 4. It was Lan who won the scholarship. (Subject focus ) • Presentation of the new material: (35ms Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 191.
    Lesson Plan -English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong Ti me Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 4ms 6ms 17ms I. Lead-in -divides Ss into small groups -asks Ss to play game” Competition game- Leisure activities” -gives instructions” look at the pictures of leisure activities and work out which activities is described in each picture. Which group finishes first and has the biggest number of correct answers will be the winner” -conducts the game -tells the aim of the lesson: Recreation II. Before you read -asks Ss to look at the activities above and guess which of these leisure activities British people often do in their free time -gives feedback -sets a situation:” You are going to read a passage about leisure activities British people often do in their free time. And then you do some tasks bellow” -introduces some new words: New words: + dull (a) : ( Synonym) = boring + pastime (n): leisure activities + snooker: (n) ( Translation) + pool (n) ( Translation) + dart: (n) ( Translation) + bricklaying (n): (Example) + engrave (v) ( Translation) -checks understanding of the new words III. While you read • Task 1 -asks Ss to read the passage silently then do task 1 -gives instructions” the words/ phrases in italics in the following sentences all appear in the passage. Read the sentences and go back to the passage to locate and read around the italicized words/ phrases so that you can guess their meaning. Then read the three choice given and work out which one is the closed in meaning to the words/ phrases” -asks Ss to work individually to do the task -lets Ss do the task in 5 ms -asks Ss to discuss their answers -sit in group -listen to the teacher’s instructions -play the game -listen to the teacher -look at the activities and answer -listen and answer -listen to the teacher -listen and guess the meaning of the new words -copy down the new words in their note-books -listen and answer -listen to the teacher’s instructions -work individually to do the task in the allotted time -discuss the answers Unit 14: RECREATION Part: Reading Content New words: + dull (a) : = dull + pastime (n): leisure activities + snooker: (n) + pool (n) + dart: (n) + bricklaying (n): + engrave (v) • Task 1 The keys: 1. A 2. B 3. B 4. A
  • 192.
    • Homework: (4ms) AsksSs to write in their notebooks: + learn the lesson well. + summarize the content of the reading passage • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare part: “Speaking” • Self –evaluation: _______________________________________________________________________________________________ Date of teaching: Period : 83 Unit 14: RECREATION Part: Speaking AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content : + To enable Ss to use appropriate language to about entertainment activities • Language function: + Expressing agreements and disagreements • Educational aim : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + Express agreements and disagreements about entertainment activities and stating the reasons 1. Language: a) Vocabulary: old vocabulary b) Grammar : no structures 2. Skills: Speaking 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/activities: pair work, group works, role- play 5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) k. Warm- up: Greets the Ss l. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson: (5ms) - Calls on one student to go to the b/b and asks him/ her to give these words in E.L Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 193.
    1. chạm trổ,khắc (engrave ) 2. xây gạch (bricklaying) 3. đần độn, chậm hiểu (dull) - Question: “ What are your leisure activities? Why do you like them” (->It’s up to the Ss ) - Give feedback and marks • Presentation of the new material: (34ms) Tim e Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 5ms 9ms I. Lead-in -sets 2 situations and asks Ss whether they agree or not and state the reasons why: S1. “Playing football is very good for our health” S2. “Only men can play the guitar” -gives feedback -tells the aim of the lesson: Expressing agreements and disagreements II. Pre- Practice • Task 1 -gives instructions -asks Ss to work in pairs, read the expressions and do task 1 -lets Ss do in 5 minutes -asks Ss to give their answers -gives feedback -introduces some more Agreements: + you are right + I agree… + I think so, too + that’s right, and Disagreements: + well, maybe but… + that might be true, but… + well, I don’t think so, I think… III. Practice • Task 2 + 3 -reads through the conversation -asks Ss t work in pairs and practice it -calls some pairs to practice in front of the class -gives feedback -listen and answer -listen and answer -listen to the teacher -listen to the teacher’s instructions -work in pairs and do the task in the allotted time -give their answers -listen and answer -listen and take notes -listen to the teacher -work in pairs and practice it -practice in front of the class -listen and answer Unit 14: RECREATION Part: Speaking Content • Task 1 Agreements: + you are right + I agree… + I think so, too + that’s right, and Disagreements: + well, maybe but… + that might be true, but… + well, I don’t think so, I think… • Task 2 + 3 Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 194.
    20ms -asks Ss towork in groups to continue the discussion ( when you discuss with your groups members they have to show their agreements and disagreements and give the reasons. You should use the expressions give in the previous activity) -explains some new words if necessary -lets Ss do in 8 minutes -goes around and offer help • Task 4 -calls on the representative of each group to come to the front and report their discussion -gives feedback -listen to the teacher’s instructions -listen and take notes -prepare the task in the allotted time -perform in front of the class -listen and answer 1. Homework: (5ms) Asks Ss to write in their note books + practice more at home + learn by heart the expressions • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare part: “Listening” • Self –evaluation: Date of teaching: Period : 84 Unit 14: RECREATION Part: Listening AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content: + To encourage Ss to listen to a monologue about camping + To help Ss practice listening • Language function: Listening for specific and for detailed information • Educational aim: At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + develop extensive listening skills Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 195.
    + use theacquired language to talk about advantages of a camping holiday 1. Language: a) Vocabulary : freestyle, gymnast, gymnasium… b) Grammar : no structures 2. Skills: Listening- Speaking 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/activities: question-answer, True- False statements, discussions 5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, tape 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) c. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson: (5ms) Calls on 2 students to stand up and practice again the conversation they learnt in previous lesson Give feedback • Presentation of the new material: (35ms) Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 196.
    Lesson Plan -English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong Tim e Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 6ms 6ms I. Lead-in -asks Ss to play game “ Hangman” -gives instructions” The rule is each time T gives a secret word and the groups will take turn to guess it by telling what letters they think there are in this word. If Ss choose a letter that appears one or more times in the secret word, the letters and their positions will be revealed and Ss can keep on guessing the next letter. On the other hand, if Ss guess a letter that is not in the secret word, then a piece of the man being hanged will be added to the gallows and they will lose their turn to the other group. Ss will get one point for each secret letter they can guess correctly. When the game is over, T will count how many points each group has and the group with more points will be the winner” The secret word: HOLIDAY -conducts the game -makes questions: 1. Where do you often spend your holiday? 2. Whom do you often go with? 3. How do you like it? -gives feedback -tells the topic of the lesson: Camping holiday II. Before you listen -asks Ss : 1. Who are they in the picture? 2. What are they doing? 3. Where are they? 4. What is the weather like? -gives feedback -lets Ss repeat the words -introduces some new words + camping ground (n) area for camping + trash (n): rubbish + wilderness (n): (Translation) + waterfalls (n): Cam Ly waterfalls in Da Lat + depressed (a): ( Synonym): sad + solitude (a) state of being alone + dirt bike ( Translation) -sets the situation: “You are -listen to the teacher’s instructions -play the game -listen and answer the teacher’s questions -listen and answer -listen to the teacher -listen and answer the teacher’s questions -listen and answer -repeat the words -listen and guess the meaning of the new words and take notes -listen to the teacher Unit 14: RECREATION Part: Listening Content New words: + camping ground (n) area for camping + trash (n): rubbish + wilderness (n): + waterfalls (n): Cam Ly waterfalls in Da Lat + depressed (a): sad + solitude (a) state of being alone + dirt bike • Task 1 The keys: 1. T 2. T 3. F
  • 197.
    • Homework: (4ms) AsksSs to write in their notebooks: + list three advantages of a camping holiday and a write a paragraph about that Asks Ss to prepare part: “Writing” • Self –evaluation: ______________________________________________________________________________________ Date of teaching: Period : 85 Unit 14: RECREATION Part: Writing AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content: To provide Ss with practice writing about a camping holiday • Language function: Practicing writing descriptions • Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + describe a camping holiday 1. Language: a) Vocabulary : b) Grammar : past tenses 2. Skills: Writing 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/activities: explanation, question- answer, brainstorming 5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, pare board 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) l. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson:(no checking because the teacher wants to save time So that Ss can have more time to practise writing) • Presentation of the new material: (39ms) Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 198.
    Lesson Plan -English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 4ms 8ms 20ms I. Warm up -divides SS into 2 groups -asks Ss to pay game “ Competition- game”- “ What should be prepared for a camping trip?” -explains the activity:” Image that your class is going to Hoan Lap Lake for a camping for 2 days. Discuss and work out the things you should prepare for the camping trip. After 3 minutes, which groups has the most suitable things will be the winner” . Expected answers: Things to bring: food, drinks, tent, shovel, blanket, whistle, compass, … -tells the aim of the lesson: Describing a camping holiday II. Pre-Writing -asks Ss to look at the picture and guess the activities -gives feedback -asks Ss to do task 1: Match the activities with the pictures -asks Ss to give their answers The keys: 1. g 2. a 3. b 4. c 5. f 6. d 7. h 8. i 9. e III. While-writing -gives instructions (in the text book) -asks Ss to work in groups to brainstorm the ideas of the writing -summarizes the main points + Introduction: Write 1/2 sentences about the time and place of the camping trip + Body: Describe the camping trip in details: the time they set up, what activities they did, and the time they came back from the campground + Conclusion: write about their feeling of the trip -reminds Ss of the verb tenses (the past tenses) -lets Ss do the task in 15 ms -goes around to observe and offer help IV. Post writing -brainstorm and write down -listen and answer -listen to the teacher -look at the picture and guess the activities -listen to the teacher’s instructions -give their answers -listen and take notes -listen to the teacher’s instructions - work in groups to brainstorm the ideas of the writing -listen and take notes - do the task in the allotted time -hand in the paper sheets Unit 14: RECREATION Part: Writing Content Describing a camping holiday • Tasks 1 The keys: 1. g 2. a 3. b 4. c 5. f 6. d 7. h 8. i 9. e
  • 199.
    • Homework: (5ms) AsksSs to correct the mistakes and write the complete paragraph in their note books • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare par: “Language Focus” • Self –evaluation: _______________________________________________________________________________________________ Sample Writing: Last week our class went to Ba Vi for a two-day camping holiday. Our bus left the school very early, at 5 a.m on Saturday morning so that we could have more time to play. When we arrived at the campground, we quickly put up the two big umbrella tents. After that some of us went around to watch wildlife in the forest. Some of our classmates who had been in the place before went swimming in the lake. At around 10 a.m, we gathered near the tent and cooked our food over the open fire. After lunch, we had a short rest. At about 3 p.m , we went fishing in the hope that we could catch some fish for our dinner. Luckily, we caught three big fishes. We cooked and had dinner together happily. After that, we put up a big fire to prepare for the evening activities. We sang and danced around the camp fire. At 11 p.m, we went to sleep in the tents. The boys slept in the blue tent, and the girls stayed in the red one. We all slept soundly. The next morning, we woke up early. After a light breakfast, we organized some games with funny and surprising prizes. After lunch, some of us went around the place while others took a nap in the tents. We got on the bus to leave the campsite at 4 p.m on Sunday afternoon. The camping trip has had a great impression on us. After the trip, our classmates seem to understand more about one another. We hope we can have another chance to go camping again. Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 200.
    ________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Date of teaching: Period: 86 Unit 14: RECREATION Part: Language Focus AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + distinguish the sounds / ts /, / dz / , / t t / and / d d / and pronounce them exactly + use “ both… and, not only … but also, either … or, neither … nor” and “cleft sentences in passive” correctly to do the exercises and appropriately to solve communicative tasks. 1. Vocabulary: The words with the sounds / ts /, / dz / , / t t / and / d d /: sits, reads, watched, bridged,… 2. Structure: + both… and, not only … but also, either … or, neither … nor + cleft sentences in passive” 3. Procedures: Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 201.
    Lesson Plan -English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong I. Warm- up (5ms) -greets Ss -has a short chat with Ss II. Checking up Previous knowledge( no checking) III. Content of the lesson (35ms) • Pronunciation -writes these words on the b/b, and asks Ss to read them aloud: lots friends pitched managed / ts / / dz / / t t / / d d / -asks Ss to give words with the sounds / ts /, / dz / , / t t / and / d d / as much as possible -has Ss read aloud the words -tells the aim of the task : the sounds / ts /, / dz / , / t t / and / d d / -introduces some more in the text book -has Ss listen and repeat the words -calls some Ss to stand up and repeat -helps Ss practice the sentences -calls some Ss to stand up and practice them -gives feedback • Grammar Revision and Exercises I. A. Revision 1: both… and, either … or, neither … nor -asks Ss to rewrite this sentence into another ways: 1. Tom likes apples and Mary likes apples, too. 2. Tom doesn’t like apples. Mary doesn’t like apples, too. -gives feedback The keys: 1. Both Tom and Mary like apples. Or: Not only Tom but also Mary likes apples. 2. Neither Tom nor Mary likes apples. -asks Ss to give any comments on the two sentences NOTES: Correlative Conjunctions Not only …………….but also Either ……………….or -> The verb will agree with the second subject Neither ………………nor Eg: Neither Tom nor the boys like music Neither the boys nor Tom likes music -gives another example in the textbook B. Exercises 1: -gives instructions” Combine the following sentences using Both … and, either … or, neither … nor” -lets Ss do exercise 1 in 4 ms -asks Ss to give their answers -gives feedback The keys: 38. Both Jim and Carol are on holiday 39. George neither smokes nor drinks 40. Neither Jim nor Carol has (got) a car. 41. … II. A. Revision 2 Cleft sentences in the passive -asks Ss to change into cleft sentence
  • 202.
    • Self –evaluation: _________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Dateof teaching: Period : 94 Unit 16: THE WONDERS OF THE WORLD Part: Reading AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content : + To introduce Ss to the passage about the wonder of the world + To provide Ss with some new words relating to the topic • Language function: + Reading the passage for specific ideals and identifying meaning in context • Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: - develop their reading comprehension - use the information they have read to discuss the related topic 1. Language: a) Vocabulary: treasures, belongings, proceed, … b) Grammar : no structure 2. Skills: Reading 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/ activities: pair work, group work, questions – answer, gap- filling 5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, pictures 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) o. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss + Has a short chat with the Ss b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson: (5ms) - Asks Ss to complete the following tag questions 1. You can’t answer all the questions,……………? 2. He believes you, ………………? 3. You won’t tell him, ………………? Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 203.
    4. The boydidn’t know the lesson, ………………? - Gives feedback and marks: 1. can you 2. doesn’t he 3. Will you 4. did he • Presentation of the new material: (35ms) __________________________________________________________________________________________ Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 204.
    Lesson Plan -English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong Ti me Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 4ms 6ms 17ms I. Lead-in -asks Ss to match the pictures with their names P1: Great Wall P2: Pyramids of Egypt P3:Statue of Liberty P4: Eiffel Tower P5: Taj Mahal -asks Ss to tell some information about them -gives feedback -tells the aim of the lesson: The wonders of the world II. Before you read -sets a situation:” You are going to read about Pyramid of Giza . And then you do some tasks bellow” -introduces some new words: New words: + treasures (n) : ( Translation) + belongings (n): ( Translation) + proceed (v) ( Synonym): progress + surpass (v): ( Translation) + propose (v): make suggestion + enclose (v) surround or shut in sth -checks understanding of the new words III. While you read • Task 1 -asks Ss to read the passage silently then do task 1 -gives instructions” read through the sentences and identify part of speech of the words to fill in each blank. Then choose the most suitable word from the box to fill in the blank, paying attention to their right form” -asks Ss to work individually -look at the picture and answer -answer the teacher -listen and answer -listen to the teacher -listen and answer -listen to the teacher -listen and guess the meaning of the new words -copy down the new words in their note-books -listen and answer -listen to the teacher’s instructions Unit 16: THE WONDERS OF THE WORLD Part: Reading Content New words: + treasures (n) : + belongings (n): + proceed (v) ( Synonym): progress + surpass (v): + propose (v): make suggestion + enclose (v) surround or shut in sth • Task 1 The keys: 1. tomb 2. wonder 3. ramp 4. chamber
  • 205.
    • Homework: (4ms) AsksSs to write in their notebooks: + learn the lesson well. + List the wonders of the world they know and tell which one they like to visit and give the reason why • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare part: “Speaking” • Self –evaluation: ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ Date of teaching: Period : 95 Unit 16: THE WONDERS OF THE WORLD Part: Speaking AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content : + To enable Ss to use appropriate language to talk about the wonders of the world • Language function: + Using facts and opinions to talk about features of man- made places • Educational aim : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + Distinguish facts and opinions Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 206.
    + Using factsand opinions to talk about features of man- made places 1. Language: a) Vocabulary: b) Grammar : 2. Skills: Speaking 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/activities: pair work, group works, question- answer 5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) m. Warm- up: Greets the Ss n. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson: (5ms) - Calls on one student to go to the b/b and asks him/ her to give these words in E.L 1. huyền bí (mysterious ) 2. hình xoắn ốc (spiral) 3. của cải (treasures) - Question: 1. Where is the Great Pyramid of Giza situated? 2. How high was it? 3. What was the purpose of this huge stone pyramid? -> 1. It is situated on the west bank of the River Nile. -> 2. 147 m -> It was to serve as a tomb when Khufu died and to protect the burial chamber from the weather and from thieves, who might try to steal the treasures and belongings there. - Give feedback and marks • Presentation of the new material: (34ms) _________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Tim e Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 2ms 12ms I. Lead-in -tells the aim of the lesson: Talking about the Great Pyramid of Giza II. Pre- Practice • Task 1 -listen to the teacher Unit 16: THE WONDERS Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 207.
    20ms -gives instructions( inthe text book) -asks Ss to work in pairs to decide which sentences express facts and which ones express opinions -lets Ss do in 5 minutes -calls out some pairs to stand up ask and answer -gives feedback Answers: Facts: sentences: 2, 3, 4 Opinions: sentences: 1, 5, 6, 7 III. Practice • Task 2 -gives instructions” work in pairs to tell your partner about some facts and opinions of the Great Pyramid, using the information in task 1” -lets Ss do in 8 minutes -goes around and offer help -calls on some pairs to perform in front of the class -gives feedback • Task 3 -gives instructions” work in groups to discuss possible answers to the questions on page 181” -introduces some useful languages (in the textbook) -gives examples -lets Ss do in 8 minutes -goes around and offer help -calls on the representatives to present their opinions. The groups with the greatest -listen to the teacher’s instructions -work in pairs and do the task in the allotted time -stand up ask and answer -listen and answer -listen and take notes -listen to the teacher’s instructions -prepare the task in the allotted time -perform in front of the class -listen and answer -listen to the teacher’s instructions -listen and take notes -prepare the task in the allotted time OF THE WORLD Part: Speaking Content • Task 1 Answers: Facts: sentences: 2, 3, 4 Opinions: sentences: 1, 5, 6, 7 • Task 2 • Task 3 Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 208.
    opinions will bethe winner -gives feedback -present in front of the class -listen and answer • Homework: (5ms) Asks Ss to write in their note books + practice more at home • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare part: “Listening” • Self –evaluation: Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 209.
    _____________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Date of teaching: Period: 96 Unit 16: THE WONDERS OF THE WORLD Part: Listening AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content: + To encourage Ss to listen to a monologue about The Great Wall of China + To help Ss practice listening • Language function: Listening for specific and for detailed information • Educational aim: At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + develop extensive listening skills for specific information and taking notes while listening 1. Language: a) Vocabulary : magnificence , significance, ancient, … b) Grammar : no structures 2. Skills: Listening- Speaking 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/activities: question-answer, gap- filling, discussions 5. Teaching aids needed: textbooks, board, chalk, tape 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) d. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 210.
    b. Checking absence:Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson: (5ms) Asks Ss to give their own ideas about the Great Pyramid of Giza Give feedback • Presentation of the new material: (35ms) Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 211.
    Lesson Plan -English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong Ti me Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 6ms 6ms 15ms I. Lead-in -asks Ss to look at the pictures in the textbook and answer the questions below -asks Ss to give their answers -gives feedback -tells the aim of the lesson: Listen to a passage about The Great Wall of China II. Before you listen -lets Ss repeat the words -introduces some new words + magnificence (n) (Translation) + World Heritage (n): (Translation) + significance (n) (Translation) + visible (a):able to be seen + wind (v): (Translation) + ancient (a): very old -sets the situation: “You are going to listen to a passage about The Great Wall of China and do some tasks below” III. While you listen • Task 1 -gives instructions ““read through the table of information to understand and carefully, and decide what kind of information and what part of speech of the word or expression to fill in each blank” -explains some new words if any -plays the tape the first time -asks Ss to give their answers -plays the tape the second time to check their answers -gives feedback The key: -look at the pictures and answer the questions below -give their answers -listen and answer -listen to the teacher -repeat the words -listen and guess the meaning of the new words and take notes -listen to the teacher -read the statements in task 1 -listen and take notes -listen to the tape and do the task -give their answers Unit 16: THE WONDERS OF THE WORLD Part: Listening Content New words: + magnificence (n) + World Heritage (n): + significance + visible (a):able to be seen + wind (v): + ancient (a): very old • Task 1 The keys: 1. moon 2. 1987 3. Ming Dynasty 4. 200 5. 200 B.C 6. 6,000km 7. 11 meters 8. stones
  • 212.
    • Homework: (4ms) AsksSs to write in their notebooks: + write a paragraph about The Great Wall of China from the listening passage Asks Ss to prepare part: “Writing” • Self –evaluation: ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Date of teaching: Period : 97 Unit 16: THE WONDERS OF THE WORLD Part: Writing AIMS AND OBJECTIVES • Language content: To provide Ss with practice writing a report on a man- made place • Language function: Practicing writing a report on a man- made place • Educational aim : At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + define the format and structure of a report to a place + write a report on a man- made place 1. Language: a) Vocabulary: dedicate to, sandstone, throne,… b) Grammar : present and past tenses 2. Skills: Writing 3. Method: Communicative approach 4. Techniques/activities: explanation, question- answer, brainstorming Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 213.
    5. Teaching aidsneeded: textbooks, board, chalk, pare board 6. Procedures: • Stabilization: (1m) m. Warm- up: + Greets the Ss b. Checking absence: Checks the Ss’ attendance • Checking up previous lesson:(no checking because the teacher wants to save time So that Ss can have more time to practise writing) • Presentation of the new material: (39ms) Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 214.
    Lesson Plan -English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong Time Teacher’s activities Students’ activities The content of the lesson 4ms 8ms I. Warm up -divides Ss into 4 groups -asks Ss to play “competition game” -gives instructions” List as many words/ phrases about places in Nha Trang as possible in 2 minutes. Which group having the most correct words will be the winner” -conducts the game Suggested answers:    -tells the aim of the lesson: Writing a report on a man- made place II. Pre-Writing -sets a situation” you are going to write a report on a visit to the Ponagar Cham Tower in Nha Trang” -gives instructions” Below are some notes made by a visitor to the Ponagar Cham Tower in Nha Trang, use his/ her notes to write a report on the visit” -teaches some new words + dedicate (v) to: + sandstone (n) + throne (n) -helps Ss to work out the organization of the report on + Introduction: general information about the place + Details: the special features, of the place in detail + summary of the visit: how long our visit lasts and our feeling about the visit -notes the Ss about the tenses + The past simple: an event that happened and finished in the past + The present simple: is used -sit ingroups -listen to the teacher’s instructions -play the game -listen to the teacher -listen to the teacher -listen to the teacher’s instructions -listen and guess the meaning of the new words -do the task in the allotted time -give their answers Unit 16: THE WONDERS OF THE WORLD Part: Writing Content Writing a biography New words + dedicate (v) to: + sandstone (n) + throne (n) + Introduction: general information about the place + Details: the special features, of the place in detail + summary of the visit: how long our visit lasts and our feeling about the visit + The past simple: an event that happened and finished in the past + The present simple: is used to describe facts + The passive voice is used occasionally in the report
  • 215.
    • Homework: (5ms) AsksSs to correct the mistakes and write the complete paragraph in their note books • Preparation for the next lesson: Asks Ss to prepare par: “Language Focus” • Self –evaluation: Sample Writing: Last year I had a brief tour to Ponagar Cham Towers. This Tower complex is one of the most beautiful examples of Cham architecture in central Vietnam. The Ponagar Cham Towers consist of 4 towers. They are located on Cu Lao Marble Hill, 2 km north of Nha Trang. They were built between the 8th and 13th centuries. Each tower is delicated to a different god. The largest one was built in honour of Lady Thien Y. The 22,5 m tower contains her sandstone statue sitting on Buddha’s throne. The 2,6 m statue had 10 hands; each is holding an object illustrating the power of Buddha. The tour to Ponagar Cham Tower lasted 5 hours. IT was tiring but enjoyable and memorable ________________________________________________________________________________________________ Date of teaching: Period : 98 Unit 16: THE WONDERS OF THE WORLD Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 216.
    Part: Language Focus AIMSAND OBJECTIVES • At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + distinguish the sounds / ft /, / vd / , / fs / and / vz / and pronounce them exactly + use the structure “ It is said that….” and “People say that…….” correctly to do the exercises and appropriately to solve communicative tasks. 1. Vocabulary: The words with the sounds / ft /, / vd / , / fs / and / vz /: gift, loved, roofs, loves 2. Structure: + “ It is said that….” + “People say that…….” 3. Procedures: Lesson Plan - English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong
  • 217.
    Lesson Plan -English 11 Gv: Nguyen Thi Huu Hong I. Warm- up (5ms) -greets Ss -has a short chat with Ss II. Checking up Previous knowledge( no checking) III. Content of the lesson (35ms) • Pronunciation -writes these words on the b/b, and asks Ss to read them aloud: gift loved laughs loves / ft / / vd / / fs / / vz / -asks Ss to give words with the sounds / ft /, / vd / , / fs / and / vz / as much as possible -has Ss read aloud the words -tells the aim of the task : the sounds / ft /, / vd / , / fs / and / vz / -introduces some more in the text book -has Ss listen and repeat the words -calls some Ss to stand up and repeat -helps Ss practice the sentences -calls some Ss to stand up and practice them -gives feedback • Grammar Revision and Exercises A. Revision: + “ It is said that….” + “People say that…….” -helps Ss to revise the special passive structure” “ It is said that….” and “People say that…….” -asks Ss to change into the passive voice People say that he is a good student. -gives feedback -> It is said that he is a good student. -> He is said to be a good student. -introduces the structures: People/ they + Verb (think, say, suppose, believe, consider, report, …) that + clause -> It is + thought , said, supposed, ………that + clause ( original sentence) -> Subject2 + to be + thought , said, supposed, … a. V2 : simple present : To- inf b. V2 : simple past or present perfect : To have + P.P c. V2 : present
  • 218.